WO1998013796A2 - A system, method and article of manufacture for a gateway system architecture with system administration information accessible from a browser - Google Patents

A system, method and article of manufacture for a gateway system architecture with system administration information accessible from a browser Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1998013796A2
WO1998013796A2 PCT/US1997/017377 US9717377W WO9813796A2 WO 1998013796 A2 WO1998013796 A2 WO 1998013796A2 US 9717377 W US9717377 W US 9717377W WO 9813796 A2 WO9813796 A2 WO 9813796A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
gateway
payment
transaction
merchant
information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1997/017377
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO1998013796A3 (en
Inventor
Trong Nguyen
Mahadevan P. Subramanian
Daniel R. Haller
Original Assignee
Verifone, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Verifone, Inc. filed Critical Verifone, Inc.
Priority to EP97945312A priority Critical patent/EP0934578A2/en
Priority to AU46541/97A priority patent/AU4654197A/en
Publication of WO1998013796A2 publication Critical patent/WO1998013796A2/en
Publication of WO1998013796A3 publication Critical patent/WO1998013796A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
    • G06Q20/08Payment architectures
    • G06Q20/12Payment architectures specially adapted for electronic shopping systems
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00Payment architectures, schemes or protocols

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the secure, electronic payment m exchange for goods and services purchased over a communication network, and more specifically, to a system, method and article of manufacture for securely transmitting payment information from a customer to a merchant to a payment gateway and returning a certification, including a credit confidence factor to allow a merchant to determine whether to accept or reject payment mformatton utilizing a flexible, extensible architecture
  • the present invention relates to an electronic graphical representation of a monetary system for implementing electronic money payments as an alternative medium of economic exchange to cash, checks, credit and debit cards, and electronic funds transfer
  • the Electronic-Monetary System is a hyb ⁇ d of currency, check, card payment systems, and electronic funds transfer systems, possessing many of the benefits of these systems with few of their limitations
  • the system utilizes electronic representations of money which are designed to be universally accepted and exchanged as economic value by subscribers of the monetary system
  • EFT' computerized electronic funds transfer
  • Electronic funds transfer is essentially a process of value exchange achieved through the banking system s centralized computer transactions.
  • EFT services are a transfer of payments utilizing electronic 'checks, which are used primarily by large commercial organizations
  • ACH Cleanng House
  • POS Point Of Sale
  • Home Banking bill payment services are examples of an EFT system used by individuals to make payments from a home computer
  • home banking initiatives have found few customers Of the banks that have offered services for payments, account transfers and information over the telephone lines using personal computers, less than one percent of the bank s customers are using the service
  • One reason that Home Banking has not been a successful product is because the customer cannot deposit and withdraw money as needed n this type of system
  • the more well known techniques include magnetic stripe cards purchased for a given amount and from which a prepaid value can be deducted for specific purposes. Upon exhaustion of the economic value, the cards are thrown away.
  • Other examples include memory cards or so called smart cards which are capable of repetitively storing information representing value that is likewise deducted for specific purposes.
  • a computer operated under the control of a merchant it is desirable for a computer operated under the control of a merchant to obtain information offered by a customer and transmitted by a computer operating under the control of the customer over a publicly accessible packet- switched network (e.g., the Internet) to the computer operating under the control of the merchant, without risking the exposure of the information to interception by third parties that have access to the network, and to assure that the information is from an authentic source. It is further desirable for the merchant to transmit information, including a subset of the information provided by the customer, over such a network to a payment gateway computer system that is designated, by a bank or other financial institution that has the responsibility of providing payment on behalf of the customer, to authorize a commercial transaction on behalf of such a financial institution, without the risk of exposing that information to interception by third parties.
  • Such institutions include, for example, financial institutions offering credit or debit card services.
  • SET Secure Electronic Transaction
  • SET Electronic Transaction
  • Other such secure payment technologies include Secure Transaction Technology (“STT”), Secure Electronic Payments Protocol (“SEPP”), Internet Keyed Payments (“iKP”), Net Trust, and Cybercash Credit Payment Protocol
  • STT Secure Transaction Technology
  • SEPP Secure Electronic Payments Protocol
  • iKP Internet Keyed Payments
  • Net Trust Net Trust
  • Cybercash Credit Payment Protocol One of ordinary skill in the art readily comprehends that any of the secure payment technologies can be substituted for the SET protocol without undue experimentation.
  • Such secure payment technologies require the customer to operate software that is compliant with the secure payment technology, interacting with third-party certification autho ⁇ ties, thereby allowing the customer to transmit encoded information to a merchant, some of which may be decoded by the merchant, and some which can be decoded only by a payment gateway specified by the customer.
  • SSL Secure Sockets Layer
  • Frazier The SSL Protocol Version 3 0, March 1996, and hereby incorporated by reference SSL provides a means for secure transmission between two computers SSL has the advantage that it does not require special- purpose software to be installed on the customer s computer because it is already incorporated into widely available software that many people utilize as their standard Internet access medium, and does not require that the customer interact with any third-party certification authority Instead, the support for SSL may be incorporated into software already in use by the customer, e.g., the Netscape Navigator World Wide Web browsing tool.
  • SSL does not provide a mechanism for transmitting encoded information to a merchant for retransmission to a payment gateway such that a subset of the information is readable to the payment gateway but not to the merchant
  • PCT Peripheral Component Interconnect
  • SSL Secure Hyper-Text Transport Protocol
  • SHTTP Secure Hyper-Text Transport Protocol
  • POS Point of Sale
  • VeriFone supports over fourteen hundred different payment-related applications. The large number of applications is necessary to accommodate a wide variety of host message formats, diverse methods for communicating to a variety of hosts with different dial-up and direct-connect schemes, and different certification around the world.
  • POS Point of Sale
  • business processes that dictate how a Point of Sale (POS) terminal queries a user for data and subsequently displays the data.
  • Banks are unwilling to converge on "standards" since convergence would facilitate switching from one acquiring bank to another by merchants.
  • banks desire to increase the cost that a merchant incurs m switching from one acqui ⁇ ng bank to another acquiring bank. This is accomplished by supplying a merchant with a terminal that only communicates utilizing the bank's proprietary protocol, and by providing other value-added services that a merchant may not be able to obtain at another bank.
  • Internet- based payment solutions require additional security measures that are not found m conventional POS terminals. This additional requirement is necessitated because Internet communication is done over publicly-accessible, unsecured communication line in stark contrast to the p ⁇ vate, secure, dedicated phone or leased line service utilized between a traditional merchant and an acquiring bank. Thus, it is critical that any solution utilizing the Internet for a communication backbone, employ some form of cryptography.
  • SET the current state-of-the-art Internet based payment processing is a protocol referred to as SET. Since the SET messages are uniform across all implementations, banks cannot differentiate themselves m any reasonable way. Also, since SET is not a proper superset of all protocols utilized today, there are bank protocols which cannot be mapped or translated into SET because they require data elements for which SET has no placeholder. Further, SET only handles the message types directly related to authorizing and capturing credit card transactions and adjustments to these authorizations or captures.
  • a server communicates bidirectionally with a gateway over a first communication link, over which all service requests are initiated by the server Secure transmission of data is provided from a customer computer system to a merchant computer system, and for the further secure transmission of payment information regarding a payment instrument from the merchant computer system to a payment gateway computer system.
  • the payment gateway system receives encrypted payment requests from merchants, as HTTP POST messages via the Internet. The gateway then unwraps and decrypts the requests, authenticates digital signatures of the requests based on certificates, supports transaction types and card types as required by a financial institution, and accepts concurrent VPOS transactions from each of the merchant servers. Then, the gateway converts transaction data to host-specific formats and forwards the mapped requests to the host processor using the existing financial network
  • the gateway system architecture includes support for standard Internet access routines which facilitate access to system administration information from a commercial web browser
  • Figure 1A is a block diagram of a representative hardware environment in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure IB depicts an overview in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 1C is a block diagram of the system in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 2 depicts a more detailed view of a customer computer system in communication with merchant system under the Secure Sockets Layer protocol in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 3 depicts an overview of the method of securely supplying payment information to a payment gateway in order to obtain payment authorization in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 4 depicts the detailed steps of generating and transmitting a payment authorization request in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIGS. 5A through 5F depict views of the payment authorization request and its component parts in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIGS. 6A and 6B depict the detailed steps of processing a payment authorization request and generating and transmitting a payment authorization request response m accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIGS. 7A through 7J depict views of the payment authorizauon response and its component parts in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 8 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment authorization response in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 9 depicts an overview of the method of securely supplying payment capture information to a payment gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 10 depicts the detailed steps of generating and transmitting a payment capture request in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIGS. 11A through 11F depict views of the payment capture request and its component parts in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIGS. 12A and 12B depict the detailed steps of processing a payment capture request and generating and transmitting a payment capture request response in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIGS. 13A through 13F depict views of the payment capture response and its component parts in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 14 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment capture response in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 15A & 1SB depicts transaction processing of merchant and consumer transactions in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 16 illustrates a transaction class hierarchy block diagram in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 17 shows a typical message flow between the merchant, VPOS terminal and the Gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figures 18A-E are block diagrams of the extended SET architecture m accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 19 is a flowchart of VPOS merchant pay customization in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figures 20A-20H are block diagrams and flowcharts setting forth the detailed logic of thread processing in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 21 is a detailed diagram of a multithreaded gateway engine m accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 22 is a flow diagram m accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 23 illustrates a Gateway's role in a network in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 24 is a block diagram of the Gateway m accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 25 is a block diagram of the VPOS Terminal Architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 26 is an architecture block diagram in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 27 is a block diagram of the payment manager architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 28 is a Consumer Payment Message Sequence Diagram m accordance with a preferred embodiment of the invention.
  • Figure 29 is an illustration of a certificate issuance form in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 30 illustrates a certificate issuance response in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 31 illustrates a collection of payment instrument holders in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 32 illustrates the default payment instrument bitmap in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 33 illustrates a selected payment instrument with a fill m the blanks for the cardholder in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 34 illustrates a coffee purchase utilizing the newly defined VISA card in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the invention
  • Figure 35 is a flowchart of conditional authorization of payment in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figures 36-48 are screen displays in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 49 shows how the VPOS authenticates an incoming response to a request m accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 50 is a flowchart for the merchant interaction with the Test Gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIGS. 51-61 are flowcharts depicting the detailed logic of the gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 62 is the ma administration display for the Gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 63 is a configuration panel in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 64 is a host communication display for facilitating communication between the gateway and the acquirer payment host in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 65 is a Services display in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 66 is a graphical representation of the gateway transaction database in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Figure 67 illustrates the gateway hardware architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 68 is a block diagram setting forth the gateway software architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
  • FIG. 69 is a block diagram setting forth the gateway components and interfaces in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
  • FIG. 1A illustrates a typical hardware configuration of a workstation in accordance with a preferred embodiment having a central processing unit 10, such as a microprocessor, and a number of other units interconnected via a system bus 12.
  • a central processing unit 10 such as a microprocessor
  • the workstation shown in Figure 1A includes a Random Access Memory (RAM) 14, Read Only Memory (ROM) 16, an I/O adapter 18 for connecting pe ⁇ pheral devices such as disk storage units 20 to the bus 12, a user interface adapter 22 for connecting a keyboard 24, a mouse 26, a speaker 28, a microphone 32, and/or other user interface devices such as a touch screen (not shown) to the bus 12, communication adapter 34 for connecting the workstation to a communication network (e.g , a data processing network) and a display adapter 36 for connecting the bus 12 to a display device 38.
  • the workstation typically has resident thereon an opera ⁇ ng system such as the Microsoft Windows NT or Windows/95 Operating System (OS), the IBM OS/2 operating system, the MAC OS, or UNIX operating system.
  • OS Microsoft Windows NT or Windows/95 Operating System
  • MAC OS MAC OS
  • UNIX operating system Those skilled m the art will appreciate that the present invention may also be implemented on platforms and operating systems other than those mentioned.
  • a preferred embodiment is wntten using JAVA, C, and the C++ language and utilizes object oriented programming methodology.
  • Object oriented programming has become increasingly used to develop complex applications. As OOP moves toward the mainstream of software design and development, va ⁇ ous software solutions require adaptation to make use of the benefits of OOP. A need exists for these principles of OOP to be applied to a messaging interface of an electronic messaging system such that a set of OOP classes and objects for the messaging interface can be provided.
  • OOP is a process of developing computer software using objects, including the steps of analyzing the problem, designing the system, and constructing the program.
  • An object is a software package that contains both data and a collection of related structures and procedures. Since it contains both data and a collection of structures and procedures, it can be visualized as a self-sufficient component that does not require other additional structures, procedures or data to perform its specific task.
  • OOP therefore, views a computer program as a collection of largely autonomous components, called objects, each of which is responsible for a specific task. This concept of packaging data, structures, and procedures together m one component or module is called encapsulation.
  • OOP components are reusable software modules which present an interface that conforms to an object model and which are accessed at run-time through a component integration architecture.
  • a component integration architecture is a set of architecture mechanisms which allow software modules in different process spaces to utilize each others capabilities or functions. This is generally done by assuming a common component object model on which to build the architecture.
  • An ob j ect is a single instance of the class of objects, which is often just called a class.
  • a class of ob j ects can be viewed as a blueprint, from which many objects can be formed.
  • OOP allows the programmer to create an object that is a part of another object.
  • the object representing a piston engine is said to have a composition-relationship with the object representing a piston.
  • a piston engine comp ⁇ ses a piston, valves and many other components; the fact that a piston is an element of a piston engine can be logically and semantically represented in OOP by two objects.
  • OOP also allows creation of an object that "depends from” another object. If there are two objects, one representing a piston engine and the other representing a piston engine wherein the piston is made of ceramic, then the relationship between the two objects is not that of composition.
  • a ceramic piston engine does not make up a piston engine. Rather it is merely one kind of piston engine that has one more limitation than the piston engine; its piston is made of ceramic.
  • the object representing the ceramic piston engine is called a derived object, and it inhe ⁇ ts all of the aspects of the object representmg the piston engine and adds further limitation or detail to it.
  • the object representing the ceramic piston engine "depends from" the object representing the piston engine. The relationship between these objects is called inhe ⁇ tance.
  • the object or class representing the ceramic piston engine inhe ⁇ ts all of the aspects of the objects representmg the piston engine, it inhe ⁇ ts the thermal characte ⁇ stics of a standard piston defined in the piston engine class
  • the ceramic piston engine object over ⁇ des these ceramic specific thermal characteristics, which are typically different from those associated with a metal piston. It skips over the original and uses new functions related to ceramic pistons.
  • Different kinds of piston engines have different characte ⁇ stics, but may have the same underlying functions associated with it (e.g., how many pistons in the engine, ignition sequences, lub ⁇ cation, etc.).
  • composition-relationship With the concepts of composition-relationship, encapsulation, inhe ⁇ tance and polymorphism, an object can represent just about anything in the real world. In fact, our logical perception of the reality is the only limit on determining the kinds of things that can become objects in object-o ⁇ ented software.
  • Objects can represent physical objects, such as automobiles in a traffic-flow simulation, electrical components in a circuit-design program, count ⁇ es in an economics model, or aircraft in an air-traffic-control system.
  • Objects can represent elements of the computer-user environment such as windows, menus or graphics objects.
  • An object can represent an inventory, such as a personnel file or a table of the latitudes and longitudes of cities.
  • An object can represent user-defined data types such as time, angles, and complex numbers, or points on the plane.
  • OOP allows the software developer to design and implement a computer program that is a model of some aspects of reality, whether that reality is a physical entity, a process, a system, or a composition of matter. Since the object can represent anything, the software developer can create an object which can be used as a component in a larger software project in the future.
  • OOP enables software developers to build objects out of other, previously built, objects.
  • C++ is an OOP language that offers a fast, machine-executable code.
  • C++ is suitable for both commercial-application and systems-programming projects.
  • C++ appears to be the most popular choice among many OOP programmers, but there is a host of other OOP languages, such as Smalltalk, common lisp object system (CLOS), and Eiffel. Additionally, OOP capabilities are being added to more traditional popular computer programming languages such as Pascal.
  • object classes can be summarized, as follows
  • Encapsulation enforces data abstraction through the organization of data into small, independent objects that can communicate with each other. Encapsulation protects the data in an object from accidental damage, but allows other objects to mteract with that data by calling the object's member functions and structures.
  • Subclassing and inhe ⁇ tance make it possible to extend and modify objects through de ⁇ vmg new kinds of objects from the standard classes available in the system. Thus, new capabilities are created without having to start from scratch.
  • Class hierarchies and containment hierarchies provide a flexible mechanism for modeling real-world objects and the relationships among them.
  • class libra ⁇ es Two different programmers can use the same set of class libra ⁇ es to w ⁇ te two programs that do exactly the same thing but whose internal structure (I e., design) may be quite different, depending on hundreds of small decisions each programmer makes along the way. Inevitably, similar pieces of code end up doing similar things in slightly different ways and do not work as well together as they should.
  • Class libra ⁇ es are very flexible As programs grow more complex, more programmers are forced to Stahl basic solutions to basic problems over and over again.
  • a relatively new extension of the class library concept is to have a framework of class libra ⁇ es. This framework is more complex and consists of significant collections of collaborating classes that capture both the small scale patterns and major mechanisms that implement the common requirements and design in a specific application domain. They were first developed to free application programmers from the chores involved in displaying menus, windows, dialog boxes, and other standard user interface elements for personal computers.
  • Frameworks also represent a change in the way programmers think about the interaction between the code they w ⁇ te and code w ⁇ tten by others.
  • the programmer called libraries provided by the operating system to perform certain tasks, but basically the program executed down the page from start to finish, and the programmer was solely responsible for the flow of control This was approp ⁇ ate for p ⁇ nting out paychecks, calculating a mathematical table, or solving other problems with a program that executed m just one way.
  • event loop programs require programmers to w ⁇ te a lot of code that should not need to be written separately for every application
  • the concept of an application framework car ⁇ es the event loop concept further. Instead of dealing with all the nuts and bolts of constructing basic menus, windows, and dialog boxes and then making these things all work together, programmers using application frameworks start with working application code and basic user interface elements in place. Subsequently, they build from there by replacing some of the gene ⁇ c capabilities of the framework with the specific capabilities of the intended application.
  • Application frameworks reduce the total amount of code that a programmer has to w ⁇ te from scratch.
  • the framework is really a generic application that displays windows, supports copy and paste, and so on, the programmer can also relinquish control to a greater degree than event loop programs permit.
  • the fraipework code takes care of almost all event handling and flow of control, and the programmer's code is called only when the framework needs it (e.g., to create or manipulate a prop ⁇ etary data structure).
  • a programmer wntmg a framework program not only relinquishes control to the user (as is also true for event loop programs), but also relinquishes the detailed flow of control within the program to the framework. This approach allows the creation of more complex systems that work together in interesting ways, as opposed to isolated programs, having custom code, being created over and over again for similar problems.
  • a framework basically is a collection of cooperating classes that make up a reusable design solution for a given problem domain. It typically includes objects that provide default behavior (e.g. , for menus and windows), and programmers use it by mhe ⁇ tmg some of that default behavior and overriding other behavior so that the framework calls application code at the appropriate times.
  • default behavior e.g. , for menus and windows
  • programmers use it by mhe ⁇ tmg some of that default behavior and overriding other behavior so that the framework calls application code at the appropriate times.
  • Behavior versus protocol Class libraries are essentially collections of behaviors that you can call when you want those individual behaviors in your program.
  • a framework provides not only behavior but also the protocol or set of rules that govern the ways in which behaviors can be combined, including rules for what a programmer is supposed to provide versus what the framework provides.
  • a framework embodies the way a family of related programs or pieces of software work. It represents a gene ⁇ c design solution that can be adapted to a va ⁇ ety of specific problems in a given domain. For example, a single framework can embody the way a user interface works, even though two different user interfaces created with the same framework might solve quite different interface problems
  • a preferred embodiment of the invention utilizes HyperText Markup Language (HTML) to implement documents on the Internet together with a general-purpose secure communication protocol for a transport medium between the client and the merchant.
  • HTTP or other protocols could be readily substituted for HTML without undue expe ⁇ mentation Information on these products is available in T Bemers-Lee, D Connoly, "RFC 1866: Hypertext Markup Language - 2 0" (Nov. 1995), and R Fielding, H, Frystyk, T Berners-Lee, J Gettys and J.C.
  • HTML is a simple data format used to create hypertext documents that are portable from one platform to another HTML documents are SGML documents with gene ⁇ c semantics that are approp ⁇ ate for representing information from a wide range of domains HTML has been m use by the World-Wide Web global information initiative since 1990. HTML is an application of ISO Standard 8879 1986 Information Processing Text and Office Systems, Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML)
  • HTML has been the dominant technology used in development of Web-based solutions.
  • HTML has proven to be inadequate in the following areas o Poor performance, o Rest ⁇ cted user interface capabilities; o Can only produce static Web pages; o Lack of interoperability with existing applications and data; and o Inability to scale.
  • Sun Microsystem's Java language solves many of the client-side problems by o Improving performance on the client side; o Enabling the creation of dynamic, real-time Web applications; and o Providing the ability to create a wide va ⁇ ety of user interface components.
  • Custom "widgets” e.g. real-time stock tickers, animated icons, etc
  • client-side performance is improved.
  • Java supports the notion of client-side validation, offloading approp ⁇ ate processmg onto the client for improved performance
  • Dynamic, real-time Web pages can be created.
  • custom UI components dynamic Web pages can also be created.
  • Sun's Java language has emerged as an industry-recognized language for "programming the Internet " Sun defines Java as. "a simple, object-o ⁇ ented, dist ⁇ ubbed, interpreted, robust, secure, architecture-neutral, portable, high-performance, multithreaded, dynamic, buzzword- compliant, general-purpose programming language Java supports programming for the Internet in the form of platform-independent Java applets " Java applets are small, specialized applications that comply with Sun s Java Application Programming Interface (API) allowing developers to add "interactive content' to Web documents (e.g. simple animations, page adornments, basic games, etc.) Applets execute withm a Java-compatible browser (e.g. Netscape Navigator) by copying code from the server to client. From a language standpoint, Java s core feature set is based on C++ Sun's Java literature states that Java is basically "C++, with extensions from Objective C for more dynamic method resolution"
  • Java Java Application Programming Interface
  • ActiveX includes tools for developing animation, 3-D virtual reality, video and other multimedia content.
  • the tools use Internet standards, work on multiple platforms, and are being supported by over 100 companies.
  • the group's building blocks are called ActiveX Controls, small, fast components that enable developers to embed parts of software in hypertext markup language (HTML) pages.
  • ActiveX Controls work with a variety of programming languages including Microsoft Visual C++, Borland Delphi, Microsoft Visual Basic programming system and, in the future, Microsoft's development tool for Java, code named "Jakarta.”
  • ActiveX Technologies also includes ActiveX Server Framework, allowing developers to create server applications.
  • ActiveX could be substituted for JAVA without undue experimentation to practice the invention.
  • FIG. IB depicts an overview of the present invention.
  • Customer computer system 120 is in communication with merchant computer system 130.
  • the customer- merchant session 150 operates under a general-purpose secure communication protocol such as the SSL protocol.
  • Merchant computer system 130 is additionally in communication with payment gateway computer system 140.
  • a payment gateway is a system that provides electronic commerce services in support of a bank or other financial institution, and that interfaces to the financial institution to support the authorization and capture of transactions.
  • the customer-institution session 170 operates under a variant of a secure payment technology such as the SET protocol, as described herein, referred to as Merchant- Originated Secure Electronic Transactions ("MOSET”), as is more fully described herein.
  • MOSET Merchant- Originated Secure Electronic Transactions
  • Figure 2 depicts a more detailed view of customer computer system 120 in communication with merchant system 130 using customer-merchant session 150 operating under the SSL protocol as documented in Freier and incorporated by reference.
  • Customer computer system 120 initiates communication with merchant computer system 130 using any well-known access protocol, e.g., Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol ("TCP/IP").
  • TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol
  • a description of TCP/IP is provided in Information Sciences Institute, “Transmission Control Protocol DARPA Internet Program Protocol Specification (RFC 793)” (September, 1981), and Information Sciences Institute, “Internet Protocol DARPA Internet Program Protocol Specification (RFC 791)” (September, 1981).
  • customer computer system 120 acts as a client and merchant computer system 130 acts as a server.
  • Customer computer system 120 initiates communication by sending "client hello" message 210 to the merchant computer system 130
  • client hello message 210 When a client first connects to a server it is required to send the client hello message 210 as its first message
  • the client can also send a client hello message 210 in response to a hello request on its own initiative m order to renegotiate the secu ⁇ ty parameters in an existing connection.
  • the client hello message includes a random structure, which is used later in the protocol Specifically, the random structure includes the current time and date in standard UNIX 32-bit format according to the sender's internal clock and twenty-eight bytes of data generated by a secure random number generator
  • the client hello message 210 further includes a va ⁇ able length session identifier.
  • the session identifier value identifies a session between the same client and server whose secu ⁇ ty parameters the client wishes to reuse
  • the session identifier may be from an earlier connection, the current connection, or another currently active connecuon It is useful to specify the current connection if the client only wishes to update the random structures and denved values of a connection It is useful to specify another currently active connection if the client wishes to establish several simultaneous independent secure connections to the same server without repeating the full handshake protocol
  • Client hello message 210 further includes an indicator of the cryptographic algo ⁇ thms supported by the client in order of the client s preference, ordered according to client preference
  • client hello message 210 if merchant computer system 130 wishes to correspond with customer computer system 120, it responds with server hello message 215. If merchant computer s ⁇ stem 130 does not wish to communicate with customer computer system 120, it responds with a message, not shown, indicating refusal to communicate
  • Server hello message 215 includes a random structure, which is used later m the protocol.
  • the random structure in server hello message 215 is in the same format as, but has contents independent of, the random structure in client hello message 210 Specifically, the random structure includes the current time and date in standard UNIX 32-bit format according to the sender s internal clock and twenty-eight bytes of data generated by a secure random number generator
  • Server hello message 215 further includes a va ⁇ able length session identifier.
  • the session identifier value identifies a new or existing session between the same client and server Server hello message 215 further includes an indicator of the cryptographic algo ⁇ thms selected from among the algo ⁇ thms specified by client hello message 210, which is utilized in further encrypted communications.
  • Merchant computer system 130 transmits a server certificate 220. If transmitted, server certificate 130 enables customer computer system 120 to authenticate the identity of merchant computer system 130.
  • Server key exchange message 225 identifies a key that may be used by customer computer system 120 to decrypt further messages sent by merchant computer system 130.
  • merchant computer system 130 After transmitting server hello message 215, and optionally transmitting server certificate 220 or server key exchange message 225, merchant computer system 130 transmits a server hello done message 230 and waits for a further response from customer computer system 120.
  • Customer computer system 120 optionally transmits client certificate 240 to merchant computer system 130. If transmitted, client certificate 240 enables merchant computer system 130 to authenticate the identity of customer computer system 120. Alternatively, customer computer system 120 may transmit a no-c ent-certificate alert 245, to indicate that the customer has not registered with any certification authority.
  • customer computer system 130 may optionally transmit a client key exchange message 250.
  • Client key exchange message 250 identifies a key that may be used by merchant computer system 130 to decrypt further messages sent by customer computer system 120.
  • customer computer system 120 After optionally transmitting client certificate 240, no-client-certificate alert 245, and/ or client key exchange message 250, customer computer system 120 transmits a finished message 260.
  • customer computer system 120 and merchant computer system 130 have: 1) negotiated an encryption scheme that may be commonly employed in further communications, and
  • Customer computer system 120 and merchant computer system 130 may thereafter engage m secure communications 270 with less risk of interception by third parties
  • Among the messages communicated by customer computer system 120 to merchant computer system 130 may be messages that specify goods or services to be ordered and payment information, such as a credit card number and related informatton, collectively referred to as "payment information," that may be used to pay for the goods and/or services ordered
  • payment information such as a credit card number and related informatton
  • the merchant In order to obtain payment, the merchant must supply this information to the bank or other payment gateway responsible for the proffered payment method This enables the merchant to perform payment authorization and payment capture Payment authorization is the process by which permission is granted by a payment gateway operating on behalf of a financial institution to authorize payment on behalf of the financial institution.
  • An embodiment in accordance with the subject invention allows an acquirer processor to accept transactions from Internet storefronts without alte ⁇ ng a current host environment.
  • the system easily converts payment protocol messages and simultaneously manages transacUons from a number of Internet merchant servers As the number of transactions grows, the payment gateway can be scaled to handle the increased business, and it can be configured to work with specific business processes used by the acquirer/ processor Thus, the payment gateway supports Internet processing utilizing payment processing operations.
  • the payment gateway provides support for configuring and installing the Internet payment capability utilizing existing host point-of-sale technology.
  • the payment gateway also provides an intuitive Graphical User Interface (GUI) with support built in to accommodate future payment instruments such as debit cards, electronic checks, electronic cash and micropayments.
  • GUI Graphical User Interface
  • the payment gateway implements secure transactions using RSA public-key cryptography and the MasterCard /Visa Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) protocol.
  • SET MasterCard /Visa Secure Electronic Transaction
  • the gateway also provides full functionality for merchant payment processing including authorization, capture, settlement and reconciliation while providing monitor activity with reporting and tracking of transactions sent over the Internet.
  • the payment gateway also implements Internet payment procedures that match current processor business models to ensure consistency for merchants. Handling Internet transactions is destined to become a necessary function for every payment processing system. Today, merchants often transmit data received over the Internet inefficiently. Some fax the information or waste time keying data into a non-Internet system.
  • Figure 3 depicts an overview of the method of securely supplying payment information to a payment gateway in order to obtain payment authorization.
  • merchant computer system 130 generates a payment authorization request 315 and transmits it to payment gateway computer system 140.
  • payment gateway system 140 processes the payment authorization request, generates a payment authorization response 325 and transmits it to merchant computer system 130.
  • merchant computer system 130 processes payment authorization response 325 and determines whether payment for the goods or services sought to be obtained by the customer has been authorized.
  • Figure 4 depicts the detailed steps of generating and transmitting a payment authorization request.
  • Figures 5A through 5F depict views of the payment authorization request and its component parts.
  • merchant computer system 130 creates a basic authorization request 510.
  • the basic authorization request is a data area that includes all the information for determining whether a request should be granted or denied. Specifically, it includes such information as the party who is being charged, the amount to be charged, the account number of the account to be charged, and any additional data, such as passwords, needed to validate the charge. This information is either calculated based upon prior customer merchandise selection, or provided by the customer over the secure link 270 established in the customer-merchant general-purpose secure communication protocol session
  • Fig 5A depicts a basic authorization request 510
  • merchant computer system 130 combines basic authorization request 510, a copy of its encryption public key certificate 515 and a copy of its signature public key certificate 520.
  • Merchant computer system 130 calculates a digital signature 525 for the combined contents of the combined block 530 comp ⁇ smg basic authorization request 510, the encryption public key certificate 515 and the signature public key certificate 520, and appends it to the combination of the combined basic authorization request 510, the encryption public key certificate 515 and the signature public key certificate 520.
  • the merchant computer system calculates digital signature 525 by first calculating a 'message digest ' based upon the contents of the combined basic authorization request 510, the encryption public key certificate 515 and the signature public key certificate 520
  • a message digest is the fixed-length result that is generated when a va ⁇ able length message is fed into a one-way hashing function.
  • Message digests help ve ⁇ fy that a message has not been altered because alte ⁇ ng the message would change the digest
  • the message digest is then encrypted using the merchant computer system's 130 digital signature p ⁇ vate key, thus forming a digital signature.
  • Figure 5B depicts the combined block 530 formed by function block 420 and containing basic authorization request 510, the encryption public key certificate 515, the signature public key certificate 520, and digital signature 525
  • RK-0 540 is a random encryption key RK- 0 540, denoted as RK-0 Random encryption key RK-0 540 is a symmet ⁇ c encryption key.
  • a symmet ⁇ c encryption key is a key characterized by the property that a message encrypted with a symmet ⁇ c key can be decrypted with that same key This is contrasted with an asymmetric key pair, such as a public-key/ private-key key pair, where a message encrypted with one key of the key pair may only be decrypted with the other key of the same key pair
  • Figure 5C depicts random encryption key RK-0 540
  • merchant computer system 130 encrypts combmed block 530 using random encryption key RK-0 540 to form encrypted combmed block 550.
  • Figure 5D depicts encrypted combined block 550.
  • the encryption state of encrypted combmed block 550 is graphically shown by random key lock 555, which indicates that encrypted combined block 550 is encrypted using random key RK-0 540.
  • merchant computer system 130 encrypts random encryption key RK-0 540 using the public key of payment gateway system 140 to form encrypted random key 560.
  • Figure 5E depicts encrypted random key 560.
  • the encryption state of encrypted random key 560 is graphically shown by payment gateway public key lock 565, which mdicates that encrypted random key 560 is encrypted using the payment gateway public key.
  • merchant computer system 130 concatenates encrypted combined block 550 and encrypted random key 560 to form merchant autho ⁇ zation request 315.
  • Figure 5F depicts merchant autho ⁇ zation request 315 comp ⁇ sing encrypted combined block 550 and encrypted random key 560.
  • merchant computer system 130 transmits merchant autho ⁇ zation request 315 to payment gateway system 140.
  • Figure 6 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment autho ⁇ zation request and generating and transmitting a payment autho ⁇ zation request response.
  • Function blocks 610 through 630 depict the steps of processing a payment autho ⁇ zation request, while function blocks 635 through 685 depict the steps of generating and transmitting a payment autho ⁇ zation request response
  • payment gateway computer system 140 applies its p ⁇ vate key to encrypted random key 560 contained within received merchant autho ⁇ zation request 315, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of random key RK-0 540.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 applies random key RK-0 540 to encrypted combined block 550, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of combined block 530.
  • Combined block 530 comp ⁇ ses basic autho ⁇ zation request 510, a copy of merchant computer system's 130 encryption public key certificate 515 and a copy of merchant computer system's 130 signature public key certificate 520, as well as merchant digital signature 525.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 verifies merchant computer system's 130 encryption public key certificate 515 and merchant computer system's 130 signature public key certificate 520. Payment gateway computer system 140 performs this verification by making a call to the certification authorities associated with each certificate. If verification of either certificate fails, payment gateway computer system 140 rejects the authorization request.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 validates merchant digital signature 525. Payment gateway computer system 140 performs this validation by calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic authorization request 510, the encryption public key certificate 515 and the signature public key certificate 520. Payment gateway computer system 140 then decrypts digital signature 525 to obtain a copy of the equivalent message digest calculated by merchant computer system 130 in function block 420. If the two message digests are equal, the digital signature 525 is validated. If validation fails, payment gateway computer system 140 rejects the authorization request.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 determines the financial institution for which authorization is required by inspection of basic authorization request 510. Payment gateway computer system 140 contacts the appropriate financial institution using a secure means, e.g, a direct-dial modem-to-modem connection, or a proprietary internal network that is not accessible to third parties, and using prior art means, obtains a response indicating whether the requested payment is authorized.
  • a secure means e.g, a direct-dial modem-to-modem connection, or a proprietary internal network that is not accessible to third parties, and using prior art means, obtains a response indicating whether the requested payment is authorized.
  • Payment Authorization Response Generation Function blocks 635 through 685 depict the steps of generating and transmitting a payment authorization request response.
  • Figures 7A through 7J depict views of the payment authorization response and its component parts.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 creates a basic authorization response 710.
  • the basic authorization request is a data area that includes all the information to determine whether a request was granted or denied.
  • Figure 7A depicts basic authorization response 710.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 combines basic autho ⁇ zation response 710, and a copy of its signature public key certificate 720.
  • Payment computer system 140 calculates a digital signature 725 for the combined contents of the combined block 730 comp ⁇ smg basic autho ⁇ zation response 710 and the signature public key certificate 720, and appends the signature to the combination of the combined basic authorization response 710 and the signature public key certificate 720
  • the payment gateway computer system calculates digital signature 725 by first calculating a message digest based on the contents of the combined basic autho ⁇ zation response 710 and signature public key certificate 720.
  • the message digest is then encrypted using the merchant computer system's 140 digital signature p ⁇ vate key, thus forming a digital signature
  • Figure 7B depicts the combined block 730 formed in function block 640 and containing basic autho ⁇ zation response 710, the signature public key certificate 720, and digital signature 725.
  • payment gateway computer system 150 generates a first symmet ⁇ c random encryption key 740, denoted as RK- 1 Figure 7C depicts first random encryption key RK-1 740.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts combmed block 730 usmg random encryption key RK- 1 740 to form encrypted combmed block 750.
  • Figure 7D depicts encrypted combined block 750 The encryption state of encrypted combined block 750 is graphically shown by random key lock 755, which indicates that encrypted combined block 750 is encrypted using random key RK- 1 740
  • payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts random encryption key RK- 1 740 using the public key of merchant computer system 130 to form encrypted random key RK 760
  • Figure 7E depicts encrypted random key RK- 1 760.
  • the encryption state of encrypted random key 760 is graphically shown by merchant public key lock 765, which indicates that encrypted random key 760 is encrypted using the merchant public key.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 In function block 660, payment gateway computer system 140 generates a random capture token 770. Random capture token 770 is utilized in subsequent payment capture processing to associate the payment capture request with the payment autho ⁇ zation request being processed Figure 7F depicts capture token 775
  • payment gateway computer system 140 In function block 665, payment gateway computer system 140 generates a second symmetric random encryption key 775, denoted as RK-2.
  • Figure 7G depicts second random encryption key RK-2 775.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts capture token 770 using random encryption key RK-2 770 to form encrypted capture token 780
  • Figure 7H depicts encrypted capture token 780
  • the encryption state of encrypted capture token 780 is graphically shown by random key lock 785, which indicates that encrypted capture token 780 is encrypted using random key RK-2 770.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts second random encryption key RK-2 775 using its own public key to form encrypted random key RK-2 790.
  • Figure 71 depicts encrypted random key RK-2 790.
  • the encryption state of encrypted random key 790 is graphically shown by payment gateway public key lock 795, which indicates that encrypted random key 790 is encrypted using the payment gateway public key.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 concatenates encrypted combined block 750, encrypted random key RK- 1 760, encrypted capture token 780 and encrypted random key RK-2 790 to torm merchant autho ⁇ zation response 325.
  • Figure 7J depicts merchant authorization response 325 compnsmg encrypted combined block 750, encrypted random key RK- 1 760, encrypted capture token 780 and encrypted random key RK- 2 790.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 transmits merchant autho ⁇ zation response 325 to merchant system 130.
  • Figure 8 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment autho ⁇ zation response.
  • merchant computer system 130 applies its p ⁇ vate key to encrypted random key
  • RK- 1 760 contained within received merchant autho ⁇ zation response 325, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of random key RK- 1 740.
  • merchant computer system 130 applies random key RK- 1 740 to encrypted combined block 750, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of combined block 730.
  • Combined block 730 comp ⁇ ses basic autho ⁇ zation response 710, a copy of payment gateway computer system's 140 signature public key certificate 720, as well as payment gateway digital signature 725.
  • merchant computer system 130 verifies payment gateway computer system's 140 signature public key certificate 720. Merchant computer system 130 performs this ve ⁇ fication by making a call to the certification authority associated with the certificate. If ve ⁇ fication of the certificate fails, merchant computer system 130 concludes that the autho ⁇ zation response is counterfeit and treats it though the autho ⁇ zation request had been rejected
  • merchant computer system 130 validates payment gateway digital signature 725
  • Merchant computer system 130 performs this validation by calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic autho ⁇ zation request 710 and the signature public key certificate 720.
  • Merchant computer system 130 then decrypts digital signature 725 to obtain a copy of the equivalent message digest calculated by payment gateway computer system 140 in function block 640 If the two message digests are equal, the digital signature 725 is validated. If validation fails, concludes that the autho ⁇ zation response is counterfeit and treats it though the autho ⁇ zation request had been rejected.
  • merchant computer system 130 stores encrypted capture token 780 and encrypted random key RK-2 790 for later use in payment capture.
  • merchant computer system 130 processes the customer purchase request in accordance with the autho ⁇ zation response 710 If the autho ⁇ zation response indicates that payment in authorized, merchant computer system 130 fills the requested order If the autho ⁇ zation response indicates that payment is not authorized, or if merchant computer system 130 determined in function block 830 or 840 that the autho ⁇ zation response is counterfeit , merchant computer system 130 indicates to the customer that the order cannot be filled.
  • Payment Capture Figure 9 depicts an overview of the method of securely supplying payment capture information to payment gateway 140 in order to obtain payment capture.
  • merchant computer system 130 generates a merchant payment capture request 915 and transmits it to payment gateway computer system 140
  • payment gateway system 140 processes the payment capture request 915, generates a payment capture response 925 and transmits it to merchant computer system 130
  • merchant computer system 130 processes payment capture response 925 and ve ⁇ fies that payment for the goods or services sought to be obtained by the customer have been captured.
  • Payment Capture Request Generation Figure 10 depicts the detailed steps of generating and transmitting a payment capture request.
  • Figures 11A through 1 IF depict views of the payment capture request and its component parts.
  • merchant computer system 130 creates a basic capture request 510.
  • the basic capture request is a data area that includes all the information needed by payment gateway computer system 140 to t ⁇ gger a transfer of funds to the merchant operating merchant computer system 130.
  • a capture request includes a capture request amount, a capture token, a date, summary information of the purchased items and a Merchant ID (MID) for the particular merchant.
  • Figure 11A depicts basic autho ⁇ zation request 1110.
  • merchant computer system 130 combines basic capture request 1110, a copy of its encryption public key certificate 1115 and a copy of its signature public key certificate 1120.
  • Merchant computer system 130 calculates a digital signature 1125 for the combined contents of the combined block 1130 comp ⁇ smg basic capture request 1110, the encryption public key certificate 1115 and the signature public key certificate 1120, and appends it to the combination of the combined basic capture request 1110, the encryption public key certificate 1115 and the signature public key certificate 1120.
  • the merchant computer system calculates digital signature 1125 by first calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic capture request 1110, the encryption public key certificate 1115 and the signature public key certificate 1120.
  • the message digest is then encrypted usmg the merchant computer system's 130 digital signature p ⁇ vate key, thus forming a digital signature.
  • Figure 11B depicts the combined block 1130 formed by function block 1020 and containing basic capture request 1110, the encryption public key certificate 1115, the signature public key certificate 1120, and digital signature 1125.
  • merchant computer system 130 generates a random encryption key 1140, denoted as RK-3.
  • Random encryption key RK-3 1140 is a symmet ⁇ c encryption key
  • Figure 11C depicts random encryption key RK- 3 1140
  • merchant computer system 130 encrypts combined block 1130 using random encryption key RK-3 1140 to form encrypted combmed block 1150.
  • Figure 11D depicts encrypted combined block 1150.
  • the encryption state of encrypted combined block 1150 is graphically shown by random key lock 1155, which indicates that encrypted combined block 1150 is encrypted using random key RK-3 1140.
  • merchant computer system 130 encrypts random encryption key RK-3 1140 using the public key of payment gateway system 140 to form encrypted random key 1160.
  • Figure HE depicts encrypted random key 1160
  • the encryption state of encrypted random key 1160 is graphically shown by payment gateway public key lock 1165, which indicates that encrypted random key RK-3 1160 is encrypted using the payment gateway public key.
  • merchant computer system 130 concatenates encrypted combmed block 1150, encrypted random key 1160, and the encrypted capture token 780 and encrypted random key RK-2 790 that were stored in function block 850 to form merchant capture request 915.
  • Figure 11F depicts merchant capture request 915, comp ⁇ smg encrypted combined block 1150, encrypted random key 1160, encrypted capture token 780 and encrypted random key RK-2 790.
  • merchant computer system 130 transmits merchant capture request 915 to payment gateway system 140.
  • Figure 12 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment capture request and generating and transmitting a payment capture request response
  • Function blocks 1210 through 1245 depict the steps of processing a payment capture request
  • function blocks 1250 through 1285 depict the steps of generating and transmitting a payment capture request response.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 apphes its p ⁇ vate key to encrypted random key 1160 contained within received merchant capture request 915, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of random key RK-3 1140.
  • function block 1215 payment gateway computer system 140 applies random key RK-3 1140 to encrypted combined block 1150, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of combined block 1130.
  • Combined block 1130 comp ⁇ ses basic capture request 1110, a copy of merchant computer system's 130 encryption public key certificate 1115 and a copy of merchant computer system's 130 signature public key certificate 1120, as well as merchant digital signature 1125.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 ve ⁇ fies merchant computer system's 130 encryption public key certificate 1115 and merchant computer system's 130 signature public key certificate 1120 Payment gateway computer system 140 performs this ve ⁇ fication by making a call to the certification autho ⁇ ties associated with each certificate If verification of either certificate fails, payment gateway computer system 140 rejects the capture request.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 validates merchant digital signature 1125. Payment gateway computer system 140 performs this validation by calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic capture request 1110, the encryption public key certificate 1115 and the signature public key certificate 1120. Payment gateway computer system 140 then decrypts digital signature 1125 to obtain a copy of the equivalent message digest calculated by merchant computer system 130 in function block 1020. If the two message digests are equal, the digital signature 1125 is validated. If validation fails, payment gateway computer system 140 rejects the capture request. In function block 1230, payment gateway computer system 140 applies its p ⁇ vate key to encrypted random key RK-2 790 contained within received merchant capture request 915, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of random key RK-2 775. In function block 1235, payment gateway computer system 140 applies random key RK-2 775 to encrypted capture token 780, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of capture token 770.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 ve ⁇ fies that a proper transaction is being transmitted between capture token 780 and capture request 1110.
  • a capture token contains data that the gateway generates at the time of autho ⁇ zation When the autho ⁇ zation is approved, the encrypted capture token is given to the merchant for storage.
  • the merchant returns the capture token to the gatewav along with other information required for capture
  • the gateway compares a message made of the capture request data and the capture token data and transmits this information over a traditional credit/ debit network. If an improperly formatted transaction is detected, payment gateway computer system 140 rejects the capture request.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 determines the financial institution for which capture is requested by inspection of basic capture request 1110 Payment gateway computer system 140 contacts the approp ⁇ ate financial institution using a secure means, e.g, a direct-dial modem-to-modem connection, or a prop ⁇ etary internal network that is not accessible to third parties, and using prior art means, instructs a computer at the financial institution to perform the requested funds transfer after settlement
  • a secure means e.g, a direct-dial modem-to-modem connection, or a prop ⁇ etary internal network that is not accessible to third parties
  • Function blocks 1250 through 1285 depict the steps of generating and transmitting a payment capture request response
  • Figures 13A through 13F depict views of the payment capture response and its component parts
  • payment gateway computer system 140 creates a basic capture response 710
  • the basic capture request is a data area that includes all the information to indicate whether a capture request was granted or denied
  • Figure 13A depicts basic autho ⁇ zation request 1310
  • payment gateway computer system 140 combines basic capture response 1310, and a copy of its signature public key certificate 1320
  • Payment computer system 140 calculates a digital signature 1325 for the combined contents of the combmed block 1330 compnsmg basic capture response 1310 and the signature public key certificate 1320, and appends the signature to the combination of the combined basic autho ⁇ zation request 1310 and the signature public key certificate 1320
  • the payment gateway computer system calculates digital signature 1325 by first calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic capture response 1310 and signature public key certificate 720
  • the message digest is then encrypted using the merchant computer system's 140 digital signature pnvate key, thus forming a digital signature
  • Figure 13B depicts the combined block 1330 formed by function block 1255 and containing basic capture request 1310, the signature public key certificate 1320, and digital signature 1325
  • payment gateway computer system 140 generates a symmet ⁇ c random encryption key 1340, denoted as RK-4
  • Figure 13C depicts random encryption key RK- 4 1340.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts combmed block 1330 using random encryption key RK-4 1340 to form encrypted combined block 1350.
  • Figure 13D depicts encrypted combined block 1350
  • the encryption state of encrypted combined block 1350 is graphically shown by random key lock 1355, which indicates that encrypted combined block 1350 is encrypted using random key RK-4 1340.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts random encryption key RK-4 1340 usmg the public key of merchant computer system 130 to form encrypted random key RK-4 1360
  • Figure 13E depicts encrypted random key RK-4 1360.
  • the encryption state of encrypted random key 1360 is graphically shown by merchant public key lock 1365, which indicates that encrypted random key 1360 is encrypted using the merchant public key.
  • payment gateway computer system 140 concatenates encrypted combined block 1350 and encrypted random key RK-4 1360 to form merchant capture response 925.
  • Figure 13F depicts merchant capture response 925 comp ⁇ smg encrypted combined block 1350 and encrypted random key RK-4 1360
  • payment gateway computer system 140 transmits merchant capture response 925 to merchant system 130.
  • Payment Capture Response Processing Figure 14 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment capture response.
  • merchant computer system 130 applies its p ⁇ vate key to encrypted random key RK-4 1360 contained within received merchant capture response 925, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of random key RK-4 1340.
  • function block 1420 merchant computer system 130 applies random key RK-4 1340 to encrypted combined block 1350, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of combined block 1330
  • Combmed block 1330 comp ⁇ ses basic capture response 1310, a copy of payment gateway computer system's 140 signature public key certificate 1320, as well as payment gateway digital signature 1325.
  • merchant computer system 130 ve ⁇ fies payment gateway computer system's 140 signature public key certificate 1320. Merchant computer system 130 performs this verification by making a call to the certification autho ⁇ ty associated with the certificate. If ve ⁇ fication of the certificate fails, merchant computer system 130 concludes that the capture response is counterfeit and raises an error condition.
  • merchant computer system 130 validates payment gateway digital signature 1325. Merchant computer system 130 performs this validation by calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic autho ⁇ zation request 1310 and the signature public key certificate 1320. Merchant computer system 130 then decrypts digital signature 1325 to obtain a copy of the equivalent message digest calculated by payment gateway computer system 140 in function block 1255. If the two message digests are equal, the digital signature 1325 is validated. If validation fails, merchant computer system 130 concludes that the authorization response is counterfeit and raises an error condition. In function block 1450, merchant computer system 130 stores capture response for later use in by legacy system accounting programs, e.g. to perform reconciliation between the merchant operating merchant computer system 130 and the financial institution from whom payment was requested, thereby completing the transaction.
  • legacy system accounting programs e.g. to perform reconciliation between the merchant operating merchant computer system 130 and the financial institution from whom payment was requested, thereby completing the transaction.
  • the system of the present invention permits immediate deployment of a secure payment technology architecture such as the SET architecture without first establishing a public-key encryption infrastructure for use by consumers. It thereby permits immediate use of SET-compliant transaction processing without the need for consumers to migrate to SET-compliant application software.
  • VPOS Terminal Cartridge provides payment functionality similar to what a VeriFone PoS terminal ("gray box”) provides for a merchant today, allowing a merchant to process payments securely using the Internet. It provides full payment functionality for a variety of payment instruments.
  • FIG. 15A illustrates a payment processing flow in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
  • the payment functionality provided by the VPOS terminal is divided into two main categories: "Merchant-Initiated” 1510 and "Consumer-Initiated” 1500.
  • Some payment transactions require communication with the acquirer bank through the Gateway 1530.
  • the normal flow of a transaction is via the VPOS Cartridge API 1512 to the VPOS C++ API 1514 into the payment protocol layer 1516 which is responsible for converting into the appropriate format for transmission to the Gateway for additional processing and forwarding to existing host payment authorization systems.
  • Host legacy format refers to an existing authorization system for credit card approval currently utilized with the VeriFone Point of Sale (POS) gray terminals.
  • POS VeriFone Point of Sale
  • the output from the payment protocol layer 1516 is transmitted to the authorization processing center via the gateway 1530.
  • These transactions are referred to as “Online Transactions” or “Host Payments.”
  • the transactions that can be done locally by the merchant without having to communicate with the acquirer bank are referred to as “Local Functions and Transactions.”
  • the VPOS Terminal payment functionality is categorized as set forth below. • Host Payment Functionality: These transactions require communication with the final host, either immediately or at a later stage. For example, an Online Authorization-Only transaction, when initiated, communicates with the host immediately. However, an Off-line Authorization-Only transaction is locally authorized by the VPOS terminal without having to communicate with the host, but at a later stage this off-line authorization transaction is sent to the host. Within the Host Payment Functionality some transactions have an associated Payment Instrument, while others do not. These two kinds of transactions are:
  • Host Financial Payment Functionality These transactions have a Payment Instrument (Credit Card, Debit Card, E-Cash, E-Check, etc.) associated with them. For example, the "Return” transaction, which is initiated upon returning a merchandise to the merchant.
  • Host Administrative Payment Functionality These transactions do not require a payment instrument, and provide either administrative or inquiry functionality. Examples of these transactions are "Reconcile” or the "Batch Close.”
  • VPOS terminal Another example is the "VPOS Batch Review" function, which is required to review the different transactions in the VPOS Batch or the Transaction Log.
  • a preferred embodiment of a VPOS terminal supports various Payment Instruments. A consumer chooses a payment based on personal preferences. Some of the Payment Instruments supported include:
  • txnDate Date of the transaction (mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy)
  • txnTime Time of the transaction (hh:mm:ss GMT or hh:mm:ss local time)
  • txnAmount Transaction amount that is being authorized, forced posted, voided, etc. poNumber Purchase order number authldentNu Authorization ID number for the transaction m retRefNum Retrieval reference number for the given transaction pilnfo Payment instrument information. This varies for different payment instruments. For example, in the case of credit cards, the credit card number (piAcctNumber) and expiration date (piExpDate) are returned. Accumulate Review
  • URL Functionality This is a local information inquiry function that ret ⁇ eves the local (merchant's) transaction totals (accumulators) GET Arguments: None GET Results: Ret ⁇ eves the transaction totals for the merchant. Currently, the total is returned as an HTML document The transaction totals currently returned are:
  • Auth Capture URL Functionality This transaction is a combination of Auth Only (Autho ⁇ zation without capture) and Forced Post transactions. GET Arguments: None
  • piAcctNumber Payment Instrument account number e g., Visa credit card number piExpDate Expiration date txnAmt Transaction amount
  • POST Results On success, an HTML document that contains the transaction fields described above is returned. On failure, an HTML document that contains the reason for the failure of the transaction is returned. The transaction is logged into a VPOS Terminal transaction log for both instances.
  • URL Functionality Validates the cardholder's account number for a Sale that is performed at a later stage. The transaction does not confirm the sale to the host, and there is no host data capture. The VPOS captures this transaction record and later forwards it to confirm the sale in the Forced Post transaction request.
  • POST Results On success, an HTML document that contains the transaction fields is returned. On failure, an HTML document that contains the reason for the failure of the transaction is returned. The transaction is logged into VPOS Terminal transaction log for both instances.
  • the mrchtBlnceA Merchant balance amount for a given merchant is the difference between the credit and debit amount since the last settlement between the merchant and the acquirer.
  • the GET method retrieves the transactions that have been batched in the VPOS terminal for future reconciliation.
  • the batch can be cleared from the VPOS terminal after a manual reconciliation between the acquirer and the VPOS.
  • the batch data is retrieved as a set of records and is formatted as a table in the HTML document.
  • nTransType Transaction type nPurchOrderNo Purchase order number szAcctNum Customer's payment instrument account number szExpDate Customer's payment instrument expiration date szTransAmt Transaction amount szTransDate Transaction date szTransTime Transaction time szRetnevalRefNu Transaction's ret ⁇ eval reference number m szAuthld Autho ⁇ zation ID for the transaction szOngAmt Original transaction amount szBatchNum Batch number for the given transaction nCurrencyType Currency in which the transaction was done
  • the GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values
  • the form can be modified and posted using the /VPOSt/mi/cdt/update/
  • nHostlndex Index into the Host Definition Table or the acquirer that maps to this card issuer nHostlndex Index into the Host Definition Table or the acquirer that maps to this card issuer.
  • szPANLo Low end of the PAN P ⁇ mary Account Number
  • szPANHi High end of the PAN range nMaxPANDigit Maximum number of digits m the PAN for this acquirer.
  • CDT Update URL Functionality Updates the VPOS terminal configuration data corresponding to the Card Definition Table (CDT). GET Arguments: None
  • the GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values.
  • the form can be filled out and posted using the /VPOSt/mi/cdt/update URL to update the card definition table.
  • GET Results Presents a form that uses the POST method to zero the accumulators.
  • POST Results Zeroes the accumulators/ transaction totals in the VPOS terminal.
  • URL Functionality Confirms to the host the completion of a sale, and requests for data capture of the transaction. This is used as a follow-up transaction after doing an Autho ⁇ zation (Online or Off-line) transaction. GET Arguments: None.
  • the GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values.
  • the form can be modified and posted using the /VPOSt/mi/hdt/update URL to update the hosts definition table Not all fields in the host definition table are editable. The following fields are returned in a form to the user:
  • szTermld Terminal ID for this VPOS terminal szMerchld Merchant ID for this VPOS terminal szCurrBatchNu Current batch number existing on the VPOS m szTransNum Reference number for the next transaction m the VPOS transaction log/ batch This is generated by VPOS and is not editable by the merchant.
  • szTPDU Transport Protocol Data Unit Required for building the ISO 8583 packet. InSTAN System trace number; message number of the next transaction to be transmitted to this acquirer.
  • szNII Network International Number Required for building the
  • the GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values.
  • the form can be filled out and posted to the merchant server using the
  • URL Functionality Local function that starts the VPOS at the start of the day.
  • GET Results Returns an HTML form that uses the POST method to perform this transaction.
  • POST Results Resets a Boolean flag on the merchant server that enables transactions to be accepted by the VPOS terminal.
  • URL Functionality- This transaction is same as the "Authorization Only” transaction, except that the transaction is locally captured by the VPOS terminal without having to communicate with the host. A Forced Post operation is done as a follow-up operation of this transaction. GET Arguments: None.
  • POST Results Because the Offline Auth transaction modifies data on the merchant server side, the POST method should be used. Using the GET method returns an HTML form for usmg the POST method to perform the transaction.
  • POST Arguments piAcctNumber Payment Instrument account number, e.g., Visa credit card number piExpDate Expiration date txnAmt Transaction amount
  • URL Functionality Downloads the VPOS configuration information from the host and sets up the VPOS in the event of the configuration data being changed. GET Arguments None
  • CDT card/ issuer definition table
  • HDT host/ acquirer definition table
  • terminal configuration table TCT
  • the vanous configuration parameters can be reviewed and modified using the URLs for the desired functionality.
  • URL Functionality Used in lodging and hotel establishments to pre-authorize a charge that is completed some time in future.
  • POST Results On success, pvsTxnNum is presented in the HTML document. On failure, an HTML document is returned that contains the reason for the failure of the transaction.
  • URL Functionality This transaction is done at the end of the day to confirm to the host to start the settlement process for the transactions captured by the host for that particular VPOS batch.
  • POST Results On success, the reconcile function prints any discrepancies in the merchant's batch of transactions and totals vis-a-vis the host's batch of transactions in totals.
  • the output format is a combination of the output of the Batch Review and Accum Review transactions.
  • URL Functionality Checks the presence of the host and also the integrity of the link from the VPOS to the host.
  • GET Arguments None.
  • GET Results On success, an HTML document is returned that reports success in connecting to the host. On failure, an HTML document is returned that reports the error encountered in testing the host.
  • POST Results On success, an HTML document is returned that contains the status that VPOS terminal was successfully. On failure, an HTML document is returned that reports the cause of failure of the operation, e.g. , access denied, the VPOS terminal is already locked or is presently processing a transaction, etc.
  • the GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values corresponding to the VPOS terminal's communication parameters.
  • the form can be filled out and posted to the merchant server using the /VPOSt/mi/cpt/update URL to update the communications parameter table.
  • the following fields are returned in a form to the user
  • the GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values.
  • the form can be modified and posted to update the communication parameter table.
  • the GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values.
  • the form can be filled out and posted usmg the /VPOSt/mi/tct/update
  • the GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values.
  • the form can be filled out and posted using the /VPOSt/mi/tct/update
  • URL Functionality Permits the merchant and customer to query a given transaction corresponding to a transaction number GET Arguments: txnNum Transaction number
  • the URL returns an HTML document. If a transaction refers to an older transaction, the transaction's entire history is made available URL results
  • the VPOS terminal provides a framework whereby different documents are returned based upon a number of preferences. Currently the language and content-type are supported as preferences
  • Each of the transaction has a set of documents associated with it: form for the payment transaction, GET success, GET failure, POST success, and POST failure.
  • the VPOS terminal cart ⁇ dge has a configuration file that allows the user to specify the content-type as well as the language to be used for a cart ⁇ dge.
  • the first release of the VPOS terminal cart ⁇ dge supports one content-type and language for each server.
  • VPOSTIn ⁇ t(), VPOSTExecQ and VPOSTShut() are the entry points required for each cart ⁇ dge m accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • the other functions implement some of the key VPOST cart ⁇ dge functionality.
  • a source listing of the VPOS code is provided below to further accentuate the detailed disclosure of a preferred embodiment.
  • VPOSTCtx *VPOSTCxp char *uri ; char *txnMethod ; /* HTTP method */ enum eVPOSTTxn *txn ; /* VPOST transaction */ char *txnOutFile ; / * Output file from transaction */ char **txnEnv ; /* environment variables values for transaction */ char *txnContent ; /* transaction's POST data content */ WRBEntry 'WRBEntries ; int numEntries;
  • VPOSTCxp (VPOSTCtx *) clientCtx ;
  • Transaction Log format This section describes the format of a record for the transaction log for the VPOST cartridge.
  • nTransType Transaction Type nPurchOrderNo Purchase Order Number szAcctNum Payment Instrument Account number szExpDate Payment instrument expiration date szTransAmt Transaction amount szTransDate Date of transaction (configurable to be mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy) szTransTime Time of transaction (configurable to be GMT or local time) szRetrievalRef um Retrieval reference number szAuthld Authorization ID szOrigAmt Original transaction amount szBatchNum Batch number to which this particular transaction belongs in the
  • the VPOS provides an interface for transactions which are initiated both by the consumer and the merchant.
  • the merchant initiates a transaction from a Graphical User Interface (GUI) 1550 and all the transactions that are initiated by the consumer are routed by the Merchant WEB Server 1545.
  • GUI Graphical User Interface
  • the Authorization/ Data Capture Module 1560 processes the requests originated by the merchant or the consumer and routes them to the. Protocol Module 1565.
  • the Protocol Module is responsible for building the payment protocol request packet (e.g., an SSL-encapsulated ISO 8583 packet) 1570 before sending the request to the Gateway 1579.
  • the Gateway 1579 awaits a response from the Protocol Module 1565, and upon receiving the response, the Gateway 1579 parses the data and provides unwrapped data to the Authorization / Data- Capture Module 1560.
  • the Authorization/ Data-Capture Module 1560 analyzes the response and updates the Transaction Log 1580.
  • the Transaction Log 1580 contains information concerning any successfully completed transactions and the accumulators or the transaction totals.
  • the VPOS terminal creates and maintains the Transaction Log 1580, and the VPOS Configuration Data 1585 contains information which is used to configure the behavior of the VPOS.
  • the entire VPOS functionality is thread-safe and hence using the VPOS in a multithreaded environment does not require any additional interfacing requirements.
  • Figures 36-48 are VPOS screen displays in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
  • the different Payment Functionality provided by the VPOS terminal can be divided into two main categories as “Merchant Initiated” and “Consumer Initiated.” Some of these transactions require communication with the Gateway and these transactions are referred to as “Online Transactions.” The transactions which can be done locally to the merchant without having to communicate are referred to as “Local Functions/Transactions.”
  • the VPOS Payment Functionality In order to provide support for many different types of Payment Instruments, the VPOS Payment Functionality have been categorized. Host payment functionality and transactions require communication with the host either immediately or at a later stage. Each of the host financial payment transactions come to this category and require a Payment Instrument. These transactions can be initiated with different types of Payment Instruments which the VPOS terminal supports.
  • An authorization without capture transaction is used to validate the card holder's account number for a sale that needs to be performed at a later stage.
  • the transaction does not confirm a sale's completion to the host, and there is no host data capture in this event.
  • the VPOS captures this transaction record and later forwards it to the host to confirm the sale in a forced post transaction request.
  • An authorization without capture transaction can be initiated both by the consumer and the merchant.
  • a forced post transaction confirms to a host computer that a completion of a sale has been accomplished and requests data capture of the transaction.
  • the forced post transaction is used as a follow-up transaction after doing an authorization (Online or Off-line) transaction.
  • the transaction can be initiated only by the merchant.
  • the authorization with post transaction is a combination of authorization without capture and forced post transactions. This transaction can be initiated both by the consumer and the merchant.
  • the offline post transaction is identical to the "authorization without capture” transaction, except that the transaction is locally captured by the VPOS without initiating communication with a host.
  • a forced post operation is done as a follow-up operation of this transaction. This transaction can be initiated by both the consumer and the merchant.
  • the return transaction is used to credit the return amount electronically to the consumer's account when a purchased merchandise is returned.
  • the VPOS captures the return transaction record when the merchandise is returned, and this transaction can be initiated only by the merchant.
  • the void transaction cancels a previously completed draft capture transaction.
  • the VPOS GUI provides an interface for retrieving a transaction record required to be voided from the batch and passes it to the Authorization/ Data-Capture module after confirmation.
  • the batch record is updated to reflect the voided transaction after getting an approval from the gateway. This transaction can be initiated only by the merchant.
  • the pre-authorization transaction is identical to the authorization without capture transaction, but the consumers' "open-to-buy" amount is reduced by the pre-authorization amount.
  • An example of this type of transaction is the "check-in" transaction in a hotel environment. A check-in transaction sends a pre-authorization request to the host, so that an amount required for the customers' stay in the hotel is reserved. The pre-authorization transaction is followed by a pre-authorization complete transaction. This transaction can be initiated both by the consumer and the merchant.
  • the pre-authorization complete transaction is done as a follow-up to the pre-authorization transaction. This transaction informs the host of the actual transaction amount.
  • the pre- autho ⁇ zation complete transaction amount could be more or less than the pre-authorization amount.
  • An example is the "check-out" transaction in a hotel environment. The check-out amount can be less than or more than the check-in amount. This transaction can only be initiated by a merchant.
  • the adjust transaction is initiated to make a correction to the amount of a previously completed transaction.
  • the adjust transaction can be initiated only by the merchant.
  • the host administrative transactions do not require any payment instrument.
  • the balance inquiry transaction is used for on-line inquiry into the balance of the merchant's account.
  • the batch data or the configuration data is not affected by this transaction.
  • the reconciliation or close transaction is processed at the end of the day to start the settlement process for the transactions captured by the host for that particular VPOS.
  • the host log-on transaction is an administrative transaction which is used to synchronize the VPOS with the host at the start of the day and also initiate a fresh batch at the VPOS terminal.
  • the parameters download transaction is used to download the VPOS configuration information from the host and set-up the VPOS in the event of any change in the configuration data.
  • a test transaction is used to detect the presence of a host and the status of a link from the VPOS to the host.
  • the totals or accumulators review is a local information inquiry function and is used to retrieve the local (merchant's) totals.
  • the detail transaction or the batch review function is used to retrieve all the records from the transaction log or the batch.
  • the clear batch function is used to start a fresh batch. This transaction is utilized to electronically reconcile the VPOS with the host and to manually reconcile the VPOS with the host. After completing the manual reconciliation processing, the merchant can initiate this transaction to start a fresh batch.
  • the clear accumulator function is similar to the clear batch functionality and resets all VPOS terminal accumulators to zero. This function is required when the merchant is not able to reconcile the VPOS with the host electronically.
  • the VPOS unlock or start transaction is a local function used to start the VPOS at the start of the day.
  • the VPOS lock or stop function is used to Lock or stop the VPOS from accepting any transactions.
  • the VPOS configuration setup function is used to setup the VPOS configuration data.
  • the VPOS configuration data is divided into different tables, for example, the Card/Issuer Definition Table (CDT), the Host/acquirer Definition Table (HDT), the Communications Parameters Table (CPT) and the Terminal Configuration Table (TCT). The following sections explain each of these configuration tables in detail.
  • CDT Card/Issuer Definition Table
  • HDT Host/acquirer Definition Table
  • CPT Communications Parameters Table
  • TCT Terminal Configuration Table
  • the VPOS terminal supports different Payment Instruments and each of the Payment Functions described above can be initiated by these different Payment Instruments.
  • the consumer making a purchase from a merchant provides a choice of payment methods depending upon their personal preference.
  • the Payment Instrument Class Hierarchy which is used by the different VPOS terminal Payment Functions is described below.
  • FIG. 17 shows a typical message flow between the consumer, merchant, VPOS terminal and the Gateway. This section describes the different classes listed in the previous section, their data and members, and defines the type of the transaction that is to be performed. Processing commences at 1700 when a merchant server receives a sales order and passes it via the VPOS Graphical User Interfece (GUI) 1710 to an authorizer 1720 for approval and subsequent protocol processing 1730 and ultimately transmission via the gateway 1740 to the network.
  • GUI VPOS Graphical User Interfece
  • CVPCL_CDT Host Definition Table (CVPCL_HDT)
  • CVPCLHostTrans Host Transaction Class
  • a payment instrument e.g., a Credit Card
  • CVPCLFinancialTrans Data Transaction Amount (CVPCLAmt)
  • CVPCLFinCCTrans Financial Credit Card Transaction Class
  • CVPCL_CCAuthCapt Credit Card Authorization with Capture Transaction Class
  • CVPCL_CCAuthCapt Data
  • CVPCL_CCReturn Data Member Functions :
  • CVPCL_CCPreAuth Credit Card Pre-Authorization Transaction Class
  • CVPCL_CCOfllineAuth Data
  • CVPCL_CCOfflineAuth() EStatus InitializeTrans(TVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTrans(TVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
  • CVPCL_CCAdjust() EStatus Init ⁇ al ⁇ zeTrans(TVPOSParamsBlk *);
  • CVPCL_CCVoid Data
  • CVPCL_CCForcedPost This is the class derived from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and implements the Forced Post Transaction.
  • CVPCL_CCForcedPost Data Member Functions :
  • CVPCL_CCForcedPost() EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
  • CVPCL_CCPreAuthComp Pre -Authorization Complete Transaction Class
  • CVPCL_CCPreAuthComp Data
  • CVPCL_CCPreAuthComp() EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
  • This class is derived from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and is used to perform the Merchant Balance Inquiry function.
  • CVPCLAdminHostTrans Administrative Host Transaction Class This is an abstract base class derived from the CVPCLHostTrans class and is used to derive the administrative host transaction classes.
  • CVPCLAdminHostTransQ int GetHostIndex(); EStatus SetHostlndex (const int);
  • CVPCLVPOSUnlock Virtual POS UnLock/Start Class
  • This class implements the VPOS UnLock or the Start Local functionality.
  • the class is derived from the CVPCLLocalTrans base class.
  • the class is derived from the CVPCLLocalTrans base class.
  • CVPCLTransDataAdmin Data Member Functions : CVPCLTransDataAdminQ;
  • This class is derived from the CVPCLTransDataAdmin base class and implements the batch review functionality Class Name :
  • CVPCLLocalTrans This is the abstract base class for all the transactions that are performed locally to the VPOS.
  • This class implements the VPOS Lock or the Stop Local functionality. Under the locked state the VPOS does not accept any transaction requests.
  • the class is derived from the CVPCLLocalTrans base class. Class Name :
  • This class is derived from the CVPCLTransDataAdmin base class and implements the clear batch functionality, which is used to clear the batch in the event of doing a manual reconciliation between the VPOS and the acquirer.
  • CVPCLClearBatch Data Member Functions :
  • CVPCLAccumReview This class is derived from the CVPCLTransDataAdmin base class and implements the Accumulators Review functionality. Class Name : CVPCLAccumReview
  • CVPCLAccumReviewQ EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *);
  • CVPCLClearAccum This class is derived from the CVPCLTransDataAdmin base class and implements the Accumulators Clear functionality.
  • the class is derived from the CVPCLLocalTrans base class.
  • CVPCL_HDTReview This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Host Definition Table Review functionality.
  • CVPCL_HDTReview Data
  • This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Card Definition Table Review functionality.
  • Class Name is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Card Definition Table Review functionality.
  • CVPCL_CDTReview Data Member Functions :
  • This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Communications Parameters Table Review functionality.
  • CVPCL_CPTReview() EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *);
  • Terminal Configuration Table Review Class (CVFCL_TCTReview) This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Terminal Configuration Table Review functionality.
  • CVPCL_TCTReview Data
  • CVPCL_HDTUpdate This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Host Definition Table Update functionality. Class Name : CVPCL_HDTUpdate
  • This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Card Definition Table Update functionality.
  • Class Name is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Card Definition Table Update functionality.
  • This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Communications Parameters Table Update functionality.
  • CVPCL_CPTUpdate Data
  • Terminal Configuration Table Update Class (CVPCL TCTUpdate) This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Terminal Configuration Table Update functionality.
  • CVPCL rCTUpdate Data Member Functions :
  • CVPCL_TCTUpdate() EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *
  • TVPOSBatchRec Batch Record Structure
  • TVPOSBatchRec / / Definition of the TVPOSBatchRec is as below, typedef struct _VPOSBatchRec ⁇ char szTransAmt[]; char szTransDate[]; char szTransTimej]; char szRetrievalRefNum[]; // Trans. Ref. No.
  • EStatus SetTransType (const EPCLTransType); EStatus SetRetRefNum(const char *); EStatus SetAuthId(const char *); EStatus SetPurchOrderNum(const char *); EStatus SetTransRefNum(const long);
  • Debit Count (int nDebitCnt) Member Functions : int OpenAccum(int fHandle); int GetAccum (int nAccumType, int *pnAccumCnt, char *pszAccumAmt); int CloseAccum(int fHandle); int CleanAccumQ;
  • TVPOSHDTRec Host Definition Table Record Structure
  • VPOSBool fAdjustDC VPOSBool fReturnDC
  • VPOSBool fPreAuthCompDC unsigned int nNumAdv; / / Max. No. of piggy-back trans, allowed unsigned int nTransRefNum; unsigned long InSTAN; / / Systems Trace Number
  • EStatus SetHostProtTypefconst EPCLHostProtType EStatus SetHostProtSubType(const EPCLHostProtSubType); EStatus SetNumAdv(const int); EStatus SetAuthOnlyDC(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetAuthCaptDC(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetAdjustDC(const VPOSBool);
  • EStatus SetReturnDC (const VPOSBool); EStatus SetForcedPostDC(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetOfflineAuthDC(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetVoidDC(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetPreAuthDC(const VPOSBool);
  • TVPOSCDTRec Card Definition Table Record Structure
  • VPOSBool fAuthOnlyAllwd VPOSBool fAuthCaptAllwd;
  • VPOSBool fReturnAllwd VPOSBool fOfflineAuthAllwd; VPOSBool fVoidAllwd; VPOSBool fPreAuthAllwd; VPOSBool fPreAuthCompAllwd; ⁇ TVPOSCDTRec;
  • EStatus SetReturnAllwd (const VPOSBool); EStatus SetForcedPostAllwd(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetOfflineAuthAllwd(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetVoidAllwd(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetPreAuthAllwd(const VPOSBool);
  • This class defines the communications parameters table and the operations on the table.
  • TVPOSCPTRec contains the following fields, typedef struct _VPOSCPTRec
  • CVPCL_TCT Terminal Configuration Table Class
  • TVPOSTCTRec Terminal Configuration Table Record Structure
  • VPOSBool fVPOSLock // VPOS Lock/Unlock Toggle Flag
  • CVPCL_TCTQ Member Functions : CVPCL_TCTQ;
  • This class defines the amount data items and the operations on them.
  • This class is derived from the CPCLPmtlnst class and implements the bank cards class.
  • VPOSBool DoLuhnCheckQ VPOSBool DoCardRangingQ;
  • This class is derived from the CPCLBankCard class and has the same data and the methods as the CPCLBankCard class.
  • Class Name :
  • This class is derived from the CVPCLBankCard class and implements the debit card class.
  • TVPOSParamsBlk Transaction Parameters Structure
  • VPOS API Definition This section explains in the VPOS API which are required for interfacing with the VPOS Class Library. All the different VPOS transactions can be initiated using the API defined in this section.
  • FIG. 25 is a block diagram of the VPOS Terminal Architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
  • the Internet 2500 provides the communication processing necessary to enable the VPOS Terminal architecture.
  • the terminal interface CGI 2520 communicates via the Internet to provide information to the VPOS OLE Server 2550 which formats information in accordance with the VPOS API DLL 2560 which uses the protocol class DLL 2570 to flesh out the message for delivery to the Gateway Server 2580
  • the collection of the VPOS OLE Server 2550, VPOS API DLL 2560 and the Protocol Class DLL 2570 make up the VPOS Software Development ToolKit (SDK) which are used to enable VPOS applications for interfacing with an Operator 2540
  • SDK VPOS Software Development ToolKit
  • FIG. 18 is a block diagram of the extended SET architecture m accordance with a preferred embodiment Processing commences at function block 1800 for a consumer- o ⁇ gmated transaction via the World Wide Web (WWW) or 1810 for a merchant-o ⁇ gmated transaction on the Internet In either case control passes immediately to the WWW server 1820 for the transaction to be appropriately formatted and the approp ⁇ ate interface page presented, whether the transaction is a store front 1822, shopping cart 1824, pay page 1826, standard terminal administration 1828-1830 transaction, or an extended terminal transaction 1834 If processing requires authentication of the transaction, then control passes through the Virtual Point of Sale (VPOS) Application Programming Interface (API) library 1840 for SET comp
  • VPOS Virtual Point of Sale
  • API Application Programming Interface
  • Extended SET messages are processed at the Gateway site on a two track basis with the division c ⁇ te ⁇ a being SET compliance (which will change over time as more functionality is put into SET) or SET extensions Set compliant messages are processed via the protocol stack library 1862, while SET extensions are processed via the protocol stack extension library 1864 Then, at function block 1870 the gateway engine processes SET and Host specific code including gateway administration extensions 1872 that bypass the normal processing and flow directly from the merchant and consumer server 1820 to the gateway administration extensions 1872 to the Gateway Engine 1870.
  • the standard SET messages are originated by the merchant software either via a pay page 1826 directly controlled by the consumer, or via an operator interface consisting of a set of HTML pages and associated executables launched by the pages (e g. pay page 1826 and standard terminal administration 1828-1830.)
  • Each SET message type (e.g. , autho ⁇ zation v. capture) transmits a different set of data and each requires a different Protocol Data Unit (PDU) to describe its encoding.
  • PDU Protocol Data Unit
  • Extended SET messages are utilized as an "escape mechanism'' to implement acquirer- specific messages such as settlement/ reconciliation, employee logon/ logoff, and parameter download.
  • the messages are developed as a set of name-value pairs encapsulated in a PKCS-7 wrapper and wrapped m Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) , described in a book by N. Borenstem 86 N. Freed, "RFC 1521. MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Desc ⁇ bmg the Format of Internet Message Bodies" (Sept. 1993).
  • MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions
  • Part One Mechanisms for Specifying and Desc ⁇ bmg the Format of Internet Message Bodies" (Sept. 1993).
  • the name-value pairs can have arbitrary (8-bit) data, so arbitrary items can be passed through the extended SET channel, including executable programs and Dynamic Load Libra ⁇ es (DLL)s.
  • Figure 18B illustrates a multipart MIME message with one Extended SET message and one Standard SET authorizing message Mime is utilized as an outer wrapper 1890 to allow an
  • Extended SET message 1891 to be transmitted as a component of messages embedded in one MIME multipart message.
  • a standard SET message can be sent with an Extended SET message in one VPOS/ GATEWAY communication transaction.
  • Embedding the Extended SET messages in a PKCS-7 wrapper enables the same message authentication to occur as in standard SET messages.
  • the same mechanism may be used to restrict which entities the VPOS or Gateway will trust in any communications.
  • An important concept m Extended SET is that all messages, of any type, are sent in a uniform name/value pair format, thus allowing a single Protocol Data Unit to suffice for any type of message sent through the Extended SET channel. Since arbitrary data may be sent this way, a mechanism must be provided to preclude the use of the Extended SET channel by parties other than approved financial institutions. If this is not ensured, then the NSA and the US Department of Commerce will not approve the software for export.
  • the protocol stack extension library only processes messages that have been signed by a financial institution SET certificate that is in turn signed by a payment instrument brand certificate (such as Visa or MasterCard).
  • Stronger control over the Extended SET channel can be achieved by further restricting processing of messages to those signed (either instead of or m addition to the financial institution SE certificate) by a second certificate belonging to a third-party agency, either governmental or p ⁇ vate (e.g., VeriFone, as manufacturer of the software).
  • a third-party agency either governmental or p ⁇ vate (e.g., VeriFone, as manufacturer of the software).
  • a particular set of Extended SET messages can be implemented by Bank X, and a different set of messages by Bank Y
  • a VPOS has an extended terminal transaction interface as shown in Figure 18A at block 1834 for Bank X, and has been configured to only accept messages from a Gateway with Bank X's certificate, then it will be able to communicate those messages to a Gateway that has the certificate for Bank X, and accepts messages of the types in Bank X's message set.
  • the VPOS will not be able to connect to the Bank Y gateway, or to any other system that purports to communicate via Extended SET. This restriction is further secured by utilizing a public key certificate that is "hard wired" into VPOS, and which is distributed only to gateways that use the Extended SET mechanism.
  • FIG. 18C is an example flowchart of message processing in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Processing commences at function block 1880 when a message is received by an HTTPS server or other listener and passed to decision block 1883 to determine if the sending VPOS has transmitted an authentic message and if the VPOS is authorized to communicate with this gateway If the message is not authentic, then the message is logged as an error and the error is handled as shown m function block 1889. If the message is authentic, then the message is decrypted at function block 1884 and the PDU parses the message into name / value pairs Then, based on the message type and the extended SET version information, the remaining message is parsed at function block 1885 and the message is checked for conformance to the appropriate specification as shown at decision block 1887.
  • a gateway receives an incoming message from a VPOS and parses the Extended SET portion of the message, a single MIME message can transmit a SET message and/or an Extended Set Message.
  • An export license for the encryption can be obtained on a case-by-case basis, and since there will be potentially millions of VPOS's, it is desirable to obtain a commodities ju ⁇ sdiction for the VPOS, to enable a single version of the VPOS (rather than one version for each bank) to be supported by the VPOS architecture
  • the architecture described here ensures that the single version of VPOS, no matter how it is configured with extended terminal transaction interfaces, cannot be used to communicate any data other than that contained in the extended SET messages that have been approved for export by the US government to be used exclusively for a specific bank
  • Figure 18D is an example of a simple message between VPOS and Gateway using the Extended SET channel enabling an employee to sign on, or "logon to a given terminal in accordance with the subject invention
  • the message must contain the employee's logon ID, a password to be verified by the bank host computer, and the date and time as shown at 1894
  • the length indicator "(5J” is used to distinguish the length (in bytes) of the field of type "messagetype" m the message In this way, there are no special end-of-data characters, and therefore arbitrary data need not have any ' escaped" characters.
  • Figure 18E is an example of a simple message between VPOS and Gateway using the Extended SET channel enabling an employee to sign on, or ' logon" to a given terminal in accordance with the subject invention
  • the Gateway may respond with a "logon accepted" message 1894, as depicted in Figure 18E, which VPOS, upon receipt and authentication, then uses to unlock the terminal for that user.
  • Figure 49 shows how the VPOS authenticates an incoming response to a request m accordance with a preferred embodiment Processing commences at function block 4930 when a message is received by the HTTPS, SET server, or other listener that originated the request to which this reponse corresponds The message is passed to decision block 4940 to determine if the sending Gateway has transmitted an authentic message and if the gateway is authorized to communicate with this VPOS If the message is not authentic, then the message is logged as an error or possible attack and the error is handled as shown in function block 4970.
  • the message is decrypted at function block 4950 and the PDU parses the message into name/ value pairs Then, based on the message type and the extended SET version information, the remaining message is parsed at function block 4960 and the message is checked for conformance to the approp ⁇ ate specification as shown at decision block 4980. If the message does not conform, then it is logged and the error handled at function block 4970. If the message conforms to the proper specification in decision block 4980 then the message is translated into a standardized argument st ⁇ ng to be passed to the approp ⁇ ate executable or code entry point in the VPOS, as shown in function block 4990.
  • the message may cause VPOS to execute a program that takes action or que ⁇ es the user to take action.
  • the message is ve ⁇ fied for origination from the acquirer, and is utilized to either initialize a merchant action, such as to update the merchant's administration page (for example by blinking a message saymg, "PLEASE RE-INITIALIZE YOUR TERMINAL"), or by initiating a request/response message pair originating from the merchant (for example, "HERE ARE THE CONTENTS OF MY MIB")
  • a merchant action for example by blinking a message saymg, "PLEASE RE-INITIALIZE YOUR TERMINAL”
  • HERE ARE THE CONTENTS OF MY MIB a request/response message pair originating from the merchant
  • Gateway customization m extended SET is extremely powerful and a novel concept for VPOS processing
  • Each VPOS contains one or more "se ⁇ al numbers" unique to each copy of the software (a se ⁇ al number may be embedded in the software, or may be a component of a public key certificate used in the software)
  • a bank dist ⁇ butes VPOS via different sales channels
  • the first is direct from a bank to an existing merchant with whom the bank already has an existing relationship
  • a version of VPOS already customized for a bank is sent to the merchant, either directly by a bank, or through a third-party distributor or service bureau.
  • the customizations may involve modification or replacement of, for example, a store front 1822, shopping cart 1824, pay page 1826, standard terminal administration transaction interface 1828-1830 or an extended terminal transaction interface 1834.
  • This is a standard model of distribution of software that is customized for small target market segments.
  • VPOS virtualized point-point POS
  • test gateway the merchant may use to experiment with the various features of VPOS and to test the integration of the VPOS into a total online storefront.
  • the merchant In order to actually transact business over the Internet, the merchant must first obtain a merchant ID from the merchant bank with which he signs an acquiring agreement. For online payment processing, the merchant must also obtain an appropriate set of digital credentials in the form of public key certificates and possibly additional passwords, depending on the financial institution. Once these credentials are obtained, the merchant is ready to customize the already-obtained VPOS to communicate with a merchant bank's gateway.
  • the VPOS software Using the built-in "serial number" certificate and the Test Gateway public key certificate (which is "hard-wired" into the VPOS software), it is possible to securely download a particular bank's customization applications to a specific copy of the VPOS software . Once the VPOS is appropriately configured, the last stage of customization download is to configure the VPOS so that it only responds to a public key certificate of the merchant's acquirer. This process is illustrated here in the context of a merchant who obtains a VPOS that talks to the VeriFone test gateway, and desires to customize the VPOS to interact with a gateway at a bank.
  • the merchant has purchased a VPOS from a non-bank channel.
  • the version communicates with the VeriFone Test Gateway.
  • the merchant uses the gateway to learn about using VPOS, and to test the integration of his storefront system with his payment system.
  • the merchant also obtains certificates for payment processing from a bank, the merchant bank of choice for the merchant.
  • the merchant is now ready to customize VPOS to talk to the bank gateway.
  • the flowchart for the merchant interaction with the Test Gateway is shown in Figure 50.
  • the merchant begins at function block 5000, where the newly-obtained merchant SET certificates are installed in the VPOS.
  • the merchant then directs the VPOS to connect to the VeriFone Test Gateway, by selecting this option from the VPOS terminal administration home page 5005.
  • the choice of this option invokes an extended terminal admin page from the default set of such pages supplied with the generic version of VPOS. This program guides the customization process.
  • the merchant interacting with the extended terminal admin page, navigates to the list of gateways which is maintained by the Test Gateway, and selects the bank to connect by selecting from the list of banks, at function block 5015.
  • the merchant's public key certificates are uploaded to the Test Gateway, and checked (at decision block 5025) to verify that the certificates have been signed by the bank to customize the bank for the VPOS. If the certificates do not match, the merchant is advised of the situation in function block 5028, and must select a different bank. If the certificates are not valid SET certificates as detected at decision block 5020, the merchant is advised at function block 5028, and the session terminates. If the certificates are valid and match the selected bank, customization continues at function block 5030.
  • the extended terminal administration program in VPOS receives a list of the customizations from the Test Gateway that must be performed to specialize the VPOS for a specific bank. Some of these customizations are mandatory, while others are optional.
  • the VPOS advises the merchant of the customizations, prompting for any choices that must be made by the merchant.
  • the merchant's actions at this point drive decision block 5035, in which the VPOS either returns itself to the "generic" state and terminates the interaction, or begins the configuration of the VPOS, depending on the merchant's confirmation of the request to begin the configuration.
  • control is passed to function block 5040 where, the POS stores the certificates of any gateways that it will allow future configuration changes to be initiated from in its database. This may be only a specific bank, such as a bank and the Test Gateway, or other combinations. If only a single, non-Test, bank-owned, gateway is allowed to download changes, the VPOS is no longer customizable for any other bank. Then, a new copy would be purchased by the merchant to have it customized for another bank If the Test Gateway is still allowed to customize the VPOS, the merchant could switch to another merchant bank and have the current VPOS updated to work with the new bank.
  • the customizations are downloaded to the VPOS.
  • the downloads compnse a set of HTML pages and a set of executable programs or sc ⁇ pts that read data from the merchant, perform va ⁇ ous functions, and present data to the merchant
  • the customizations downloaded may augment or replace in part or in whole any and all of function blocks 1822, 1824, 1826, 1828, 1830, or 1834 in Figure 18A.
  • the terminal "home page" will be replaced so that it points to the new functionality.
  • the customization of the VPOS has been completed, and the merchant may now begin sending payment requests to the merchant bank or processor through the VPOS.
  • Thread Safe VPOS - TID Allocation Physical terminals process a single transaction at a time since clerks are usually only able to process one transaction at a time Web Servers can process many transactions at a time, so payment requests can often occur simultaneously
  • the VPOS Software must have support for multi-tasking and provide support for multiple threads to be active at the same time in the same system as well as the same process. This requirement is relatively straight forward
  • the authorizing banks require that all transaction requests include a
  • Terminal ID TID
  • TID Terminal ID
  • One way of providing for multiple TID's is to assign a "base” TID, and either an "extension” (a set of extra digits appended to the base), or an increment (a number which is added to the base to obtain the complete TID) While such a solution can be used for the majo ⁇ ty of banks and processors, not all banks /processors can accommodate this solution.
  • a pool of TID's is used
  • the TID's stored in the pool need not be a sequential set of numbers, in fact they can be alpha/ special/ numeric combinations, and the TID's need have no relation to one another.
  • a TID is represented as a token in a pool that can be associated with a particular transaction.
  • the VPOS provides a TID pool in tabular form in a database management system (DBMS).
  • DBMS database management system
  • This table has two columns: TID NAME & Allocation date/time. If the TID date is null, then the TID is not in use and may be assigned. A date/ time field is utilized to allow TID allocations to expire. TID requests are made utilizing a SQL query on the TID Pool to find the first null or expired date /time, which is replaced with the current date/ time and the TID name returned.
  • DBMS database management system
  • the unique architecture of the Cardholder 120, Merchant 130 and Gateway 140 provides communication capability between the modules utilizing the Internet to support linkages 150 and 170. Since the Internet is so pervasive, and access is available from virtually any computer, utilizing the Internet as the communication backbone for connecting the cardholder, merchant and access to the authorizing bank through a gateway allows the merchant VPOS software to be remotely located from the merchant's premises. For example, the cardholder could pay for goods from any computer system attached to the Internet at any location in the world. Similarly, the merchant VPOS system could be located at a central host site where merchant VPOS systems for various merchants all resided on a single host with their separate access points to the Internet.
  • the merchant could utilize any other computer attached to the Internet utilizing a SSL or SET protocol to query the remote VPOS system and obtain capture information, payment administration information, inventory control information, audit information and process customer satisfaction information.
  • a merchant can obtain the information necessary to run a business smoothly and avoid hiring IS personnel to maintain the VPOS system.
  • VPOS Multi-Merchant Processing Multiple merchant processing refers to the ability of a plurality of merchants to process their individual VPOS transactions securely on a single computer.
  • the architecture relies on each payment page obtaining the merchant name in a hidden field on the payment page.
  • the VPOS engine receives the merchant name with a particular transaction and synchronizes the processing utilizing a Set Merchant method
  • This command causes the VPOS API to look up a unique registry tree based on the merchant name.
  • This process causes the VPOS engine to engage the appropriate configuration to process the transaction at hand utilizing a Registry Tree.
  • a registry tree contains Card Definition Tables (CDT)s, acquirer Definition Tables (ADT)s, Merchant Definition Tables (MDT)s, Protocol Configuration Tables (PCT)s, etc.
  • CDT Card Definition Tables
  • ADT acquirer Definition Tables
  • MDT Merchant Definition Tables
  • PCT Protocol Configuration Tables
  • the CDTs point to specific ADTs since each supported card can be supplied by a distinct acquirer. This is one form of split connection.
  • Each of the ADTs in turn point to PCTs, and some acquirers can support multiple parallel gateways.
  • a merchant's name refers to a unique database in the database management system which contains for example, TIDs.
  • the acquirer Definition Table is queried to ascertain the particular Gateway (VFITest), then if Bank of Ame ⁇ ca requires verification of network communication information, the particular CardDT is accessed with for example VISA.
  • VFITest Gateway
  • the particular merchant will service VISA transactions utilizing a particular acquirer.
  • the particular piece of merchandise will also be detailed in a data base.
  • the merchant Configurations will 1 also be stored in the database to facilitate E-mail and name lookup.
  • VPOS CLIENT The interaction between the VPOS and a client commences when a pay page solicits parameters of a transaction. Then, the parameters are validated to be sure the payment instrument, for example, cardnumber is not null. Then, a transaction object is created, eg. AUTHONLY, and the object is initialized and stuffed with parameters of the transaction, eg ao.setpan(accnum), and the object is executed. This execution invokes the VPOS engine. The VPOS engine further validates the parameters based on the particular merchant's configuration. For example, some merchants do not accept American Express Cards, but will take Visa, and all merchants check the expiration date of the card.
  • a TID is assigned (expiring, existing TIDs) or block a new TID from the TID Pool.
  • This generates a STAN, XID, RRPID unique tag and creates an initial record in the transaction database which is flagged as before gateway processing in case the transaction crashes and must be backed out.
  • the protocol parameters are identified m the registry based on card type, and a particular acquirer identified
  • a protocol object is created and executed to extract results from the protocol object and the before gateway "bit" is flipped to again flag the location of the transaction in the process as it is submitted to the Gateway.
  • the results received back from the Gateway are placed into a transaction object with is reported back to the pay page and ultimately back to the pay page user.
  • a novel feature of the VPOS software provides payment page customization based on a merchant's preferences. This feature automatically lists cards that are accepted by a particular merchant based on the active terminal configuration. Each approved card for a particular merchant is linked to the display via an URL that provides a pointer to the credit card information supported by the merchant. Each card has an entry in a data structure referred to as the Card Definition Table (CDT).
  • CDT Card Definition Table
  • FIG. 19 illustrates the logic utilizing a flowchart, and a listing of the source code below.
  • Processing commences at terminal 1900 and immediately flows to function block 1910 where an index variable is initialized for stepping through each of the accepted payment instruments for the merchant's page.
  • a URL key is obtained associated with the current merchant pay page and index value.
  • the URL key is a registry key name that points to a picture of a credit card that the merchant has associated with the pay page and which the merchant accepts as payment.
  • output block 1940 the card image associated with the URL key is obtained and displayed on the terminal.
  • the CDT entry is obtained at function block 1950 utilizing the URL key.
  • FIGS. 20A through 20H are block diagrams and flowcharts setting forth the detailed logic of thread processing in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
  • Figure 20A illustrates a p ⁇ or art approach to POS processing utilized in most grocery stores and department stores today.
  • POS Terminal 2001 accepts transactions provided to it one at a time by customers 2000.
  • POS Terminal 2001 builds a transaction request 2002 and transmit it to acqui ⁇ ng bank 2004 over communications link 2003.
  • Figure 20B is a data structure 2002 representing a POS transaction request in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • the data structure 2002 includes a TID field 2005, which identifies the physical terminal from which the transaction originates.
  • the data structure also includes other data 2006 necessary to process a transaction. This data includes such fields as a transaction type, a transaction amount, a currency type (such as U.S. dollars), credit card account number, credit card expiration date, etc
  • FIG 20C illustrates a VPOS architecture with account requests being processed by a single acquinng bank.
  • VPOS 2007 processes a plurality of customers 2000 concurrently. For each such customer 2000, VPOS 2007 builds a data structure 2010, representing the transaction to be performed for that customer. Each data structure 2010 contains a unique "virtual terminal" ID. VPOS 2007 selects a virtual terminal ID using database 2008. For each data structure 2010, VPOS 2007 initiates communication with acquiring bank 2004 using communication link 2003.
  • FIG. 20D is a data structure 2010 representmg a VPOS transaction request in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
  • the data structure 2010 includes a TID field 2012, which identifies a virtual terminal ID associated with a particular transaction.
  • the data structure also includes other data 2006 necessary to process a transaction. This data includes such fields as a transaction type, a transaction amount, a currency type (such as U.S. dollars), credit card account number, credit card expiration date, etc.
  • FIG. 20E illustrates a TID allocation database 2008 in accordance with a preferred embodiment
  • Database 2008 includes a TID allocation table 2011.
  • TID allocation table 2011 includes a plurality of rows, one for each TID used by each acqui ⁇ ng bank.
  • Row 2013 includes a good/service order (GSO) identifier 2014, which identifies the order being transmitted, a TID field 2015, which identifies a terminal ID that may be used with a particular acqui ⁇ ng bank, and an acqui ⁇ ng bank field 2016, which identifies the acquiring bank for which the TID is valid
  • row 2013 may optionally include other fields 2017 that may be used in conjunction with the order processing
  • a null GSO value indicates that the TID/acquirer combination is not currently m use.
  • FIGS 20F through 20H are flowcharts of the detailed logic used to perform virtual terminal ID allocation
  • FIG 20F illustrates the main line operation of virtual TID allocation.
  • execution begins
  • step 2021 a skeletal transaction request structure is prepared.
  • step 2022 the mam line routine obtains a virtual TID for inclusion within the transaction request structure, as will be more fully disclosed with reference to Figure 20G, below
  • step 2023 the routine ve ⁇ fies that a TID was obtained If the TID was not obtained, for example, if more transactions are currently being processed than there are TIDs, then execution continues to step 2024.
  • the transaction request is put on a queue for future processing.
  • step 2025 the routine waits for a transaction process to end, which would free up a TID in use. At that point, control resumes from step 2022, and the routine again attempts to obtain a TID.
  • step 2026 the routine submits the transaction to the acqui ⁇ ng bank.
  • step 2027 the transaction is processed.
  • step 2028 the routine makes a database call to free up the TID that was used in the transaction.
  • step 2029 transaction processing ends.
  • FIG. 20G depicts in detail the process of obtaining a TID from the database.
  • Execution begins step 2040.
  • the routine constructs a database call to reserve a TID for processing, for example, by constructing an SQL statement to ret ⁇ eve a TID row from the database.
  • the routine executes the database call that was constructed in step 2041.
  • the routine constructs a second database call to extract the TID from the row that was reserved in step 2042.
  • the database call constructed in step 2043 is executed to obtain the TID.
  • a return code is checked to verify whether the TID was successfully obtained. If the TID was successfully obtained, control proceeds to step 2046, which returns to the calling program.
  • step 2047 the routine checks to see whether an excessive number of ret ⁇ es have already been attempted. If there have been an excessive number of ret ⁇ es, control proceeds to step 2048, which exits with an error indication. If there has not been an excessive number of retries, control proceeds once again to step 2043 to retry the extraction operation.
  • Figure 20H depicts the operation of releasing a TID that had been used in a prior transaction.
  • Execution begins in step 2060
  • the routine constructs a database call to update the row for the selected TID so that the value for the good and service order is null, thereby indicating that the selected TID is not associated with any good or service order, and is therefore free for reuse.
  • the routine executes the SQL statements constructed in step 2062, thereby releasing the TID for use m future transactions.
  • the routine returns to the calling program.
  • a source code listing for the transaction request processing is provided below in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
  • HKEY hCardsKey //To enumerate cards long retCode; int nNoCards;

Abstract

Secure transmission of data is provided between a plurality of computer systems over a public communication system, such as the Internet. Secure transmission of data is provided from a customer computer system to a merchant computer system, and for the further secure transmission of payment information from the merchant computer system to a payment gateway computer system. The payment gateway system receives encrypted payment requests from merchants, as HTTP POST messages via the Internet. The gateway then unwraps and decrypts the requests, authenticates digital signatures of the requests based on certificates, supports transaction types and card types as required by a financial institution, and accepts concurrent VPOS transactions from each of the merchant servers. Then, the gateway converts transaction data to host-specific formats and forwards the mapped requests to the host processor using the existing financial network. The gateway system architecture includes support for standard Internet access routines which facilitate access to system administration information from a commercial web browser.

Description

A SYSTEM, METHOD AND ARTICLE OF MANUFACTURE FOR
A GATEWAY SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE WITH SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION INFORMATION ACCESSIBLE FROM A BROWSER
Field Of The Invention
The present invention relates to the secure, electronic payment m exchange for goods and services purchased over a communication network, and more specifically, to a system, method and article of manufacture for securely transmitting payment information from a customer to a merchant to a payment gateway and returning a certification, including a credit confidence factor to allow a merchant to determine whether to accept or reject payment mformatton utilizing a flexible, extensible architecture
The present invention relates to an electronic graphical representation of a monetary system for implementing electronic money payments as an alternative medium of economic exchange to cash, checks, credit and debit cards, and electronic funds transfer The Electronic-Monetary System is a hybπd of currency, check, card payment systems, and electronic funds transfer systems, possessing many of the benefits of these systems with few of their limitations The system utilizes electronic representations of money which are designed to be universally accepted and exchanged as economic value by subscribers of the monetary system
Today, approximately 350 billion coin and currency transactions occur between individuals and institutions every year The extensive use of coin and currency transactions has limited the automation of individual transactions such as purchases, fares, and bank account deposits and withdrawals Individual cash transactions are burdened by the need to have the correct amount of cash or providing change therefor Furthermore, the handhng and managing of paper cash and coins is inconvenient, costly and time consuming for both individuals and financial institutions
Although checks may be written for any specific amount up to the amount available m the account, checks have very limited transferabihty and must be supplied from a physical inventory Paper-based checking systems do not offer sufficient relief from the limitations of cash transactions, sharing many of the inconveniences of handhng currency while adding the inherent delays associated with processing checks To this end, economic exchange has striven for greater convenience at a lower cost, while also seeking improved security
Automation has achieved some of these qualities for large transactions through computerized electronic funds transfer ("EFT' ) systems Electronic funds transfer is essentially a process of value exchange achieved through the banking system s centralized computer transactions. EFT services are a transfer of payments utilizing electronic 'checks, which are used primarily by large commercial organizations
The Cleanng House (ACH) where a user can enter a pre-authoπzed code and download information with billing occurring later, and a Point Of Sale (POS) system where a transaction is processed by connecting with a central computer for authorization for the transaction granted or denied immediately are examples of EFT systems that are utilized by retail and commercial organizations However, the payments made through these types of EFT systems are limited in that they cannot be performed without the banking system. Moreover, ACH transactions usually cannot be performed duπng off busmess hours
Home Banking bill payment services are examples of an EFT system used by individuals to make payments from a home computer Currently, home banking initiatives have found few customers Of the banks that have offered services for payments, account transfers and information over the telephone lines using personal computers, less than one percent of the bank s customers are using the service One reason that Home Banking has not been a successful product is because the customer cannot deposit and withdraw money as needed n this type of system
Current EFT systems, credit cards, or debit cards, which are used in conjunction with an online system to transfer money between accounts, such as between the account of a merchant and that of a customer, cannot satisfy the need for an automated transaction system providing an ergonomic interface Examples of EFT systems which provide non-ergonomic interfaces are disclosed in US Patents Numbers 5,476,259, 5,459,304, 5,452,352, 5,448,045; 5,478,993; 5,455,407, 5,453,601 , 5,465,291 , and 5,485,510 To implement an automated, convenient transaction that can dispense some form of economic value, there has been a trend towards off-line payments. For example, numerous ideas have been proposed for some form of "electronic money" that can be used in cashless payment transactions as alternatives to the traditional currency and check types of payment systems. See U.S. Pat. No. 4,977,595, entitled "METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING
ELECTRONIC CASH," and U.S. Pat. No. 4,305,059, entitled "MODULAR FUNDS TRANSFER SYSTEM."
The more well known techniques include magnetic stripe cards purchased for a given amount and from which a prepaid value can be deducted for specific purposes. Upon exhaustion of the economic value, the cards are thrown away. Other examples include memory cards or so called smart cards which are capable of repetitively storing information representing value that is likewise deducted for specific purposes.
It is desirable for a computer operated under the control of a merchant to obtain information offered by a customer and transmitted by a computer operating under the control of the customer over a publicly accessible packet- switched network (e.g., the Internet) to the computer operating under the control of the merchant, without risking the exposure of the information to interception by third parties that have access to the network, and to assure that the information is from an authentic source. It is further desirable for the merchant to transmit information, including a subset of the information provided by the customer, over such a network to a payment gateway computer system that is designated, by a bank or other financial institution that has the responsibility of providing payment on behalf of the customer, to authorize a commercial transaction on behalf of such a financial institution, without the risk of exposing that information to interception by third parties. Such institutions include, for example, financial institutions offering credit or debit card services.
One such attempt to provide such a secure transmission channel is a secure payment technology such as Secure Electronic Transaction (hereinafter "SET"), jointly developed by the Visa and MasterCard card associations, and described in Visa and MasterCard's Secure
Electronic Transaction (SET) Specification, February 23, 1996, hereby incorporated by reference. Other such secure payment technologies include Secure Transaction Technology ("STT"), Secure Electronic Payments Protocol ("SEPP"), Internet Keyed Payments ("iKP"), Net Trust, and Cybercash Credit Payment Protocol One of ordinary skill in the art readily comprehends that any of the secure payment technologies can be substituted for the SET protocol without undue experimentation. Such secure payment technologies require the customer to operate software that is compliant with the secure payment technology, interacting with third-party certification authoπties, thereby allowing the customer to transmit encoded information to a merchant, some of which may be decoded by the merchant, and some which can be decoded only by a payment gateway specified by the customer.
Another such attempt to provide such a secure transmission channel is a general- purpose secure communication protocol such as Netscape, Inc.'s Secure Sockets Layer (hereinafter
"SSL") , as descπbed in Freier, Karlton & Kocher (hereinafter "Freier"), The SSL Protocol Version 3 0, March 1996, and hereby incorporated by reference SSL provides a means for secure transmission between two computers SSL has the advantage that it does not require special- purpose software to be installed on the customer s computer because it is already incorporated into widely available software that many people utilize as their standard Internet access medium, and does not require that the customer interact with any third-party certification authority Instead, the support for SSL may be incorporated into software already in use by the customer, e.g., the Netscape Navigator World Wide Web browsing tool. However, although a computer on an SSL connection may initiate a second SSL connection to another computer, a drawback to the SSL approach is each SSL connection supports only a two-computer connection Therefore, SSL does not provide a mechanism for transmitting encoded information to a merchant for retransmission to a payment gateway such that a subset of the information is readable to the payment gateway but not to the merchant Although SSL allows for robustly secure two-party data transmission, it does not meet the ultimate need of the electronic commerce market for robustly secure three-party data transmission Other examples of general-purpose secure communication protocols include Pπvate Communications Technology ("PCT") from Microsoft, Inc , Secure Hyper-Text Transport Protocol ("SHTTP") from Teπsa Systems, Shen, Kerberos, Photuπs, Pretty Good Privacy (' PGP") which meets the IPSEC cπteπa One of ordinary skill in the art readily comprehends that any of the general-purpose secure communication protocols can be substituted for the SSL transmission protocol without undue experimentation. Banks desire an Internet payment solution that emulates existing Point of Sale (POS) apphcations that are currently installed on their host computers, and require minimal changes to their host systems. This is a critical requirement since any downtime for a bank's host computer system represents an enormous expense. Currently, VeriFone supports over fourteen hundred different payment-related applications. The large number of applications is necessary to accommodate a wide variety of host message formats, diverse methods for communicating to a variety of hosts with different dial-up and direct-connect schemes, and different certification around the world. In addition, there are a wide variety of business processes that dictate how a Point of Sale (POS) terminal queries a user for data and subsequently displays the data. Also, various vertical market segments, such as hotels, car rental agencies, restaurants, retail sales, mail sales / telephone sales require interfaces for different types of data to be entered, and provide different discount rates to merchants for complying with various data types. Moreover, a plethora of report generation mechanisms and formats are utilized by merchants that banking organizations work with.
Banks are unwilling to converge on "standards" since convergence would facilitate switching from one acquiring bank to another by merchants. In general, banks desire to increase the cost that a merchant incurs m switching from one acquiπng bank to another acquiring bank. This is accomplished by supplying a merchant with a terminal that only communicates utilizing the bank's proprietary protocol, and by providing other value-added services that a merchant may not be able to obtain at another bank.
Internet- based payment solutions require additional security measures that are not found m conventional POS terminals. This additional requirement is necessitated because Internet communication is done over publicly-accessible, unsecured communication line in stark contrast to the pπvate, secure, dedicated phone or leased line service utilized between a traditional merchant and an acquiring bank. Thus, it is critical that any solution utilizing the Internet for a communication backbone, employ some form of cryptography.
As discussed above, the current state-of-the-art Internet based payment processing is a protocol referred to as SET. Since the SET messages are uniform across all implementations, banks cannot differentiate themselves m any reasonable way. Also, since SET is not a proper superset of all protocols utilized today, there are bank protocols which cannot be mapped or translated into SET because they require data elements for which SET has no placeholder. Further, SET only handles the message types directly related to authorizing and capturing credit card transactions and adjustments to these authorizations or captures. In a typical POS terminal in the physical world, these messages compπse almost the entire volume of the total number of messages between the merchant and the authorizing bank, but only half of the total number of different message types These message types, which are used infrequently, but which are critical to the operation of the POS terminal must be supported for proper transaction processing
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
According to a broad aspect of a preferred embodiment of the invention, a server communicates bidirectionally with a gateway over a first communication link, over which all service requests are initiated by the server Secure transmission of data is provided from a customer computer system to a merchant computer system, and for the further secure transmission of payment information regarding a payment instrument from the merchant computer system to a payment gateway computer system. The payment gateway system receives encrypted payment requests from merchants, as HTTP POST messages via the Internet. The gateway then unwraps and decrypts the requests, authenticates digital signatures of the requests based on certificates, supports transaction types and card types as required by a financial institution, and accepts concurrent VPOS transactions from each of the merchant servers. Then, the gateway converts transaction data to host-specific formats and forwards the mapped requests to the host processor using the existing financial network The gateway system architecture includes support for standard Internet access routines which facilitate access to system administration information from a commercial web browser
DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The foregoing and other objects, aspects and advantages are better understood from the following detailed description of a preferred embodiment of the invention with reference to the drawings, in which: Figure 1A is a block diagram of a representative hardware environment in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure IB depicts an overview in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 1C is a block diagram of the system in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 2 depicts a more detailed view of a customer computer system in communication with merchant system under the Secure Sockets Layer protocol in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 3 depicts an overview of the method of securely supplying payment information to a payment gateway in order to obtain payment authorization in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 4 depicts the detailed steps of generating and transmitting a payment authorization request in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figures 5A through 5F depict views of the payment authorization request and its component parts in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figures 6A and 6B depict the detailed steps of processing a payment authorization request and generating and transmitting a payment authorization request response m accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figures 7A through 7J depict views of the payment authorizauon response and its component parts in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 8 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment authorization response in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 9 depicts an overview of the method of securely supplying payment capture information to a payment gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 10 depicts the detailed steps of generating and transmitting a payment capture request in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figures 11A through 11F depict views of the payment capture request and its component parts in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figures 12A and 12B depict the detailed steps of processing a payment capture request and generating and transmitting a payment capture request response in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figures 13A through 13F depict views of the payment capture response and its component parts in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 14 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment capture response in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 15A & 1SB depicts transaction processing of merchant and consumer transactions in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 16 illustrates a transaction class hierarchy block diagram in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 17 shows a typical message flow between the merchant, VPOS terminal and the Gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figures 18A-E are block diagrams of the extended SET architecture m accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 19 is a flowchart of VPOS merchant pay customization in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figures 20A-20H are block diagrams and flowcharts setting forth the detailed logic of thread processing in accordance with a preferred embodiment,
Figure 21 is a detailed diagram of a multithreaded gateway engine m accordance with a preferred embodiment,
Figure 22 is a flow diagram m accordance with a preferred embodiment,
Figure 23 illustrates a Gateway's role in a network in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 24 is a block diagram of the Gateway m accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 25 is a block diagram of the VPOS Terminal Architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment,
Figure 26 is an architecture block diagram in accordance with a preferred embodiment,
Figure 27 is a block diagram of the payment manager architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment,
Figure 28 is a Consumer Payment Message Sequence Diagram m accordance with a preferred embodiment of the invention,
Figure 29 is an illustration of a certificate issuance form in accordance with a preferred embodiment,
Figure 30 illustrates a certificate issuance response in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 31 illustrates a collection of payment instrument holders in accordance with a preferred embodiment,
Figure 32 illustrates the default payment instrument bitmap in accordance with a preferred embodiment, Figure 33 illustrates a selected payment instrument with a fill m the blanks for the cardholder in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 34 illustrates a coffee purchase utilizing the newly defined VISA card in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the invention;
Figure 35 is a flowchart of conditional authorization of payment in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figures 36-48 are screen displays in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 49 shows how the VPOS authenticates an incoming response to a request m accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 50 is a flowchart for the merchant interaction with the Test Gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figures 51-61 are flowcharts depicting the detailed logic of the gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 62 is the ma administration display for the Gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 63 is a configuration panel in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 64 is a host communication display for facilitating communication between the gateway and the acquirer payment host in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 65 is a Services display in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 66 is a graphical representation of the gateway transaction database in accordance with a preferred embodiment; Figure 67 illustrates the gateway hardware architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment;
Figure 68 is a block diagram setting forth the gateway software architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment; and
Figure 69 is a block diagram setting forth the gateway components and interfaces in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
A preferred embodiment of a system in accordance with the present mvention is preferably practiced in the context of a personal computer such as the IBM PS/2, Apple Macintosh computer or UNIX based workstation. A representative hardware environment is depicted in Figure 1A, which illustrates a typical hardware configuration of a workstation in accordance with a preferred embodiment having a central processing unit 10, such as a microprocessor, and a number of other units interconnected via a system bus 12. The workstation shown in Figure 1A includes a Random Access Memory (RAM) 14, Read Only Memory (ROM) 16, an I/O adapter 18 for connecting peπpheral devices such as disk storage units 20 to the bus 12, a user interface adapter 22 for connecting a keyboard 24, a mouse 26, a speaker 28, a microphone 32, and/or other user interface devices such as a touch screen (not shown) to the bus 12, communication adapter 34 for connecting the workstation to a communication network (e.g , a data processing network) and a display adapter 36 for connecting the bus 12 to a display device 38. The workstation typically has resident thereon an operaϋng system such as the Microsoft Windows NT or Windows/95 Operating System (OS), the IBM OS/2 operating system, the MAC OS, or UNIX operating system. Those skilled m the art will appreciate that the present invention may also be implemented on platforms and operating systems other than those mentioned.
A preferred embodiment is wntten using JAVA, C, and the C++ language and utilizes object oriented programming methodology. Object oriented programming (OOP) has become increasingly used to develop complex applications. As OOP moves toward the mainstream of software design and development, vaπous software solutions require adaptation to make use of the benefits of OOP. A need exists for these principles of OOP to be applied to a messaging interface of an electronic messaging system such that a set of OOP classes and objects for the messaging interface can be provided.
OOP is a process of developing computer software using objects, including the steps of analyzing the problem, designing the system, and constructing the program. An object is a software package that contains both data and a collection of related structures and procedures. Since it contains both data and a collection of structures and procedures, it can be visualized as a self-sufficient component that does not require other additional structures, procedures or data to perform its specific task. OOP, therefore, views a computer program as a collection of largely autonomous components, called objects, each of which is responsible for a specific task. This concept of packaging data, structures, and procedures together m one component or module is called encapsulation.
In general, OOP components are reusable software modules which present an interface that conforms to an object model and which are accessed at run-time through a component integration architecture. A component integration architecture is a set of architecture mechanisms which allow software modules in different process spaces to utilize each others capabilities or functions. This is generally done by assuming a common component object model on which to build the architecture.
It is worthwhile to differentiate between an object and a class of objects at this point. An object is a single instance of the class of objects, which is often just called a class. A class of objects can be viewed as a blueprint, from which many objects can be formed.
OOP allows the programmer to create an object that is a part of another object. For example, the object representing a piston engine is said to have a composition-relationship with the object representing a piston. In reality, a piston engine compπses a piston, valves and many other components; the fact that a piston is an element of a piston engine can be logically and semantically represented in OOP by two objects.
OOP also allows creation of an object that "depends from" another object. If there are two objects, one representing a piston engine and the other representing a piston engine wherein the piston is made of ceramic, then the relationship between the two objects is not that of composition. A ceramic piston engine does not make up a piston engine. Rather it is merely one kind of piston engine that has one more limitation than the piston engine; its piston is made of ceramic. In this case, the object representing the ceramic piston engine is called a derived object, and it inheπts all of the aspects of the object representmg the piston engine and adds further limitation or detail to it. The object representing the ceramic piston engine "depends from" the object representing the piston engine. The relationship between these objects is called inheπtance.
When the object or class representing the ceramic piston engine inheπts all of the aspects of the objects representmg the piston engine, it inheπts the thermal characteπstics of a standard piston defined in the piston engine class However, the ceramic piston engine object overπdes these ceramic specific thermal characteristics, which are typically different from those associated with a metal piston. It skips over the original and uses new functions related to ceramic pistons. Different kinds of piston engines have different characteπstics, but may have the same underlying functions associated with it (e.g., how many pistons in the engine, ignition sequences, lubπcation, etc.). To access each of these functions in any piston engine object, a programmer would call the same functions with the same names, but each type of piston engine may have different/overriding implementations of functions behind the same name. This ability to hide different implementations of a function behind the same name is called polymorphism and it greatly simplifies communication among objects.
With the concepts of composition-relationship, encapsulation, inheπtance and polymorphism, an object can represent just about anything in the real world. In fact, our logical perception of the reality is the only limit on determining the kinds of things that can become objects in object-oπented software. Some typical categoπes are as follows:
Objects can represent physical objects, such as automobiles in a traffic-flow simulation, electrical components in a circuit-design program, countπes in an economics model, or aircraft in an air-traffic-control system. Objects can represent elements of the computer-user environment such as windows, menus or graphics objects.
An object can represent an inventory, such as a personnel file or a table of the latitudes and longitudes of cities. An object can represent user-defined data types such as time, angles, and complex numbers, or points on the plane.
With this enormous capability of an object to represent just about any logically separable matters, OOP allows the software developer to design and implement a computer program that is a model of some aspects of reality, whether that reality is a physical entity, a process, a system, or a composition of matter. Since the object can represent anything, the software developer can create an object which can be used as a component in a larger software project in the future.
If 90% of a new OOP software program consists of proven, existing components made from preexisting reusable objects, then only the remaining 10% of the new software project has to be written and tested from scratch. Since 90% already came from an inventory of extensively tested reusable objects, the potential domain from which an error could originate is 10% of the program. As a result, OOP enables software developers to build objects out of other, previously built, objects.
This process closely resembles complex machinery being built out of assemblies and sub- assemblies. OOP technology, therefore, makes software engineering more like hardware engineering in that software is built from existing components, which are available to the developer as objects. All this adds up to an improved quality of the software as well as an increased speed of its development.
Programming languages are beginning to fully support the OOP principles, such as encapsulation, inheritance, polymorphism, and composition-relationship. With the advent of the C++ language, many commercial software developers have embraced OOP. C++ is an OOP language that offers a fast, machine-executable code. Furthermore, C++ is suitable for both commercial-application and systems-programming projects. For now, C++ appears to be the most popular choice among many OOP programmers, but there is a host of other OOP languages, such as Smalltalk, common lisp object system (CLOS), and Eiffel. Additionally, OOP capabilities are being added to more traditional popular computer programming languages such as Pascal. The benefits of object classes can be summarized, as follows
Objects and their corresponding classes break down complex programming problems into many smaller, simpler problems.
Encapsulation enforces data abstraction through the organization of data into small, independent objects that can communicate with each other. Encapsulation protects the data in an object from accidental damage, but allows other objects to mteract with that data by calling the object's member functions and structures.
Subclassing and inheπtance make it possible to extend and modify objects through deπvmg new kinds of objects from the standard classes available in the system. Thus, new capabilities are created without having to start from scratch.
Polymorphism and multiple inheritance make it possible for different programmers to mix and match characteristics of many different classes and create specialized objects that can still work with related objects m predictable ways.
Class hierarchies and containment hierarchies provide a flexible mechanism for modeling real-world objects and the relationships among them.
Libraπes of reusable classes are useful in many situations, but they also have some limitations. For example:
Complexity In a complex system, the class hierarchies for related classes can become extremely confusing, with many dozens or even hundreds of classes. Flow of control. A program written with the aid of class libraπes is still responsible for the flow of control (i.e , it must control the interactions among all the objects created from a particular library) The programmer has to decide which functions to call at what times for which kinds of objects
Duplication of effort Although class libraπes allow programmers to use and reuse many small pieces of code, each programmer puts those pieces together in a different way.
Two different programmers can use the same set of class libraπes to wπte two programs that do exactly the same thing but whose internal structure (I e., design) may be quite different, depending on hundreds of small decisions each programmer makes along the way. Inevitably, similar pieces of code end up doing similar things in slightly different ways and do not work as well together as they should. Class libraπes are very flexible As programs grow more complex, more programmers are forced to reinvent basic solutions to basic problems over and over again. A relatively new extension of the class library concept is to have a framework of class libraπes. This framework is more complex and consists of significant collections of collaborating classes that capture both the small scale patterns and major mechanisms that implement the common requirements and design in a specific application domain. They were first developed to free application programmers from the chores involved in displaying menus, windows, dialog boxes, and other standard user interface elements for personal computers.
Frameworks also represent a change in the way programmers think about the interaction between the code they wπte and code wπtten by others. In the early days of procedural programming, the programmer called libraries provided by the operating system to perform certain tasks, but basically the program executed down the page from start to finish, and the programmer was solely responsible for the flow of control This was appropπate for pπnting out paychecks, calculating a mathematical table, or solving other problems with a program that executed m just one way.
The development of graphical user interfaces began to turn this procedural programming arrangement inside out. These interfaces allow the user, rather than program logic, to dπve the program and decide when certain actions should be performed Today, most personal computer software accomplishes this by means of an event loop which monitors the mouse, keyboard, and other sources of external events and calls the appropπate parts of the programmer's code according to actions that the user performs The programmer no longer determines the order in which events occur Instead, a program is divided into separate pieces that are called at unpredictable times and in an unpredictable order By relinquishing control in this way to users, the developer creates a program that is much easier to use Nevertheless, individual pieces of the program wπtten by the developer still call libraries provided by the operating system to accomplish certain tasks, and the programmer must still determine the flow of control within each piece after it's called by the event loop Application code still "sits on top of" the system.
Even event loop programs require programmers to wπte a lot of code that should not need to be written separately for every application The concept of an application framework carπes the event loop concept further. Instead of dealing with all the nuts and bolts of constructing basic menus, windows, and dialog boxes and then making these things all work together, programmers using application frameworks start with working application code and basic user interface elements in place. Subsequently, they build from there by replacing some of the geneπc capabilities of the framework with the specific capabilities of the intended application.
Application frameworks reduce the total amount of code that a programmer has to wπte from scratch. However, because the framework is really a generic application that displays windows, supports copy and paste, and so on, the programmer can also relinquish control to a greater degree than event loop programs permit. The fraipework code takes care of almost all event handling and flow of control, and the programmer's code is called only when the framework needs it (e.g., to create or manipulate a propπetary data structure).
A programmer wntmg a framework program not only relinquishes control to the user (as is also true for event loop programs), but also relinquishes the detailed flow of control within the program to the framework. This approach allows the creation of more complex systems that work together in interesting ways, as opposed to isolated programs, having custom code, being created over and over again for similar problems.
Thus, as is explained above, a framework basically is a collection of cooperating classes that make up a reusable design solution for a given problem domain. It typically includes objects that provide default behavior (e.g. , for menus and windows), and programmers use it by mheπtmg some of that default behavior and overriding other behavior so that the framework calls application code at the appropriate times. There are three main differences between frameworks and class libraries:
Behavior versus protocol. Class libraries are essentially collections of behaviors that you can call when you want those individual behaviors in your program. A framework, on the other hand, provides not only behavior but also the protocol or set of rules that govern the ways in which behaviors can be combined, including rules for what a programmer is supposed to provide versus what the framework provides.
Call versus override. With a class library, the code the programmer instantiates objects and calls their member functions. It's possible to instantiate and call objects in the same way with a framework (i.e., to treat the framework as a class library), but to take full advantage of a framework's reusable design, a programmer typically wπtes code that overπdes and is called by the framework The framework manages the flow of control among its objects Wπtmg a program involves dividing responsibilities among the vaπous pieces of software that are called by the framework rather than specifying how the different pieces should work together.
Implementation versus design With class libraries, programmers reuse only implementations, whereas with frameworks, they reuse design. A framework embodies the way a family of related programs or pieces of software work. It represents a geneπc design solution that can be adapted to a vaπety of specific problems in a given domain. For example, a single framework can embody the way a user interface works, even though two different user interfaces created with the same framework might solve quite different interface problems
Thus, through the development of frameworks for solutions to vaπous problems and programming tasks, significant reductions in the design and development effort for software can be achieved A preferred embodiment of the invention utilizes HyperText Markup Language (HTML) to implement documents on the Internet together with a general-purpose secure communication protocol for a transport medium between the client and the merchant. HTTP or other protocols could be readily substituted for HTML without undue expeπmentation Information on these products is available in T Bemers-Lee, D Connoly, "RFC 1866: Hypertext Markup Language - 2 0" (Nov. 1995), and R Fielding, H, Frystyk, T Berners-Lee, J Gettys and J.C. Mogul, "Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/ 1 1 HTTP Working Group Internet Draft" (May 2, 1996) HTML is a simple data format used to create hypertext documents that are portable from one platform to another HTML documents are SGML documents with geneπc semantics that are appropπate for representing information from a wide range of domains HTML has been m use by the World-Wide Web global information initiative since 1990. HTML is an application of ISO Standard 8879 1986 Information Processing Text and Office Systems, Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML)
To date, Web development tools have been limited in their ability to create dynamic Web applications which span from client to server and mteroperate with existing computing resources Until recently, HTML has been the dominant technology used in development of Web-based solutions. However, HTML has proven to be inadequate in the following areas o Poor performance, o Restπcted user interface capabilities; o Can only produce static Web pages; o Lack of interoperability with existing applications and data; and o Inability to scale.
Sun Microsystem's Java language solves many of the client-side problems by o Improving performance on the client side; o Enabling the creation of dynamic, real-time Web applications; and o Providing the ability to create a wide vaπety of user interface components.
With Java, developers can create robust User Interface (UI) components Custom "widgets" (e.g. real-time stock tickers, animated icons, etc ) can be created, and client-side performance is improved. Unlike HTML, Java supports the notion of client-side validation, offloading appropπate processmg onto the client for improved performance Dynamic, real-time Web pages can be created. Using the above-mentioned custom UI components, dynamic Web pages can also be created.
Sun's Java language has emerged as an industry-recognized language for "programming the Internet " Sun defines Java as. "a simple, object-oπented, distπbuted, interpreted, robust, secure, architecture-neutral, portable, high-performance, multithreaded, dynamic, buzzword- compliant, general-purpose programming language Java supports programming for the Internet in the form of platform-independent Java applets " Java applets are small, specialized applications that comply with Sun s Java Application Programming Interface (API) allowing developers to add "interactive content' to Web documents (e.g. simple animations, page adornments, basic games, etc.) Applets execute withm a Java-compatible browser (e.g. Netscape Navigator) by copying code from the server to client. From a language standpoint, Java s core feature set is based on C++ Sun's Java literature states that Java is basically "C++, with extensions from Objective C for more dynamic method resolution"
Another technology that provides similar function to JAVA is provided by Microsoft and ActiveX Technologies, to give developers and Web designers wherewithal to build dynamic content for the Internet and personal computers ActiveX includes tools for developing animation, 3-D virtual reality, video and other multimedia content. The tools use Internet standards, work on multiple platforms, and are being supported by over 100 companies. The group's building blocks are called ActiveX Controls, small, fast components that enable developers to embed parts of software in hypertext markup language (HTML) pages. ActiveX Controls work with a variety of programming languages including Microsoft Visual C++, Borland Delphi, Microsoft Visual Basic programming system and, in the future, Microsoft's development tool for Java, code named "Jakarta." ActiveX Technologies also includes ActiveX Server Framework, allowing developers to create server applications. One of ordinary skill in the art readily recognizes that ActiveX could be substituted for JAVA without undue experimentation to practice the invention.
Figure IB depicts an overview of the present invention. Customer computer system 120 is in communication with merchant computer system 130. The customer- merchant session 150 operates under a general-purpose secure communication protocol such as the SSL protocol. Merchant computer system 130 is additionally in communication with payment gateway computer system 140. A payment gateway is a system that provides electronic commerce services in support of a bank or other financial institution, and that interfaces to the financial institution to support the authorization and capture of transactions. The customer-institution session 170 operates under a variant of a secure payment technology such as the SET protocol, as described herein, referred to as Merchant- Originated Secure Electronic Transactions ("MOSET"), as is more fully described herein.
Customer-to-Merchant Communication
Figure 2 depicts a more detailed view of customer computer system 120 in communication with merchant system 130 using customer-merchant session 150 operating under the SSL protocol as documented in Freier and incorporated by reference.
Customer computer system 120 initiates communication with merchant computer system 130 using any well-known access protocol, e.g., Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol ("TCP/IP"). A description of TCP/IP is provided in Information Sciences Institute, "Transmission Control Protocol DARPA Internet Program Protocol Specification (RFC 793)" (September, 1981), and Information Sciences Institute, "Internet Protocol DARPA Internet Program Protocol Specification (RFC 791)" (September, 1981). In this implementation, customer computer system 120 acts as a client and merchant computer system 130 acts as a server. Customer computer system 120 initiates communication by sending "client hello" message 210 to the merchant computer system 130 When a client first connects to a server it is required to send the client hello message 210 as its first message The client can also send a client hello message 210 in response to a hello request on its own initiative m order to renegotiate the secuπty parameters in an existing connection. The client hello message includes a random structure, which is used later in the protocol Specifically, the random structure includes the current time and date in standard UNIX 32-bit format according to the sender's internal clock and twenty-eight bytes of data generated by a secure random number generator The client hello message 210 further includes a vaπable length session identifier. If not empty, the session identifier value identifies a session between the same client and server whose secuπty parameters the client wishes to reuse The session identifier may be from an earlier connection, the current connection, or another currently active connecuon It is useful to specify the current connection if the client only wishes to update the random structures and denved values of a connection It is useful to specify another currently active connection if the client wishes to establish several simultaneous independent secure connections to the same server without repeating the full handshake protocol Client hello message 210 further includes an indicator of the cryptographic algoπthms supported by the client in order of the client s preference, ordered according to client preference
In response to client hello message 210, if merchant computer system 130 wishes to correspond with customer computer system 120, it responds with server hello message 215. If merchant computer s\ stem 130 does not wish to communicate with customer computer system 120, it responds with a message, not shown, indicating refusal to communicate
Server hello message 215 includes a random structure, which is used later m the protocol. The random structure in server hello message 215 is in the same format as, but has contents independent of, the random structure in client hello message 210 Specifically, the random structure includes the current time and date in standard UNIX 32-bit format according to the sender s internal clock and twenty-eight bytes of data generated by a secure random number generator Server hello message 215 further includes a vaπable length session identifier. The session identifier value identifies a new or existing session between the same client and server Server hello message 215 further includes an indicator of the cryptographic algoπthms selected from among the algoπthms specified by client hello message 210, which is utilized in further encrypted communications.
Optionally, Merchant computer system 130 transmits a server certificate 220. If transmitted, server certificate 130 enables customer computer system 120 to authenticate the identity of merchant computer system 130.
If merchant computer system 130 does not transmit a server certificate 220, or if server certificate 220 is suitable only for authentication, it may optionally transmit a server key exchange message 225. Server key exchange message 225 identifies a key that may be used by customer computer system 120 to decrypt further messages sent by merchant computer system 130.
After transmitting server hello message 215, and optionally transmitting server certificate 220 or server key exchange message 225, merchant computer system 130 transmits a server hello done message 230 and waits for a further response from customer computer system 120.
Customer computer system 120 optionally transmits client certificate 240 to merchant computer system 130. If transmitted, client certificate 240 enables merchant computer system 130 to authenticate the identity of customer computer system 120. Alternatively, customer computer system 120 may transmit a no-c ent-certificate alert 245, to indicate that the customer has not registered with any certification authority.
If customer computer system 130 does not transmit a client certificate 240, or if client certificate 240 is suitable only for authentication, customer computer system 130 may optionally transmit a client key exchange message 250. Client key exchange message 250 identifies a key that may be used by merchant computer system 130 to decrypt further messages sent by customer computer system 120.
After optionally transmitting client certificate 240, no-client-certificate alert 245, and/ or client key exchange message 250, customer computer system 120 transmits a finished message 260.
At this point, customer computer system 120 and merchant computer system 130 have: 1) negotiated an encryption scheme that may be commonly employed in further communications, and
2) have communicated to each other a set of encryption keys that may be used to decrypt further communications between the two computer systems
Customer computer system 120 and merchant computer system 130 may thereafter engage m secure communications 270 with less risk of interception by third parties
Among the messages communicated by customer computer system 120 to merchant computer system 130 may be messages that specify goods or services to be ordered and payment information, such as a credit card number and related informatton, collectively referred to as "payment information," that may be used to pay for the goods and/or services ordered In order to obtain payment, the merchant must supply this information to the bank or other payment gateway responsible for the proffered payment method This enables the merchant to perform payment authorization and payment capture Payment authorization is the process by which permission is granted by a payment gateway operating on behalf of a financial institution to authorize payment on behalf of the financial institution. This is a process that assesses transaction πsk, confirms that a given transaction does not raise the account holder's debt above the account's credit limit, and reserves the specified amount of credit Payment capture is the process that tπggers the movement of funds from the financial institution to the merchant's account after settlement of the account.
Payment Authorization
Merchants utilize point-of-sale products for credit and debit transactions on a daily basis. An embodiment in accordance with the subject invention allows an acquirer processor to accept transactions from Internet storefronts without alteπng a current host environment. The system easily converts payment protocol messages and simultaneously manages transacUons from a number of Internet merchant servers As the number of transactions grows, the payment gateway can be scaled to handle the increased business, and it can be configured to work with specific business processes used by the acquirer/ processor Thus, the payment gateway supports Internet processing utilizing payment processing operations. The payment gateway provides support for configuring and installing the Internet payment capability utilizing existing host point-of-sale technology. The payment gateway also provides an intuitive Graphical User Interface (GUI) with support built in to accommodate future payment instruments such as debit cards, electronic checks, electronic cash and micropayments. The payment gateway implements secure transactions using RSA public-key cryptography and the MasterCard /Visa Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) protocol. The gateway also provides full functionality for merchant payment processing including authorization, capture, settlement and reconciliation while providing monitor activity with reporting and tracking of transactions sent over the Internet. Finally, the payment gateway also implements Internet payment procedures that match current processor business models to ensure consistency for merchants. Handling Internet transactions is destined to become a necessary function for every payment processing system. Today, merchants often transmit data received over the Internet inefficiently. Some fax the information or waste time keying data into a non-Internet system.
Figure 3 depicts an overview of the method of securely supplying payment information to a payment gateway in order to obtain payment authorization. In function block 310, merchant computer system 130 generates a payment authorization request 315 and transmits it to payment gateway computer system 140. In function block 330, payment gateway system 140 processes the payment authorization request, generates a payment authorization response 325 and transmits it to merchant computer system 130. In function block 320, merchant computer system 130 processes payment authorization response 325 and determines whether payment for the goods or services sought to be obtained by the customer has been authorized.
Payment Authorization Request Generation
Figure 4 depicts the detailed steps of generating and transmitting a payment authorization request. Figures 5A through 5F depict views of the payment authorization request and its component parts. In function block 410, merchant computer system 130 creates a basic authorization request 510. The basic authorization request is a data area that includes all the information for determining whether a request should be granted or denied. Specifically, it includes such information as the party who is being charged, the amount to be charged, the account number of the account to be charged, and any additional data, such as passwords, needed to validate the charge. This information is either calculated based upon prior customer merchandise selection, or provided by the customer over the secure link 270 established in the customer-merchant general-purpose secure communication protocol session Fig 5A depicts a basic authorization request 510
In function block 420, merchant computer system 130 combines basic authorization request 510, a copy of its encryption public key certificate 515 and a copy of its signature public key certificate 520. Merchant computer system 130 calculates a digital signature 525 for the combined contents of the combined block 530 compπsmg basic authorization request 510, the encryption public key certificate 515 and the signature public key certificate 520, and appends it to the combination of the combined basic authorization request 510, the encryption public key certificate 515 and the signature public key certificate 520. The merchant computer system calculates digital signature 525 by first calculating a 'message digest ' based upon the contents of the combined basic authorization request 510, the encryption public key certificate 515 and the signature public key certificate 520 A message digest is the fixed-length result that is generated when a vaπable length message is fed into a one-way hashing function.
Message digests help veπfy that a message has not been altered because alteπng the message would change the digest The message digest is then encrypted using the merchant computer system's 130 digital signature pπvate key, thus forming a digital signature.
Figure 5B depicts the combined block 530 formed by function block 420 and containing basic authorization request 510, the encryption public key certificate 515, the signature public key certificate 520, and digital signature 525
In function block 430, merchant computer system 130 generates a random encryption key RK- 0 540, denoted as RK-0 Random encryption key RK-0 540 is a symmetπc encryption key. A symmetπc encryption key is a key characterized by the property that a message encrypted with a symmetπc key can be decrypted with that same key This is contrasted with an asymmetric key pair, such as a public-key/ private-key key pair, where a message encrypted with one key of the key pair may only be decrypted with the other key of the same key pair Figure 5C depicts random encryption key RK-0 540
In function block 440, merchant computer system 130 encrypts combmed block 530 using random encryption key RK-0 540 to form encrypted combmed block 550. Figure 5D depicts encrypted combined block 550. The encryption state of encrypted combmed block 550 is graphically shown by random key lock 555, which indicates that encrypted combined block 550 is encrypted using random key RK-0 540.
In function block 450, merchant computer system 130 encrypts random encryption key RK-0 540 using the public key of payment gateway system 140 to form encrypted random key 560. Figure 5E depicts encrypted random key 560. The encryption state of encrypted random key 560 is graphically shown by payment gateway public key lock 565, which mdicates that encrypted random key 560 is encrypted using the payment gateway public key.
In function block 460, merchant computer system 130 concatenates encrypted combined block 550 and encrypted random key 560 to form merchant authoπzation request 315. Figure 5F depicts merchant authoπzation request 315 compπsing encrypted combined block 550 and encrypted random key 560. In function block 470, merchant computer system 130 transmits merchant authoπzation request 315 to payment gateway system 140.
Payment Authorization Request Processing
Figure 6 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment authoπzation request and generating and transmitting a payment authoπzation request response. Function blocks 610 through 630 depict the steps of processing a payment authoπzation request, while function blocks 635 through 685 depict the steps of generating and transmitting a payment authoπzation request response
In function block 610, payment gateway computer system 140 applies its pπvate key to encrypted random key 560 contained within received merchant authoπzation request 315, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of random key RK-0 540. In function block 615, payment gateway computer system 140 applies random key RK-0 540 to encrypted combined block 550, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of combined block 530. Combined block 530 compπses basic authoπzation request 510, a copy of merchant computer system's 130 encryption public key certificate 515 and a copy of merchant computer system's 130 signature public key certificate 520, as well as merchant digital signature 525. In function block 620, payment gateway computer system 140 verifies merchant computer system's 130 encryption public key certificate 515 and merchant computer system's 130 signature public key certificate 520. Payment gateway computer system 140 performs this verification by making a call to the certification authorities associated with each certificate. If verification of either certificate fails, payment gateway computer system 140 rejects the authorization request.
In function block 625, payment gateway computer system 140 validates merchant digital signature 525. Payment gateway computer system 140 performs this validation by calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic authorization request 510, the encryption public key certificate 515 and the signature public key certificate 520. Payment gateway computer system 140 then decrypts digital signature 525 to obtain a copy of the equivalent message digest calculated by merchant computer system 130 in function block 420. If the two message digests are equal, the digital signature 525 is validated. If validation fails, payment gateway computer system 140 rejects the authorization request.
In function block 630, payment gateway computer system 140 determines the financial institution for which authorization is required by inspection of basic authorization request 510. Payment gateway computer system 140 contacts the appropriate financial institution using a secure means, e.g, a direct-dial modem-to-modem connection, or a proprietary internal network that is not accessible to third parties, and using prior art means, obtains a response indicating whether the requested payment is authorized.
Payment Authorization Response Generation Function blocks 635 through 685 depict the steps of generating and transmitting a payment authorization request response. Figures 7A through 7J depict views of the payment authorization response and its component parts.
In function block 635, payment gateway computer system 140 creates a basic authorization response 710. The basic authorization request is a data area that includes all the information to determine whether a request was granted or denied. Figure 7A depicts basic authorization response 710. In function block 640, payment gateway computer system 140 combines basic authoπzation response 710, and a copy of its signature public key certificate 720. Payment computer system 140 calculates a digital signature 725 for the combined contents of the combined block 730 compπsmg basic authoπzation response 710 and the signature public key certificate 720, and appends the signature to the combination of the combined basic authorization response 710 and the signature public key certificate 720 The payment gateway computer system calculates digital signature 725 by first calculating a message digest based on the contents of the combined basic authoπzation response 710 and signature public key certificate 720. The message digest is then encrypted using the merchant computer system's 140 digital signature pπvate key, thus forming a digital signature
Figure 7B depicts the combined block 730 formed in function block 640 and containing basic authoπzation response 710, the signature public key certificate 720, and digital signature 725.
In function block 645, payment gateway computer system 150 generates a first symmetπc random encryption key 740, denoted as RK- 1 Figure 7C depicts first random encryption key RK-1 740.
In function block 650, payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts combmed block 730 usmg random encryption key RK- 1 740 to form encrypted combmed block 750. Figure 7D depicts encrypted combined block 750 The encryption state of encrypted combined block 750 is graphically shown by random key lock 755, which indicates that encrypted combined block 750 is encrypted using random key RK- 1 740
In function block 655, payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts random encryption key RK- 1 740 using the public key of merchant computer system 130 to form encrypted random key RK 760 Figure 7E depicts encrypted random key RK- 1 760. The encryption state of encrypted random key 760 is graphically shown by merchant public key lock 765, which indicates that encrypted random key 760 is encrypted using the merchant public key.
In function block 660, payment gateway computer system 140 generates a random capture token 770. Random capture token 770 is utilized in subsequent payment capture processing to associate the payment capture request with the payment authoπzation request being processed Figure 7F depicts capture token 775
In function block 665, payment gateway computer system 140 generates a second symmetric random encryption key 775, denoted as RK-2. Figure 7G depicts second random encryption key RK-2 775.
In function block 670, payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts capture token 770 using random encryption key RK-2 770 to form encrypted capture token 780 Figure 7H depicts encrypted capture token 780 The encryption state of encrypted capture token 780 is graphically shown by random key lock 785, which indicates that encrypted capture token 780 is encrypted using random key RK-2 770.
In function block 675, payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts second random encryption key RK-2 775 using its own public key to form encrypted random key RK-2 790.
Figure 71 depicts encrypted random key RK-2 790. The encryption state of encrypted random key 790 is graphically shown by payment gateway public key lock 795, which indicates that encrypted random key 790 is encrypted using the payment gateway public key.
In function block 680, payment gateway computer system 140 concatenates encrypted combined block 750, encrypted random key RK- 1 760, encrypted capture token 780 and encrypted random key RK-2 790 to torm merchant authoπzation response 325. Figure 7J depicts merchant authorization response 325 compnsmg encrypted combined block 750, encrypted random key RK- 1 760, encrypted capture token 780 and encrypted random key RK- 2 790. In function block 685, payment gateway computer system 140 transmits merchant authoπzation response 325 to merchant system 130.
Payment Authorization Response Processing
Figure 8 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment authoπzation response. In function block 810, merchant computer system 130 applies its pπvate key to encrypted random key
RK- 1 760 contained within received merchant authoπzation response 325, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of random key RK- 1 740. In function block 820, merchant computer system 130 applies random key RK- 1 740 to encrypted combined block 750, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of combined block 730. Combined block 730 compπses basic authoπzation response 710, a copy of payment gateway computer system's 140 signature public key certificate 720, as well as payment gateway digital signature 725. In function block 830, merchant computer system 130 verifies payment gateway computer system's 140 signature public key certificate 720. Merchant computer system 130 performs this veπfication by making a call to the certification authority associated with the certificate. If veπfication of the certificate fails, merchant computer system 130 concludes that the authoπzation response is counterfeit and treats it though the authoπzation request had been rejected
In function block 840, merchant computer system 130 validates payment gateway digital signature 725 Merchant computer system 130 performs this validation by calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic authoπzation request 710 and the signature public key certificate 720. Merchant computer system 130 then decrypts digital signature 725 to obtain a copy of the equivalent message digest calculated by payment gateway computer system 140 in function block 640 If the two message digests are equal, the digital signature 725 is validated. If validation fails, concludes that the authoπzation response is counterfeit and treats it though the authoπzation request had been rejected.
In function block 850, merchant computer system 130 stores encrypted capture token 780 and encrypted random key RK-2 790 for later use in payment capture. In function block 860, merchant computer system 130 processes the customer purchase request in accordance with the authoπzation response 710 If the authoπzation response indicates that payment in authorized, merchant computer system 130 fills the requested order If the authoπzation response indicates that payment is not authorized, or if merchant computer system 130 determined in function block 830 or 840 that the authoπzation response is counterfeit , merchant computer system 130 indicates to the customer that the order cannot be filled.
Payment Capture Figure 9 depicts an overview of the method of securely supplying payment capture information to payment gateway 140 in order to obtain payment capture. In function block 910, merchant computer system 130 generates a merchant payment capture request 915 and transmits it to payment gateway computer system 140 In function block 930, payment gateway system 140 processes the payment capture request 915, generates a payment capture response 925 and transmits it to merchant computer system 130 In function block 920, merchant computer system 130 processes payment capture response 925 and veπfies that payment for the goods or services sought to be obtained by the customer have been captured.
Payment Capture Request Generation Figure 10 depicts the detailed steps of generating and transmitting a payment capture request. Figures 11A through 1 IF depict views of the payment capture request and its component parts. In function block 1010, merchant computer system 130 creates a basic capture request 510. The basic capture request is a data area that includes all the information needed by payment gateway computer system 140 to tπgger a transfer of funds to the merchant operating merchant computer system 130.
Specifically, a capture request includes a capture request amount, a capture token, a date, summary information of the purchased items and a Merchant ID (MID) for the particular merchant. Figure 11A depicts basic authoπzation request 1110.
In function block 1020, merchant computer system 130 combines basic capture request 1110, a copy of its encryption public key certificate 1115 and a copy of its signature public key certificate 1120. Merchant computer system 130 calculates a digital signature 1125 for the combined contents of the combined block 1130 compπsmg basic capture request 1110, the encryption public key certificate 1115 and the signature public key certificate 1120, and appends it to the combination of the combined basic capture request 1110, the encryption public key certificate 1115 and the signature public key certificate 1120. The merchant computer system calculates digital signature 1125 by first calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic capture request 1110, the encryption public key certificate 1115 and the signature public key certificate 1120. The message digest is then encrypted usmg the merchant computer system's 130 digital signature pπvate key, thus forming a digital signature.
Figure 11B depicts the combined block 1130 formed by function block 1020 and containing basic capture request 1110, the encryption public key certificate 1115, the signature public key certificate 1120, and digital signature 1125. In function block 1030, merchant computer system 130 generates a random encryption key 1140, denoted as RK-3. Random encryption key RK-3 1140 is a symmetπc encryption key Figure 11C depicts random encryption key RK- 3 1140 In function block 1040, merchant computer system 130 encrypts combined block 1130 using random encryption key RK-3 1140 to form encrypted combmed block 1150. Figure 11D depicts encrypted combined block 1150. The encryption state of encrypted combined block 1150 is graphically shown by random key lock 1155, which indicates that encrypted combined block 1150 is encrypted using random key RK-3 1140. In function block 1050, merchant computer system 130 encrypts random encryption key RK-3 1140 using the public key of payment gateway system 140 to form encrypted random key 1160. Figure HE depicts encrypted random key 1160 The encryption state of encrypted random key 1160 is graphically shown by payment gateway public key lock 1165, which indicates that encrypted random key RK-3 1160 is encrypted using the payment gateway public key.
In function block 1060, merchant computer system 130 concatenates encrypted combmed block 1150, encrypted random key 1160, and the encrypted capture token 780 and encrypted random key RK-2 790 that were stored in function block 850 to form merchant capture request 915. Figure 11F depicts merchant capture request 915, compπsmg encrypted combined block 1150, encrypted random key 1160, encrypted capture token 780 and encrypted random key RK-2 790. In function block 1070, merchant computer system 130 transmits merchant capture request 915 to payment gateway system 140.
Payment Capture Request Processing
Figure 12 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment capture request and generating and transmitting a payment capture request response Function blocks 1210 through 1245 depict the steps of processing a payment capture request, while function blocks 1250 through 1285 depict the steps of generating and transmitting a payment capture request response. In function block 1210, payment gateway computer system 140 apphes its pπvate key to encrypted random key 1160 contained within received merchant capture request 915, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of random key RK-3 1140. In function block 1215, payment gateway computer system 140 applies random key RK-3 1140 to encrypted combined block 1150, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of combined block 1130. Combined block 1130 compπses basic capture request 1110, a copy of merchant computer system's 130 encryption public key certificate 1115 and a copy of merchant computer system's 130 signature public key certificate 1120, as well as merchant digital signature 1125. In function block 1220, payment gateway computer system 140 veπfies merchant computer system's 130 encryption public key certificate 1115 and merchant computer system's 130 signature public key certificate 1120 Payment gateway computer system 140 performs this veπfication by making a call to the certification authoπties associated with each certificate If verification of either certificate fails, payment gateway computer system 140 rejects the capture request.
In function block 1225, payment gateway computer system 140 validates merchant digital signature 1125. Payment gateway computer system 140 performs this validation by calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic capture request 1110, the encryption public key certificate 1115 and the signature public key certificate 1120. Payment gateway computer system 140 then decrypts digital signature 1125 to obtain a copy of the equivalent message digest calculated by merchant computer system 130 in function block 1020. If the two message digests are equal, the digital signature 1125 is validated. If validation fails, payment gateway computer system 140 rejects the capture request. In function block 1230, payment gateway computer system 140 applies its pπvate key to encrypted random key RK-2 790 contained within received merchant capture request 915, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of random key RK-2 775. In function block 1235, payment gateway computer system 140 applies random key RK-2 775 to encrypted capture token 780, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of capture token 770.
In function block 1240, payment gateway computer system 140 veπfies that a proper transaction is being transmitted between capture token 780 and capture request 1110. A capture token contains data that the gateway generates at the time of authoπzation When the authoπzation is approved, the encrypted capture token is given to the merchant for storage. At the time of capture, the merchant returns the capture token to the gatewav along with other information required for capture Upon receipt of the capture token, the gateway compares a message made of the capture request data and the capture token data and transmits this information over a traditional credit/ debit network. If an improperly formatted transaction is detected, payment gateway computer system 140 rejects the capture request. In function block 1245, payment gateway computer system 140 determines the financial institution for which capture is requested by inspection of basic capture request 1110 Payment gateway computer system 140 contacts the appropπate financial institution using a secure means, e.g, a direct-dial modem-to-modem connection, or a propπetary internal network that is not accessible to third parties, and using prior art means, instructs a computer at the financial institution to perform the requested funds transfer after settlement
Payment Capture Response Generation
Function blocks 1250 through 1285 depict the steps of generating and transmitting a payment capture request response Figures 13A through 13F depict views of the payment capture response and its component parts
In function block 1250, payment gateway computer system 140 creates a basic capture response 710 The basic capture request is a data area that includes all the information to indicate whether a capture request was granted or denied Figure 13A depicts basic authoπzation request 1310
In function block 1255, payment gateway computer system 140 combines basic capture response 1310, and a copy of its signature public key certificate 1320 Payment computer system 140 calculates a digital signature 1325 for the combined contents of the combmed block 1330 compnsmg basic capture response 1310 and the signature public key certificate 1320, and appends the signature to the combination of the combined basic authoπzation request 1310 and the signature public key certificate 1320 The payment gateway computer system calculates digital signature 1325 by first calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic capture response 1310 and signature public key certificate 720 The message digest is then encrypted using the merchant computer system's 140 digital signature pnvate key, thus forming a digital signature
Figure 13B depicts the combined block 1330 formed by function block 1255 and containing basic capture request 1310, the signature public key certificate 1320, and digital signature 1325 In function block 1260, payment gateway computer system 140 generates a symmetπc random encryption key 1340, denoted as RK-4 Figure 13C depicts random encryption key RK- 4 1340. In function block 1275, payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts combmed block 1330 using random encryption key RK-4 1340 to form encrypted combined block 1350. Figure 13D depicts encrypted combined block 1350 The encryption state of encrypted combined block 1350 is graphically shown by random key lock 1355, which indicates that encrypted combined block 1350 is encrypted using random key RK-4 1340. In function block 1275, payment gateway computer system 140 encrypts random encryption key RK-4 1340 usmg the public key of merchant computer system 130 to form encrypted random key RK-4 1360 Figure 13E depicts encrypted random key RK-4 1360. The encryption state of encrypted random key 1360 is graphically shown by merchant public key lock 1365, which indicates that encrypted random key 1360 is encrypted using the merchant public key. In function block 1280, payment gateway computer system 140 concatenates encrypted combined block 1350 and encrypted random key RK-4 1360 to form merchant capture response 925. Figure 13F depicts merchant capture response 925 compπsmg encrypted combined block 1350 and encrypted random key RK-4 1360 In function block 1285, payment gateway computer system 140 transmits merchant capture response 925 to merchant system 130.
Payment Capture Response Processing Figure 14 depicts the detailed steps of processing a payment capture response. In function block 1410, merchant computer system 130 applies its pπvate key to encrypted random key RK-4 1360 contained within received merchant capture response 925, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of random key RK-4 1340. In function block 1420, merchant computer system 130 applies random key RK-4 1340 to encrypted combined block 1350, thereby decrypting it and obtaining a cleartext version of combined block 1330 Combmed block 1330 compπses basic capture response 1310, a copy of payment gateway computer system's 140 signature public key certificate 1320, as well as payment gateway digital signature 1325. In function block 1430, merchant computer system 130 veπfies payment gateway computer system's 140 signature public key certificate 1320. Merchant computer system 130 performs this verification by making a call to the certification authoπty associated with the certificate. If veπfication of the certificate fails, merchant computer system 130 concludes that the capture response is counterfeit and raises an error condition.
In function block 1440, merchant computer system 130 validates payment gateway digital signature 1325. Merchant computer system 130 performs this validation by calculating a message digest over the contents of the combined basic authoπzation request 1310 and the signature public key certificate 1320. Merchant computer system 130 then decrypts digital signature 1325 to obtain a copy of the equivalent message digest calculated by payment gateway computer system 140 in function block 1255. If the two message digests are equal, the digital signature 1325 is validated. If validation fails, merchant computer system 130 concludes that the authorization response is counterfeit and raises an error condition. In function block 1450, merchant computer system 130 stores capture response for later use in by legacy system accounting programs, e.g. to perform reconciliation between the merchant operating merchant computer system 130 and the financial institution from whom payment was requested, thereby completing the transaction. The system of the present invention permits immediate deployment of a secure payment technology architecture such as the SET architecture without first establishing a public-key encryption infrastructure for use by consumers. It thereby permits immediate use of SET-compliant transaction processing without the need for consumers to migrate to SET-compliant application software.
VIRTUAL POINT OF SALE (VPOS) DETAILS
A Virtual Point of Sale (VPOS) Terminal Cartridge is described in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The VPOS Terminal Cartridge provides payment functionality similar to what a VeriFone PoS terminal ("gray box") provides for a merchant today, allowing a merchant to process payments securely using the Internet. It provides full payment functionality for a variety of payment instruments.
Payment Functionality
Figure 15A illustrates a payment processing flow in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The payment functionality provided by the VPOS terminal is divided into two main categories: "Merchant-Initiated" 1510 and "Consumer-Initiated" 1500. Some payment transactions require communication with the acquirer bank through the Gateway 1530. The normal flow of a transaction is via the VPOS Cartridge API 1512 to the VPOS C++ API 1514 into the payment protocol layer 1516 which is responsible for converting into the appropriate format for transmission to the Gateway for additional processing and forwarding to existing host payment authorization systems. Host legacy format refers to an existing authorization system for credit card approval currently utilized with the VeriFone Point of Sale (POS) gray terminals. The output from the payment protocol layer 1516 is transmitted to the authorization processing center via the gateway 1530. These transactions are referred to as "Online Transactions" or "Host Payments." The transactions that can be done locally by the merchant without having to communicate with the acquirer bank are referred to as "Local Functions and Transactions." To support different types of payment instruments, the VPOS Terminal payment functionality is categorized as set forth below. • Host Payment Functionality: These transactions require communication with the final host, either immediately or at a later stage. For example, an Online Authorization-Only transaction, when initiated, communicates with the host immediately. However, an Off-line Authorization-Only transaction is locally authorized by the VPOS terminal without having to communicate with the host, but at a later stage this off-line authorization transaction is sent to the host. Within the Host Payment Functionality some transactions have an associated Payment Instrument, while others do not. These two kinds of transactions are:
• Host Financial Payment Functionality: These transactions have a Payment Instrument (Credit Card, Debit Card, E-Cash, E-Check, etc.) associated with them. For example, the "Return" transaction, which is initiated upon returning a merchandise to the merchant. • Host Administrative Payment Functionality: These transactions do not require a payment instrument, and provide either administrative or inquiry functionality. Examples of these transactions are "Reconcile" or the "Batch Close."
• Local Functions and Transactions: These transactions do not require communication with the host at any stage, and provide essential VPOS terminal administrative functionality. An example of this is the VPOS terminal configuration function, which is required to set up the
VPOS terminal. Another example is the "VPOS Batch Review" function, which is required to review the different transactions in the VPOS Batch or the Transaction Log.
Payment Instruments
A preferred embodiment of a VPOS terminal supports various Payment Instruments. A consumer chooses a payment based on personal preferences. Some of the Payment Instruments supported include:
• Credit Cards
• Debit Cards
• Electronic Cash • Electronic Checks
• Micro-Payments (electronic coin)
• Smart Cards LOCAL FUNCTIONS & TRANSACTIONS accum review /VPOSt/mi/accum/revi not allowed merchant ew/ login/ password batch review /VPOSt/mi/batch/revie not allowed merchant w/ login / password cdt review /VPOSt/mι/cdt/revιew/ not allowed merchant login / password cdt update /VPOSt/mi/cdt/update allowed merchant
/ login / password cpt review /VPOSt/mι/cpt/revιew not allowed merchant login/ password cpt update /VPOSt/mi/cpt/update allowed merchant
/ login / password clear accum /VPOSt/accum/clear/ allowed merchant login/ password clear batch /VPOSt/ mi/ batch/ clear allowed merchant
/ login/ password hdt review /VPOSt/mι/hdt/revιew not allowed merchant
/ login/ password hdt update /VPOSt/mi/hdt/update allowed merchant
/ login/ password lock VPOS /VPOSt/mi/lock/ allowed merchant login/ password query txn /VPOSt/ci/querytxn/ not allowed no access control query txn /VPOSt/ mi/ querytxn/ not allowed merchant login/ password tct review /VPOSt/mi/tct/review/ not allowed merchant login/ password tct update /VPOSt/ mi/ tct/ update allowed merchant
/ login / password unlock VPOS /VPOSt/ mi/ unlock/ allowed merchant login /password
URL Descriptions
This section describes the GET and POST arguments that are associated with each transaction URL. It also describes the results from the GET and POST methods. For URLs that produce any kind of results, the following fields are present in the HTML document that is returned by the VPOS Terminal Cartridge:
txnDate Date of the transaction (mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy) txnTime Time of the transaction (hh:mm:ss GMT or hh:mm:ss local time) merchantld Merchant ID of the merchant using the VPOS terminal terminalld VPOS Terminal Id txnNum Transaction number of the given transaction txnType Type of transaction
For URLs that deal with financial transactions, the following fields are present in the HTML document that is returned by the VPOS terminal cartridge:
txnAmount Transaction amount that is being authorized, forced posted, voided, etc. poNumber Purchase order number authldentNu Authorization ID number for the transaction m retRefNum Retrieval reference number for the given transaction pilnfo Payment instrument information. This varies for different payment instruments. For example, in the case of credit cards, the credit card number (piAcctNumber) and expiration date (piExpDate) are returned. Accumulate Review
URL Functionality This is a local information inquiry function that retπeves the local (merchant's) transaction totals (accumulators) GET Arguments: None GET Results: Retπeves the transaction totals for the merchant. Currently, the total is returned as an HTML document The transaction totals currently returned are:
creditAmt Total Credit Amount since the last settlement logged in the
VPOS terminal creditCnt Total Credit Count since the last settlement logged in the
VPOS terminal debitAmt Total Debit Amount since the last settlement logged in the
VPOS terminal debitCnt Total Debit Count since the last settlement logged in the
VPOS terminal
Note* Accum Review is a local function, as opposed to Balance Inquiry which is done over the Internet with the host
Adjust
URL Functionality Corrects the amount of a previously completed transaction GET Arguments- None
GET Results Because the Adjust transaction modifies data on the merchant server, the POST method should be used Using the GET method returns an HTML form that uses the POST method to perform the transaction. POST Arguments:
pvsTxnNum Previous transaction number txnAdjustedAmou The adjusted transaction amount Note that the oπginal nt transaction amount is easily retπevable from the previous transaction number POST Results: On success, pvsTxnNum and txnAdjustedAmount are presented in the HTML document, in addition to the transaction fields described above
Auth Capture URL Functionality: This transaction is a combination of Auth Only (Authoπzation without capture) and Forced Post transactions. GET Arguments: None
GET Results: Because the Auth Capture transaction modifies data on the merchant server side, the POST method should be used. Using the GET method returns an HTML form that uses the POST method to perform the transaction POST Arguments:
piAcctNumber Payment Instrument account number, e g., Visa credit card number piExpDate Expiration date txnAmt Transaction amount
POST Results: On success, an HTML document that contains the transaction fields described above is returned. On failure, an HTML document that contains the reason for the failure of the transaction is returned. The transaction is logged into a VPOS Terminal transaction log for both instances.
Auth Only
URL Functionality: Validates the cardholder's account number for a Sale that is performed at a later stage. The transaction does not confirm the sale to the host, and there is no host data capture. The VPOS captures this transaction record and later forwards it to confirm the sale in the Forced Post transaction request.
GET Arguments: None.
GET Results: Because the Auth Only transaction modifies data on the merchant server side, the POST method should be used. Using the GET method returns an HTML form that uses the
POST method to perform the transaction.
POST Arguments: piAcctNumber Payment Instrument account number, e.g., Visa credit card number piExpDate Expiration date txnAmt Transaction amount
POST Results: On success, an HTML document that contains the transaction fields is returned. On failure, an HTML document that contains the reason for the failure of the transaction is returned. The transaction is logged into VPOS Terminal transaction log for both instances.
NOTE: The /VPOSt/ci/authonly/ URL should be used for customer- initiated transactions.
/VPOSt/mi/authonly/ should be used for merchant-initiated transactions.
Balance Inquiry URL Functionality: Performs an on-line inquiry or the merchant's balance. GET Arguments: None GET Results:
mrchtBlnceA Merchant balance amount for a given merchant. The mt balance amount at any given time is the difference between the credit and debit amount since the last settlement between the merchant and the acquirer.
Batch Review
URL Functionality: Retrieves all records from the transaction log or the batch. GET Arguments: None
GET Results: The GET method retrieves the transactions that have been batched in the VPOS terminal for future reconciliation. The batch can be cleared from the VPOS terminal after a manual reconciliation between the acquirer and the VPOS. The batch data is retrieved as a set of records and is formatted as a table in the HTML document. The following fields are present in a typical record: nTransType Transaction type nPurchOrderNo Purchase order number szAcctNum Customer's payment instrument account number szExpDate Customer's payment instrument expiration date szTransAmt Transaction amount szTransDate Transaction date szTransTime Transaction time szRetnevalRefNu Transaction's retπeval reference number m szAuthld Authoπzation ID for the transaction szOngAmt Original transaction amount szBatchNum Batch number for the given transaction nCurrencyType Currency in which the transaction was done
InTransNum Transaction number
CDT Review
URL Functionality Displays the VPOS terminal configuration data corresponding to the Card
Definition Table (CDT).
GET Arguments: None
GET Results: The GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values The form can be modified and posted using the /VPOSt/mi/cdt/update/
URL to update the card definition table. Not all fields in the card definition table are editable.
The following fields are returned in a form to the user:
nHostlndex Index into the Host Definition Table or the acquirer that maps to this card issuer. szPANLo Low end of the PAN (Pπmary Account Number) range szPANHi High end of the PAN range nMaxPANDigit Maximum number of digits m the PAN for this acquirer.
NMinPANDigit Minimum number of dits in the PAN for the acquirer szCardLabel Card Issuer's name
Transactions Specifies if a particular transaction is allowed for a given Available bit card range, vector
(Some of these fields are not editable by a merchant, and still need to be determined.)
CDT Update URL Functionality: Updates the VPOS terminal configuration data corresponding to the Card Definition Table (CDT). GET Arguments: None
GET Results: The GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values. The form can be filled out and posted using the /VPOSt/mi/cdt/update URL to update the card definition table.
POST Arguments: (Editable CDT fields need to be decided.)
POST Results: (Depends on editable CDT fields, and therefore needs to be decided.)
Clear Accumulator URL Functionality: Zeroes out the accumulator totals cuπently resident in the VPOS terminal.
GET Arguments: None.
GET Results: Presents a form that uses the POST method to zero the accumulators.
POST Arguments: None.
POST Results: Zeroes the accumulators/ transaction totals in the VPOS terminal.
Clear Batch
URL Functionality: Zeroes out the transaction logs currently batched in the VPOS terminal. GET Arguments: None.
GET Results: Presents a form that uses the POST method to clear the batch. POST Arguments: None.
POST Results: Zeroes the transactions that comprise the batch in the VPOS terminal. Forced Post
URL Functionality Confirms to the host the completion of a sale, and requests for data capture of the transaction. This is used as a follow-up transaction after doing an Authoπzation (Online or Off-line) transaction. GET Arguments: None.
GET Results: Returns the HTML form for performing the Forced Post transaction. POST Arguments:
pvsTxnNum the previous transaction number from an auth only transaction
POST Results- On success, pvsTxnNum is presented in the HTML document On failure, an HTML document is returned that contains the reason for the failure of the transaction.
HDT Review
URL Functionality: Displays the VPOS terminal configuration data coπespondmg to the Host Definition Table (HDT). GET Arguments: None
GET Results: The GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values. The form can be modified and posted using the /VPOSt/mi/hdt/update URL to update the hosts definition table Not all fields in the host definition table are editable. The following fields are returned in a form to the user:
szTermld Terminal ID for this VPOS terminal szMerchld Merchant ID for this VPOS terminal szCurrBatchNu Current batch number existing on the VPOS m szTransNum Reference number for the next transaction m the VPOS transaction log/ batch This is generated by VPOS and is not editable by the merchant. szTPDU Transport Protocol Data Unit. Required for building the ISO 8583 packet. InSTAN System trace number; message number of the next transaction to be transmitted to this acquirer. szNII Network International Number. Required for building the
ISO 8583 packet. szHostName Name for identifying the host. nHostType Host type nNumAdv Number of off-line transactions that can be piggy-backed at the end of an on-line transaction. Data Capture Specifies for which transactions data capture is
Required Bit required, vector:
(Some of these fields are not editable by a merchant and need to be determined.)
HDT Update
URL Functionality: Updates the VPOS terminal configuration data corresponding to the Host
Definition Table (HDT).
GET Arguments: None
GET Results: The GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values. The form can be filled out and posted to the merchant server using the
/VPOSt/mi/hdt/update URL to update the host definition table
Unlock VPOS
URL Functionality: Local function that starts the VPOS at the start of the day.
GET Arguments: None.
GET Results: Returns an HTML form that uses the POST method to perform this transaction.
POST Arguments: None.
POST Results: Resets a Boolean flag on the merchant server that enables transactions to be accepted by the VPOS terminal. Offline Auth
URL Functionality- This transaction is same as the "Authorization Only" transaction, except that the transaction is locally captured by the VPOS terminal without having to communicate with the host. A Forced Post operation is done as a follow-up operation of this transaction. GET Arguments: None.
GET Results: Because the Offline Auth transaction modifies data on the merchant server side, the POST method should be used. Using the GET method returns an HTML form for usmg the POST method to perform the transaction. POST Arguments: piAcctNumber Payment Instrument account number, e.g., Visa credit card number piExpDate Expiration date txnAmt Transaction amount
POST Results. On success, an HTML document that contains the transaction fields descπbed in Section 4. 1 is returned. On failure, an HTML document that contains the reason for the failure of the transaction is returned. The transaction is logged into VPOS terminal transaction log for both instances.
Parameter Download
URL Functionality Downloads the VPOS configuration information from the host and sets up the VPOS in the event of the configuration data being changed. GET Arguments None
GET Results- Retπeves an HTML form that uses the POST method for the parameter download transaction.
POST Arguments: None.
POST Results Downloads the following parameters from the host and uploads them into the
VPOS terminal configuration table.
• card/ issuer definition table (CDT) • host/ acquirer definition table (HDT)
• communications parameter table (CPT)
• terminal configuration table (TCT) The vanous configuration parameters can be reviewed and modified using the URLs for the desired functionality.
Pre Auth
URL Functionality: Used in lodging and hotel establishments to pre-authorize a charge that is completed some time in future.
GET Arguments: None
GET Results: Retπeves the HTML form for posting the pre-authorizaton transacuon.
POST Arguments: piAcctNumber Payment Instrument account number, e.g., Visa credit card number piExpDate Expiration date
Pre Auth Comp URL Functionality: Completes a pre-authoπzation transaction. GET Arguments: None
GET Results: Retπeves the HTML form for posting the pre-authoπzation completion transaction. POST Arguments:
pvsTxnNum Previous transaction number from an auth only transaction
POST Results: On success, pvsTxnNum is presented in the HTML document. On failure, an HTML document is returned that contains the reason for the failure of the transaction.
Reconcile
URL Functionality: This transaction is done at the end of the day to confirm to the host to start the settlement process for the transactions captured by the host for that particular VPOS batch.
GET Arguments: None GET Results: Retrieves the HTML form for posting the Reconcile transaction. POST Arguments: None.
POST Results: On success, the reconcile function prints any discrepancies in the merchant's batch of transactions and totals vis-a-vis the host's batch of transactions in totals. The output format is a combination of the output of the Batch Review and Accum Review transactions.
Return URL Functionality: Credits the return amount electronically to the consumer's account when previously purchased merchandise is returned. The VPOS terminal captures the transaction record for this transaction. GET Arguments: None
GET Results: Retrieves the HTML form for posting the Return transaction. POST Arguments:
prevTxnNum Reference to the previous transaction number
The previous transaction has access to the following fields:
txnAmount Transaction amount piAccountNu Payment instrument account number m piExpDate Payment instrument expiration date
POST Results: On success, pvsTxnNum is presented in the HTML document, in addition to
Test Host
URL Functionality: Checks the presence of the host and also the integrity of the link from the VPOS to the host. GET Arguments: None. GET Results: On success, an HTML document is returned that reports success in connecting to the host. On failure, an HTML document is returned that reports the error encountered in testing the host.
Lock VPOS
URL Functionality: This local function locks or stops the VPOS terminal from accepting any transactions. GET Arguments: None.
GET Results: Returns an HTML form that posts the locking of the VPOS terminal. POST Arguments: None.
POST Results: On success, an HTML document is returned that contains the status that VPOS terminal was successfully. On failure, an HTML document is returned that reports the cause of failure of the operation, e.g. , access denied, the VPOS terminal is already locked or is presently processing a transaction, etc.
Void
URL Functionality: Cancels a previously completed draft capture transaction. GET Arguments: None.
GET Results: Retπeves an HTML form for posting the Void transaction. POST Arguments:
pvsTxnNum Transaction number from a previous Auth Only transaction.
Host Logon
URL Functionality: Administrative transaction used to sign-on the VPOS with the host at the start of the day, and also to download encryption keys for debit transactions. GET Arguments: None
GET Results: Retπeves an HTML form for posting the Host Logon transaction. POST Arguments: None. POST Results' Currently, debit card based transactions are not supported. The result is an HTML document indicating the success or failure of the host logon operation.
CPT Review
URL Functionality Returns the VPOS terminal configuration data corresponding to the Communications Parameter Table (CPT) GET Arguments: None
GET Results: The GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values corresponding to the VPOS terminal's communication parameters. The form can be filled out and posted to the merchant server using the /VPOSt/mi/cpt/update URL to update the communications parameter table The following fields are returned in a form to the user
szAcqPπAddress Pπmary Host address szAcqSecAddress Secondary Host address szActTerAddress Tertiary Host address nRespTimeOut Time-out value ( seconds) before which the VPOS should receive a response from the host
CPT Update URL Functionality Updates the VPOS terminal configuration data corresponding to the
Communications Parameter Table (CPT)
GET Arguments. None
GET Results The GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values. The form can be modified and posted to update the communication parameter table.
POST Arguments:
szAcqPπAddress Pnmary Host address szAcqSecAddress Secondary Host address szActTerAddress Tertiary Host address nRespTimeOut Time-out value (m seconds) before which the VPOS should receive a response from the host
POST Results: On success, the HTML document returned by the VPOS contains the values set by the merchant. On failure, the HTML document contains the reason for the failure of the invocation of the URL.
TCT Review
URL Functionality: Returns the VPOS terminal configuration data corresponding to the
Terminal Configuration Table (TCT)
GET Arguments: None.
GET Results: The GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values. The form can be filled out and posted usmg the /VPOSt/mi/tct/update
URL to update the terminal configuration table The following fields are returned in a form to the user:
szMerchNarne Merchant name szSupervisorPwd Supervisor password fVPOSLock 1= VPOS locked, 0 = VPOS unlocked szAuthOnlyPwd Password for initiating auth-only transaction szAuthCaptPwd Password for initiating auth with capture transaction szAdjustPwd Password for adjust transaction szRefundPwd Password for refund transaction szForcedPostPwd Password for forced post transaction szOffiineAuthPwd Password for offline auth transaction szVoidPwd Password for void transaction szPreAuthPwd Password for pre-authoπzation transaction szPreAuthCompP Password for pre-authoπzation completion wd
TCT Update
URL Functionality- Updates the VPOS terminal configuration data corresponding to the Terminal Configuration Table (TCT). GET Arguments- None
GET Results: The GET method returns a default HTML form that contains the current configuration values. The form can be filled out and posted using the /VPOSt/mi/tct/update
URL to update the terminal configuration table.
POST Arguments: All arguments in TCT Review functionality are the returned values from the
/VPOSt/mi/tct/update the URL
szMerchName Merchant name szSupervisorPwd Supervisor password fVPOSLock 1= VPOS locked, 0 = VPOS unlocked szAuthOnlyPwd Password for initiating auth-only transaction szAuthCaptPwd Password for initiating auth with capture transaction szAdjustPwd Password for adjust transaction szRefundPwd Password for refund transaction szForcedPostPwd Password for forced post transaction szOfflineAuthPwd Password for offline auth transaction szVoidPwd Password for void transaction szPreAuthPwd Password for pre-authonzation transaction szPreAuthCompP Password for pre-authoπzation completion wd
POST Results- On success, the POST modifies values of the terminal configuration table parameters. On failure, the HTML document contains the reason for the failure of the transaction
Query Transactions
URL Functionality. Permits the merchant and customer to query a given transaction corresponding to a transaction number GET Arguments: txnNum Transaction number
GET Results For a given transaction, the URL returns an HTML document. If a transaction refers to an older transaction, the transaction's entire history is made available URL results
Depending upon the method (GET/POST) as well as the success or failure of the HTTP request, different documents are returned to the user. The VPOS terminal provides a framework whereby different documents are returned based upon a number of preferences. Currently the language and content-type are supported as preferences
A simple framework is proposed here. Each of the transaction has a set of documents associated with it: form for the payment transaction, GET success, GET failure, POST success, and POST failure.
In the directory structure defined below, documents are stored corresponding to the preferences. The top level of the directory structure is the content-type, the next level is language (for NLS support) For example, to create text/ html content in US English & French, the directory structure given below would contain the HTML documents for each of the transactions. The VPOS terminal cartπdge has a configuration file that allows the user to specify the content-type as well as the language to be used for a cartπdge. The first release of the VPOS terminal cartπdge supports one content-type and language for each server.
Data Structures & Functions
Functions A bπef descπption of the Virtual Point of Sale Terminal cartπdge functions are provided below. VPOSTInιt(), VPOSTExecQ and VPOSTShut() are the entry points required for each cartπdge m accordance with a preferred embodiment The other functions implement some of the key VPOST cartπdge functionality. A source listing of the VPOS code is provided below to further accentuate the detailed disclosure of a preferred embodiment.
VPOSTInitJ)
/* VPOST cartπdge Initialization here */
WRBReturnCode
VPOSTInιt( void "chentCtx ){ VPOSTCtx *VPOSTCxp ; /* Allocate memory for the client context */ if (!(VPOSTCxp = (VPOSTCtx *)malloc(sizeof(VPOSTCtx)))) return WRB_ERROR ; *clientCtx = (void *)VPOSTCxp ; return (WRB_DONE) ;)
VPOSTShut()
WRBReturnCode
VPOSTShutf void *WRBCtx, void *clientCtx ){
*WRBCtx ; /* not used */ assert( clientCtx ) ; / * Free the client context allocated in VPOSTInit() routine
free( clientCtx ) ;
return (WRB_DONE) ;)
VPOSTExec()
/* The dπver cartridge routine */ WRBReturnCode
VPOSTExec( void *WRBCtx, void *clientCtx )
{
VPOSTCtx *VPOSTCxp ; char *uri ; char *txnMethod ; /* HTTP method */ enum eVPOSTTxn *txn ; /* VPOST transaction */ char *txnOutFile ; / * Output file from transaction */ char **txnEnv ; /* environment variables values for transaction */ char *txnContent ; /* transaction's POST data content */ WRBEntry 'WRBEntries ; int numEntries;
VPOSTCxp = (VPOSTCtx *) clientCtx ;
/* WRBGetURL gets the URL for the current request */ if (I(uri = WRBGetURL( WRBCtx ))) return (WRB_ERROR) , /* WRBGetContentQ gets the QueryStπng/ POST data content */ if (!(txnContent = WRBGetContent( WRBCtx ))) ( return WRB_ERROR ,
/* WRBGetParserContent() gets the parsed content */ if (WRB_ERROR == WRBGEtParsedContent( WRBCtx, δδWRBEntπes, &numEntπes)) ( return WRB_ERROR ,
/* WRBGetEnvironmentO gets the HTTP Server Environment */ if (!(txnEnv = WRBGetEnvιronment( WRBCtx ))) { return WRB_ERROR ,
)
/* VPOSTGetMethod() gets the method for the current request */ if (!(method = VPOSTGetMethod( txnEnv )))( return (WRB_ERROR) , }
/* VPOSTGetTxnQ gets the VPOST transaction for the request */ txn = VPOSTGetTxn( uπ ), if (eTxnError == txn) { return (WRB_ERROR) ,
/* VPOSTExecuteTransactionO executes the VPOST transaction */ txnOutFile = VPOSTExecuteTransactιon( WRBCtx, txn, txnMethod, txnEnv, txnContent ) , if (I(txnOutFιle)) { return (WRB_ERROR) ,
>
/* Wπte out the file */ VPOSTWriteFile( txnOutFile return (WRB_DONE) ;
VPOSTGetTxn() enum eVPOSTTxn VPOSTGetTxn( char *uri )
{
* The function scans the uri and extracts the string
* corresponding to the transaction and returns it to the
* caller.
V
Transaction Log format This section describes the format of a record for the transaction log for the VPOST cartridge.
Field Name Field Description
nTransType Transaction Type nPurchOrderNo Purchase Order Number szAcctNum Payment Instrument Account number szExpDate Payment instrument expiration date szTransAmt Transaction amount szTransDate Date of transaction (configurable to be mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy) szTransTime Time of transaction (configurable to be GMT or local time) szRetrievalRef um Retrieval reference number szAuthld Authorization ID szOrigAmt Original transaction amount szBatchNum Batch number to which this particular transaction belongs in the
VPOST batch nCurrencyType Currency lnTransNum Transaction number
In the block diagram shown in Figure 15B, the VPOS provides an interface for transactions which are initiated both by the consumer and the merchant. The merchant initiates a transaction from a Graphical User Interface (GUI) 1550 and all the transactions that are initiated by the consumer are routed by the Merchant WEB Server 1545.
The Authorization/ Data Capture Module 1560 processes the requests originated by the merchant or the consumer and routes them to the. Protocol Module 1565. The Protocol Module is responsible for building the payment protocol request packet (e.g., an SSL-encapsulated ISO 8583 packet) 1570 before sending the request to the Gateway 1579. Then, the Gateway 1579 awaits a response from the Protocol Module 1565, and upon receiving the response, the Gateway 1579 parses the data and provides unwrapped data to the Authorization / Data- Capture Module 1560. The Authorization/ Data-Capture Module 1560 analyzes the response and updates the Transaction Log 1580. The Transaction Log 1580 contains information concerning any successfully completed transactions and the accumulators or the transaction totals. The VPOS terminal creates and maintains the Transaction Log 1580, and the VPOS Configuration Data 1585 contains information which is used to configure the behavior of the VPOS. The entire VPOS functionality is thread-safe and hence using the VPOS in a multithreaded environment does not require any additional interfacing requirements.
Figures 36-48 are VPOS screen displays in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
Payment Functionality
As discussed above, the different Payment Functionality provided by the VPOS terminal can be divided into two main categories as "Merchant Initiated" and "Consumer Initiated." Some of these transactions require communication with the Gateway and these transactions are referred to as "Online Transactions." The transactions which can be done locally to the merchant without having to communicate are referred to as "Local Functions/Transactions." In order to provide support for many different types of Payment Instruments, the VPOS Payment Functionality have been categorized. Host payment functionality and transactions require communication with the host either immediately or at a later stage. Each of the host financial payment transactions come to this category and require a Payment Instrument. These transactions can be initiated with different types of Payment Instruments which the VPOS terminal supports.
An authorization without capture transaction is used to validate the card holder's account number for a sale that needs to be performed at a later stage. The transaction does not confirm a sale's completion to the host, and there is no host data capture in this event. The VPOS captures this transaction record and later forwards it to the host to confirm the sale in a forced post transaction request. An authorization without capture transaction can be initiated both by the consumer and the merchant.
A forced post transaction confirms to a host computer that a completion of a sale has been accomplished and requests data capture of the transaction. The forced post transaction is used as a follow-up transaction after doing an authorization (Online or Off-line) transaction. The transaction can be initiated only by the merchant.
The authorization with post transaction is a combination of authorization without capture and forced post transactions. This transaction can be initiated both by the consumer and the merchant.
The offline post transaction is identical to the "authorization without capture" transaction, except that the transaction is locally captured by the VPOS without initiating communication with a host. A forced post operation is done as a follow-up operation of this transaction. This transaction can be initiated by both the consumer and the merchant.
The return transaction is used to credit the return amount electronically to the consumer's account when a purchased merchandise is returned. The VPOS captures the return transaction record when the merchandise is returned, and this transaction can be initiated only by the merchant.
The void transaction cancels a previously completed draft capture transaction. The VPOS GUI provides an interface for retrieving a transaction record required to be voided from the batch and passes it to the Authorization/ Data-Capture module after confirmation. The batch record is updated to reflect the voided transaction after getting an approval from the gateway. This transaction can be initiated only by the merchant.
The pre-authorization transaction is identical to the authorization without capture transaction, but the consumers' "open-to-buy" amount is reduced by the pre-authorization amount. An example of this type of transaction is the "check-in" transaction in a hotel environment. A check-in transaction sends a pre-authorization request to the host, so that an amount required for the customers' stay in the hotel is reserved. The pre-authorization transaction is followed by a pre-authorization complete transaction. This transaction can be initiated both by the consumer and the merchant.
The pre-authorization complete transaction is done as a follow-up to the pre-authorization transaction. This transaction informs the host of the actual transaction amount. The pre- authoπzation complete transaction amount could be more or less than the pre-authorization amount. An example is the "check-out" transaction in a hotel environment. The check-out amount can be less than or more than the check-in amount. This transaction can only be initiated by a merchant.
The adjust transaction is initiated to make a correction to the amount of a previously completed transaction. The adjust transaction can be initiated only by the merchant. The host administrative transactions do not require any payment instrument. The balance inquiry transaction is used for on-line inquiry into the balance of the merchant's account. The batch data or the configuration data is not affected by this transaction.
The reconciliation or close transaction is processed at the end of the day to start the settlement process for the transactions captured by the host for that particular VPOS.
The host log-on transaction is an administrative transaction which is used to synchronize the VPOS with the host at the start of the day and also initiate a fresh batch at the VPOS terminal.
The parameters download transaction is used to download the VPOS configuration information from the host and set-up the VPOS in the event of any change in the configuration data. A test transaction is used to detect the presence of a host and the status of a link from the VPOS to the host.
Local transactions or functions are initiated by a merchant and do not require communication with the gateway. These transactions can only be initiated by a merchant. The totals or accumulators review is a local information inquiry function and is used to retrieve the local (merchant's) totals. The detail transaction or the batch review function is used to retrieve all the records from the transaction log or the batch. The clear batch function is used to start a fresh batch. This transaction is utilized to electronically reconcile the VPOS with the host and to manually reconcile the VPOS with the host. After completing the manual reconciliation processing, the merchant can initiate this transaction to start a fresh batch.
The clear accumulator function is similar to the clear batch functionality and resets all VPOS terminal accumulators to zero. This function is required when the merchant is not able to reconcile the VPOS with the host electronically.
The VPOS unlock or start transaction is a local function used to start the VPOS at the start of the day. The VPOS lock or stop function is used to Lock or stop the VPOS from accepting any transactions. The VPOS configuration setup function is used to setup the VPOS configuration data. The VPOS configuration data is divided into different tables, for example, the Card/Issuer Definition Table (CDT), the Host/acquirer Definition Table (HDT), the Communications Parameters Table (CPT) and the Terminal Configuration Table (TCT). The following sections explain each of these configuration tables in detail.
Payment Instruments
As discussed above, the VPOS terminal supports different Payment Instruments and each of the Payment Functions described above can be initiated by these different Payment Instruments. The consumer making a purchase from a merchant provides a choice of payment methods depending upon their personal preference. The Payment Instrument Class Hierarchy which is used by the different VPOS terminal Payment Functions is described below. Message Sequence Diagram
Figure 17 shows a typical message flow between the consumer, merchant, VPOS terminal and the Gateway. This section describes the different classes listed in the previous section, their data and members, and defines the type of the transaction that is to be performed. Processing commences at 1700 when a merchant server receives a sales order and passes it via the VPOS Graphical User Interfece (GUI) 1710 to an authorizer 1720 for approval and subsequent protocol processing 1730 and ultimately transmission via the gateway 1740 to the network.
Class Name : CVPCLTransaction
Data :
Transaction Type (int)
Transaction Date and Time (CPCLDateTime)
Card Definition Table (CVPCL_CDT) Host Definition Table (CVPCL_HDT)
Communications Parameters Table (CVPCL_CPT)
Terminal Configuration Parameters (CVPCL TCT)
Batch Record (CVPCLBatch)
Accumulator Record (CVPCLAccum) Member Functions :
CVPCLTransaction() ;
EStatus GetTransType();
EStatus GetTransDateTime(CPCLDateTime&) ;
EStatus SetTransType(const int); virtual EStatus InitializeTrans(TVPOSParamsBlk *) = 0; virtual EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *) = 0; virtual EStatus ShutDown() = 0;
Host Transaction Class Definitions This section contains all the host transaction class definitions.
Host Transaction Class (CVPCLHostTrans) This is an abstract base class derived from the CVPCLTransaction class and is used for deriving transaction classes which need to communicate with the host either immediately or at a later stage.
Class Name :
CVPCLHostTrans Data :
Member Functions : CVPCLHostTrans();
Financial Transaction Class (CVPCLFinancialTrans)
This is an abstract base class derived from the CVPCLHostTrans. This class is used to derive transaction classes which require a payment instrument (e.g., a Credit Card) associated with them to perform the transaction.
Class Name :
CVPCLFinancialTrans Data : Transaction Amount (CVPCLAmt)
Purchase Order Number (charf]])
Transaction Number (charf])
Authorization Identification Number (charf])
Retrieval Reference Number (charf]) Batch (CVPCLBatch)
Accumulators (CVPCLAccumulators) Member Functions :
C VPCLFinancialTransO ; EStatus GetTransAmt(CVPCLAmt&); EStatus GetPurchOrderNum(char *);
EStatus GetTransRefNum(char *);
EStatus GetRetRefNum(char *);
EStatus GetAuthId(char *); EStatus GetCurrencyType(EPCLCurrency *); EStatus SetPurchOrderNum(const char *); EStatus SetTransRefNum(const char *); EStatus SetRetRefNum(const char *); EStatus SetAuthId(const char *); EStatus SetCurrencyType (const char *)
Financial Credit Card Transaction Class (CVPCLFinCCTrans) This is the base abstract class for the financial host transaction which require a Credit Card payment instrument. This class is derived from the CVPCLFinancialTrans.
Class Name :
CVPCLFinCCTrans Data :
Credit Card Payment Instrument (CPCLCreditCard)
Member Functions :
CVPCLFinCCTransO;
Credit Card Authorization Only Transaction Class (CVPCL_CCAuthOnly)
This is the class derived from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and implements the Authorization Only Transaction.
Class Name :
CVPCL_CCAuthOnly Data :
Member Functions :
CVPCL_CCAuthOnly() ;
EStatus InitializeTrans(TVPOSParamsBlk *);
EStatus ExecuteTrans(TVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTrans(); EStatus FormBatchRec(),
Credit Card Authorization with Capture Transaction Class (CVPCL_CCAuthCapt) This is the class deπved from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and implements the Authorization with Data Capture Transaction.
Class Name :
CVPCL_CCAuthCapt Data :
Member Functions :
CVPCL_CCAuthCapt(),
EStatus InιtιalιzeTrans(TVPOSParamsBlk *), EStatus ExecuteTrans(TVPOSResuitsBlk *), EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
EStatus FormBatchRecO,
Credit Card Return Transaction Class (CVPCL_CCReturn)
This is the class deπved from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and implements the Return Transaction.
Class Name :
CVPCL_CCReturn Data : Member Functions :
CVPCL_CCReturn() ;
EStatus InιtιalιzeTrans(TVPOSParamsBlk *), EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ; EStatus FormBatchRec();
Credit Card Pre-Authorization Transaction Class (CVPCL_CCPreAuth) This is the class derived from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and implements the Pre- Authorization Transaction.
Class Name : CVPCL_CCPreAuth
Data : Member Functions :
CVPCL_CCPreAuth();
EStatus InitializeTrans(TVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *);
EStatus ShutDownTransQ; EStatus FormBatchRecQ;
Credit Card Off-line Authorization Only Transaction Class (CVPCL_CCOfϊlineAuth)
This is the class derived from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and implements the Offline Authorization Class Transaction. Class Name :
CVPCL_CCOfllineAuth Data :
Member Functions : CVPCL_CCOfflineAuth() ; EStatus InitializeTrans(TVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTrans(TVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
EStatus FormBatchRecO;
Credit Card Adjust Transaction Class (CVPCL CC Adjust)
This is the class derived from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and implements the Adjust Transaction.
Class Name :
CVPCL_CCAdjust Data :
Member Functions :
CVPCL_CCAdjust(), EStatus InitιalιzeTrans(TVPOSParamsBlk *);
EStatus ExecuteTrans(TVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ, EStatus FormBatchRecQ,
Credit Card Void Transaction Class (CVPCL_CCVoid)
This is the class deπved from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and implements the Void Transaction.
Class Name :
CVPCL_CCVoid Data :
Member Functions : CVPCL_CCVoιd(),
EStatus InιtιalιzeTrans(TVPOSParamsBlk *), EStatus ExecuteTrans(TVPOSResultsBlk *), EStatus ShutDownTransQ, EStatus FormBatchRecf);
Credit Card Forced Post Transaction Class (CVPCL_CCForcedPost) This is the class derived from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and implements the Forced Post Transaction.
Class Name :
CVPCL_CCForcedPost Data : Member Functions :
CVPCL_CCForcedPost(); EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
EStatus FormBatchRecQ;
Pre -Authorization Complete Transaction Class (CVPCL_CCPreAuthComp)
This is the class derived from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and implements the Pre- Authorization Completion Transaction.
Class Name :
CVPCL_CCPreAuthComp Data :
Member Functions :
CVPCL_CCPreAuthComp() ; EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
EStatus FormBatchRecQ;
Credit Card Balance Inquiry Class (CVPCL_CCBalanceInq)
This class is derived from the CVPCLFinCCTrans class and is used to perform the Merchant Balance Inquiry function.
Class Name :
CVPCL_CCBalanceInq Data :
Member Functions :
CVPCL_CCBalanceInq() ;
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk EStatus ExecuteTrans(TVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTrans();
Administrative Host Transaction Class (CVPCLAdminHostTrans) This is an abstract base class derived from the CVPCLHostTrans class and is used to derive the administrative host transaction classes.
Class Name :
CVPCLAdminHostTrans Data :
Member Functions :
CVPCLAdminHostTransQ ; int GetHostIndex(); EStatus SetHostlndex (const int);
Reconcile Transaction Class (CVPCLReconcile)
This is the class derived from the CVPCLAdminHostTrans class and implements the Reconcile or Close functionality. Class Name :
CVPCLReconcile Data :
Member Functions : CVPCLReconcileQ;
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTrans();
Host Log-on Transaction Class (CVPCLHostLogon)
This is the class derived from the CVPCLAdminHostTrans class and implements the Host Logon Transaction. Class Name :
CVPCLHostLogon Data :
Member Functions :
CVPCLHostLogonQ;
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Parameters Download Transaction Class (CVPCLParamsDwnld)
This is the class derived from the CVPCLAdminHostTrans class and implements the Parameters Download (VPOS configuration information from the host) functionality.
Class Name :
CVPCLParamsDwnld Data :
Member Functions : CVPCLParamsDwnldQ;
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Test Transaction Class (CVPCLTestHost)
This is the class derived from the CVPCLAdminHostTrans class and implements the Test functionality which is used to test the host and the link.
Class Name : CVPCLTestHost
Data :
Member Functions : - 72 -
Virtual POS UnLock/Start Class (CVPCLVPOSUnlock)
This class implements the VPOS UnLock or the Start Local functionality. The class is derived from the CVPCLLocalTrans base class.
Class Name :
CVPCLVPOSUnLock Data :
Member Functions :
CVPCLVPOSUnlockQ;
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Transaction Data Administration Class (CVPCLTransDataAdmin)
This is an abstract base class used to derive the classes which are required to review/ manage the transaction data which includes the batch data and the accumulator data. The class is derived from the CVPCLLocalTrans base class.
Class Name :
CVPCLTransDataAdmin Data : Member Functions : CVPCLTransDataAdminQ;
Batch Review Class (CVPCLBatchReview)
This class is derived from the CVPCLTransDataAdmin base class and implements the batch review functionality Class Name :
CVPCLBatchReview Data : - 71 -
CVPCLTestHost();
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Local Transaction Class Definitions (CVPCLLocalTrans) This is the abstract base class for all the transactions that are performed locally to the VPOS.
Class Name : CVPCLLocalTrans
Data :
Record Number (int) Host Index (int) Member Functions : CVPCLocalTransQ; int GetRecNumQ; int GetHostlndexQ
EStatus SetRecNum(const int);
EStatus SetHostIndex(const int);
Virtual POS Lock/ Stop Class (CVPCLVPOSLock)
This class implements the VPOS Lock or the Stop Local functionality. Under the locked state the VPOS does not accept any transaction requests. The class is derived from the CVPCLLocalTrans base class. Class Name :
CVPCLVPOSLock Data :
Member Functions : CVPCLVPOSLockQ;
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *);
EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *);
EStatus ShutDownTransQ ; Member Functions :
CVPCLBatchReviewQ ;
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Clear Batch Class (CVPCLClear Batch)
This class is derived from the CVPCLTransDataAdmin base class and implements the clear batch functionality, which is used to clear the batch in the event of doing a manual reconciliation between the VPOS and the acquirer.
Class Name :
CVPCLClearBatch Data : Member Functions :
CVPCLClearBatchQ;
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Accumulators Review Class (CVPCLAccumReview) This class is derived from the CVPCLTransDataAdmin base class and implements the Accumulators Review functionality. Class Name : CVPCLAccumReview
Data : Member Functions :
CVPCLAccumReviewQ ; EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *);
EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Clear Accumulators Class (CVPCLClearAccum) This class is derived from the CVPCLTransDataAdmin base class and implements the Accumulators Clear functionality.
Class Name : CVPCLClearAccum
Data : Member Functions :
CVPCLClearAccumQ ;
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *);
EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
VPOS Configuration Data Administration Class (CVPCLConfigDataAdmin)
This is an abstract base class and is used to derive classes which implement the functionality for managing the VPOS configuration data. The class is derived from the CVPCLLocalTrans base class.
Class Name :
CVPCLConfigDataAdmin Data :
Member Functions : acquirer Data or the Host Definition Table Review Class (CVPCL_HDTReview) This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Host Definition Table Review functionality.
Class Name :
CVPCL_HDTReview Data :
Member Functions : CVPCL_HDTReview();
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ; Issuer Data or the Card Definition Table Review Class (CVPCL_CDTReview)
This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Card Definition Table Review functionality. Class Name :
CVPCL_CDTReview Data : Member Functions :
CVPCL_CDTReview();
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Communication Parameters Table Review Class (CVPCL_CPTReview)
This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Communications Parameters Table Review functionality.
Class Name : CVPCL_CPTReview
Data :
Member Functions :
CVPCL_CPTReview(); EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *);
EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Terminal Configuration Table Review Class (CVFCL_TCTReview) This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Terminal Configuration Table Review functionality.
Class Name : CVPCL_TCTReview Data :
Member Functions :
CVPCL_TCTReview() ;
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
acquirer Data or the Host Definition Table Update Class (CVPCL_HDTUpdate)
This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Host Definition Table Update functionality. Class Name : CVPCL_HDTUpdate
Data : Member Functions :
CVPCL_HDTUpdate();
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *);
EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Issuer Data or the Card Definition Table Update Class (CVPCL_CDTUpdate)
This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Card Definition Table Update functionality. Class Name :
CVPCL_CDTUpdate Data :
Member Functions : CVPCL_CDTUpdate();
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ; Communications Parameters Table Update Class (CVPCL_CPTUpdate)
This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Communications Parameters Table Update functionality.
Class Name :
CVPCL_CPTUpdate Data :
Member Functions :
CVPCL_CPTUpdate();
EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *); EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Terminal Configuration Table Update Class (CVPCL TCTUpdate) This class is derived from the CVPCLConfigDataAdmin class and implements the Terminal Configuration Table Update functionality.
Class Name :
CVPCL rCTUpdate Data : Member Functions :
CVPCL_TCTUpdate(); EStatus InitializeTransfTVPOSParamsBlk *);
EStatus ExecuteTransfTVPOSResultsBlk *); EStatus ShutDownTransQ;
Batch Class (CVPCLBatch) This class defines the batch record and the operations which are performed on the batch.
Class Name :
CVPCLBatch Data :
Batch Record Structure (TVPOSBatchRec) / / Definition of the TVPOSBatchRec is as below, typedef struct _VPOSBatchRec { char szTransAmt[]; char szTransDate[]; char szTransTimej]; char szRetrievalRefNum[]; // Trans. Ref. No. sent by the host char szAuthId[]; // Approval Code sent by the host char szOrigAmt[]; // Original amount for - Adjust char szPurchOrderNum[]; char szBatchNum[]; EPCLTransType TransType; EPCLPmtlnst Pmtlnst;
EPCLCurrency CurrencyType; EPCLDecimals NumDecDigits; unsigned int nTransRefNum; // Running Ref. Number gen. by the
//VPOS for every approved txn. unsigned long InSTAN; // Sys. Trace Number incr. by VPOS
// for every trans, that is trans, to host TPmtlnstData PaylnstData; } TVPOSBatchRec; Member Functions : CVPCLBatchQ;
EStatus SetTransType(const EPCLTransType); EStatus SetRetRefNum(const char *); EStatus SetAuthId(const char *); EStatus SetPurchOrderNum(const char *); EStatus SetTransRefNum(const long);
EStatus SetTransAmt(const char *); EStatus SetBatchNum(const char *); EStatus SetSTAN(const long); EStatus SetDateMMDDYYYY(const char *);
EStatus SetTimeHHMMSS(const char *);
EStatus SetPmtInst(const EPCLPmtlnst);
EStatus SetCCAcctNum(const char *); EStatus SetCCExpDate(const char *);
EStatus SetOrigAmt(const char *);
EStatus GetBatchRecfTVPOSBatchRec *);
EStatus InitBatchQ;
EStatus OpenBatch(const char *, FILE **, const char *); EStatus CloseBatch(FILE *);
EStatus AddBatchRec Q; / / Adds a record to the batch
EStatus GetBatchRec (const long); / / Gets a record from the batch
EStatus UpdateBatchRec (const long); / / Update batch record with NR
EStatus DeleteBatchRec (const long); / / Deletes the batch record
Accumulator Class (CVPCLAccum) This class defines the Accumulator record and the operations on the accumulators. Class Name :
CVPCLAccum Data :
Credit Amount (char szCreditAmt[AMT_SZ + 1])
Credit Count (int nCreditCnt)
Debit Amount (char szDebitAmt[AMT_SZ + 1)
Debit Count (int nDebitCnt) Member Functions : int OpenAccum(int fHandle); int GetAccum (int nAccumType, int *pnAccumCnt, char *pszAccumAmt); int CloseAccum(int fHandle); int CleanAccumQ;
Host Definition Table Class (CVPCL.HDT)
This class defines the Host Definition Table record and the operations on the table. Class Name : CVPCL_HDT Data :
Host Definition Table Record Structure (TVPOSHDTRec ) The TVPOSHDTRec structure contains the following fields, typedef struct _VPOSHDTRec
{ char szTermId[j; char szMerchId[]; char szBatchNum[); char szTPDUf]; char szNII[J; char szHostName[];
EPCLHostProtType HostProtType;
EPCLHostProtSubType HostProtSubType; / / Data Capture Required Flags
VPOSBool fAuthOnlyDC;
VPOSBool fAuthCaptDC;
VPOSBool fForcedPostDC;
VPOSBool fAdjustDC; VPOSBool fReturnDC;
VPOSBool fOfflineAuthDC;
VPOSBool fVoidDC;
VPOSBool IPreAuthDC;
VPOSBool fPreAuthCompDC; unsigned int nNumAdv; / / Max. No. of piggy-back trans, allowed unsigned int nTransRefNum; unsigned long InSTAN; / / Systems Trace Number
I TVPOSHDTRec;
Member Functions :
CVPCL_HDT();
EStatus CleanHDTQ;
EStatus LoadHDTRec(const int); EStatus SaveHDTRecfconst int);
EStatus GetNumRecsfint *);
EStatus GetHDTRecfTVPOSHDTRec *);
EStatus GetTermldfchar *); EStatus GetMerchldfchar *);
EStatus GetBatchNumfchar *);
EStatus GetTransRefNumfunsigned int *);
EStatus GetTPDUfchar *);
EStatus GetNIIfchar *); EStatus GetHostName(char *);
EStatus GetHostProtTypefEPCLHostProtType *);
EStatus GetHostProtSubType(EPCLHostProtSubType
EStatus GetNumAdv(unsigned int *);
EStatus GetSTAN(unsigned long *); EStatus GetAuthOnlyDCfVPOSBool *);
EStatus GetAuthCaptDC(VPOSBool *);
EStatus GetAdjustDC(VPOSBool *);
EStatus GetReturnDCfVPOSBool *);
EStatus GetForcedPostDC(VPOSBool *); EStatus GetOfflineAuthDCfVPOSBool *);
EStatus GetVoidDCfVPOSBool *);
EStatus GetPreAuthDCfVPOSBool *);
EStatus GetPreAuthCompDC(VPOSBool *);
EStatus SetHDTRecfTVPOSHDTRec *); EStatus SetTermldfconst char *);
EStatus SetMerchldfconst char *);
EStatus SetBatchNumfconst char *);
EStatus SetTransRefNumfconst unsigned int);
EStatus SetTPDUfconst char *); EStatus SetSTANfconst unsigned long);
EStatus SetNII(const char *);
EStatus SetHostName(const char *);
EStatus SetHostProtTypefconst EPCLHostProtType); EStatus SetHostProtSubType(const EPCLHostProtSubType); EStatus SetNumAdv(const int); EStatus SetAuthOnlyDC(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetAuthCaptDC(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetAdjustDC(const VPOSBool);
EStatus SetReturnDC(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetForcedPostDC(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetOfflineAuthDC(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetVoidDC(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetPreAuthDC(const VPOSBool);
EStatus SetPreAuthCompDC(const VPOSBool);
Card Definition Table Class (CVPCL_CDT)
This class defines the Card Definition Table record and the operations on the table. Class Name :
CVPCL_CDT Data :
Card Definition Table Record Structure (TVPOSCDTRec ) The TVPOSCDTRec structure contains the following fields, typedef struct VPOSCDTRec
{ char szPANLo[]; char szPANHi[]; char szCardLabel[]; int nHostlndex; int nMinPANDigit; int nMaxPANDigit;
/ / Transaction Allowed Flags
VPOSBool fAuthOnlyAllwd; VPOSBool fAuthCaptAllwd;
VPOSBool fForcedPostAllwd;
VPOSBool fAdjustAllwd;
VPOSBool fReturnAllwd; VPOSBool fOfflineAuthAllwd; VPOSBool fVoidAllwd; VPOSBool fPreAuthAllwd; VPOSBool fPreAuthCompAllwd; } TVPOSCDTRec;
Member Functions :
CVPCL_CDTQ;
EStatus CleanCDTf); EStatus LoadCDTRec(const int);
EStatus SaveCDTRec(const int);
EStatus GetNumRecsfint *);
EStatus GetCDTRecfTVPOSCDTRec *);
EStatus GetPANLofchar *); EStatus GetPANHi(char *);
EStatus GetCardLabel(char *);
EStatus GetCDTHostIndex(int *);
EStatus GetMinPANDigit(int *);
EStatus GetMaxPANDigitfint *); EStatus GetAuthOnlyAllwd (VPOSBool *);
EStatus GetAuthCaptAllwd(VPOSBool *);
EStatus GetAdjustAllwd(VPOSBool *);
EStatus GetReturnAllwdfVPOSBool *);
EStatus GetOfflineAuthAllwdfVPOSBool *); EStatus GetVoidAllwdfVPOSBool *);
EStatus GetPreAuthAllwdfVPOSBool *);
EStatus GetPreAuthCompAllwdfVPOSBool *);
EStatus GetForcedPostAIlwdfVPOSBool *);
EStatus SetCDTRecfTVPOSCDTRec *); EStatus SetHostlndexfconst int);
EStatus SetMinPANDigitfconst int);
EStatus SetMaxPANDigitfconst int);
EStatus SetPANLofconst char *); EStatus SetPANHi(const char *); EStatus SetCardLabel(const char *); EStatus SetAuthOnlyAllwd(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetAuthCaptAIlwd(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetAdjustAllwd(const VPOSBool);
EStatus SetReturnAllwd (const VPOSBool); EStatus SetForcedPostAllwd(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetOfflineAuthAllwd(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetVoidAllwd(const VPOSBool); EStatus SetPreAuthAllwd(const VPOSBool);
EStatus SetPreAuthCompAllwd(const VPOSBool);
Communications Parameters Table Class (CVPCL_CPT)
This class defines the communications parameters table and the operations on the table.
Class Name :
CVPCL_CPT Data :
Communications Parameters Table Record Structure (TVPOSCPTRec The TVPOSCPTRec structure contains the following fields, typedef struct _VPOSCPTRec
{ char szAcqPriAddressf]; char szAcqSecAddress[]; char szAcqTerAddress[j;
int nRespTimeOut; } TVPOSCPTRec;
Member Functions :
CVPCL_CPT();
EStatus CleanCPTQ;
EStatus LoadCPTRec(const int); EStatus SaveCPTRec(const int); EStatus GetNumRecs(int *); EStatus GetCPTRecfTVPOSCPTRec *); EStatus GetAcqPriAddress(char *); EStatus GetAcqSecAddress(char *);
EStatus GetAcqTerAddress(char *); EStatus GetRespTimeOut(int *); EStatus SetCPTRecfTVPOSCPTRec *); EStatus SetAcqPriAddress(const char *); EStatus SetAcqSecAddress(const char *);
EStatus SetAcqTerAddress(const char *); EStatus SetRespTimeOutfconst int);
Terminal Configuration Table Class (CVPCL_TCT) This class defines the VPOS terminal configuration parameters table and the operations on the table.
Class Name :
CVPCL TCT Data :
Terminal Configuration Table Record Structure (TVPOSTCTRec ) The TVPOSTCTRec structure contains the following fields, typedef struct VPOSTCTRec
! char szMerchName[];
VPOSBool fVPOSLock; // VPOS Lock/Unlock Toggle Flag
} TVPOSTCTRec;
Member Functions : CVPCL_TCTQ;
EStatus LoadTCTRecQ; EStatus SaveTCTRecQ; EStatus CleanTCTQ; EStatus GetTCTRecfTVPOSTCTRec *); EStatus GetMerchName(char *); EStatus GetVPOSLockfVPOSBool *); EStatus SetMerchNamefconst char *); EStatus SetVPOSLockfconst VPOSBool);
Amount Class (CλTPCL Amount)
This class defines the amount data items and the operations on them.
Class Name :
CVPCLAmount Data :
Amount (charf]) Currency Type (EPCLCurrency) Member Functions :
CVPCLAmountQ;
EStatus Initialize(const CPCLAmount&); EStatus Initialize(const char *); EStatus Initialize (con st long); void operator = (const char *); void operator = (const long); EStatus GetAmount(char *); operator const char * () const; operator const long ();
Payment Instruments Class (CPCLPmtlnst) This section defines the Payment Instrument Class hierarchy. Figure 16 illustrates a transaction class hierarchy in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
Class Name :
CPCLPmtlnst Data :
Payment Instrument Type (EPCLPmtlnst) Member Functions :
CPCLPmtlnstQ;
EStatus GetPmtInstType(EPCLPmtInst *);
Bank Cards Class (CPCLBankCard)
This class is derived from the CPCLPmtlnst class and implements the bank cards class.
Class Name :
CPCLBankCard Data :
Account Number (char[ ]) Expiration Date (CPCLDateTime) Index into the CDT table (int) Member Functions : CPCLBankCardQ;
EStatus Initialize();
EStatus SetAcctNum(const char *);
EStatus SetExpDate(const char *); EStatus GetAcctNum(char *);
EStatus GetExpDate(char *);
EStatus ValidateCard(); int GetCDTIndexQ;
VPOSBool DoLuhnCheckQ; VPOSBool DoCardRangingQ;
EStatus DoValidateExpDateQ;
Credit Cards Class (CPCLCreditCard)
This class is derived from the CPCLBankCard class and has the same data and the methods as the CPCLBankCard class. Class Name :
CPCLCreditCard Data : Member Functions :
CPCLCreditCardf);
Debit Cards Class (CPCLDebitCard)
This class is derived from the CVPCLBankCard class and implements the debit card class.
Class Name :
CPCLDebitCard Data :
Card Holder Encrypted PIN (char[ ]) Member Functions :
CPCLDebitCardf); EStatus GetEncryptedPINfchar *); EStatus SetEncryptedPINfchar *);
VPOS Class Library Interface and API Definition
This section explains the classes which provide the interface to the VPOS class library.
Data Structures required for the VPOS Interface Class
Transaction Parameters Structure (TVPOSParamsBlk) - This structure is a subset of all the transaction parameters required for the different transactions.
typedef struct VPOSParamsBlk
! char szTransAmt[]; / / Without decimal point.
/ / Left most two digits implied to be decimal digits char szPurchOrderNumfj; char szRetRefNum[]; char szBatchNum[]; char szNewBatchNum[]; char szOrigAmtj]; char szCPSDataj] ; char szAuthId[]; / / Auth Id for offline auth-only transaction int Hostlndex; unsigned int nTransRefNum; VPOSBool f POSLock;
ECPSDataType eCPSType ; EPCLTransType TransType; EStatus TransResult; EPCLPmtlnst Pmtlnst; EPCLCurrency CurrencyType;
EPCLDecimals NumDecDigits; EVPCLAccumType AccumType; TPmtlnstData PaylnstData; union _VPOSConfigData f
TVPOSHDTRec srHDTRec;
TVPOSCDTRec srCDTRec;
TVPOSCPTRec srCPTRec;
TVPOSTCTRec srTCTRec; ) VPOSConfigData; void *Context; / / Context from the calling interface
EStatus (*VPOSCallBack)(TVPOSResultsBlk *, void *);
} TVPOSParamsBlk;
Transaction Results Structure fTVPOSResultsBlk) - This structure contains all the fields returned from the host and other fields which are required for doing terminal data capture.
typedef struct _VPOSResultsBlk
{ char szNewBatchNum[]; int nHostlndex; EStatus TransResult; TVPOSBatchRec srBatchRec; TVPOSAccumRec srAccumRec; char szCardLabel(]; TVPOSHDTRec srHDTRec; TVPOSCDTRec srCDTRec;
TVPOSCPTRec srCPTRec; TVPOSTCTRec srTCTRec; ) TVPOSResultsBlk;
The various status codes for the enumeration EStatus are detailed below.
VPOS Interface Class (CVPOSInterface)
This class provides the interface to the VPOS Transaction Class Library. Class Name : CVPOSInterface
Data : Member Functions :
CVPOSInterfaceQ;
// Creates the Transaction Object, takes care / / of other initialization and executes the transaction.
CVPCLTransaction *pclTransFactory(TVPOSParamsBlk *);
EStatus DestroyTrans(CVPCLTransaction *);
VPOS API Definition This section explains in the VPOS API which are required for interfacing with the VPOS Class Library. All the different VPOS transactions can be initiated using the API defined in this section.
VPOS Terminal Architecture
Figure 25 is a block diagram of the VPOS Terminal Architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The Internet 2500 provides the communication processing necessary to enable the VPOS Terminal architecture. The terminal interface CGI 2520 communicates via the Internet to provide information to the VPOS OLE Server 2550 which formats information in accordance with the VPOS API DLL 2560 which uses the protocol class DLL 2570 to flesh out the message for delivery to the Gateway Server 2580 The collection of the VPOS OLE Server 2550, VPOS API DLL 2560 and the Protocol Class DLL 2570 make up the VPOS Software Development ToolKit (SDK) which are used to enable VPOS applications for interfacing with an Operator 2540
VPOS/GATEWAY Architecture
The architecture of the Virtual Point of Sale (VPOS) and Virtual Gateway (GATEWAY) architecture maintains SET compliance while providing support for additional message types that are not enabled in SET The architecture includes isolation of cryptographic details in a single module to facilitate single version government approval while maximizing the flexibility of the system for customization and facilitating transfer of updated versions on an acquirer specific basis Figure 18 is a block diagram of the extended SET architecture m accordance with a preferred embodiment Processing commences at function block 1800 for a consumer- oπgmated transaction via the World Wide Web (WWW) or 1810 for a merchant-oπgmated transaction on the Internet In either case control passes immediately to the WWW server 1820 for the transaction to be appropriately formatted and the appropπate interface page presented, whether the transaction is a store front 1822, shopping cart 1824, pay page 1826, standard terminal administration 1828-1830 transaction, or an extended terminal transaction 1834 If processing requires authentication of the transaction, then control passes through the Virtual Point of Sale (VPOS) Application Programming Interface (API) library 1840 for SET compliant transactions and through the VPOS API extensions library for extensions to the SET protocol Then, at function block 1842, if the transaction is SET compliant, and function block 1864 if the transaction is not SET compliant, a library of protocol stack information is used to conform the message before it is transmitted to a Gateway site for ultimate delivery to a bank host 1874 for authorization
Extended SET messages are processed at the Gateway site on a two track basis with the division cπteπa being SET compliance (which will change over time as more functionality is put into SET) or SET extensions Set compliant messages are processed via the protocol stack library 1862, while SET extensions are processed via the protocol stack extension library 1864 Then, at function block 1870 the gateway engine processes SET and Host specific code including gateway administration extensions 1872 that bypass the normal processing and flow directly from the merchant and consumer server 1820 to the gateway administration extensions 1872 to the Gateway Engine 1870.
As described above, there are three channels by which messages are exchanged between VPOS 1846 and GATEWAY 1856.
1. Standard SET messages
The standard SET messages are originated by the merchant software either via a pay page 1826 directly controlled by the consumer, or via an operator interface consisting of a set of HTML pages and associated executables launched by the pages (e g. pay page 1826 and standard terminal administration 1828-1830.)
Each SET message type (e.g. , authoπzation v. capture) transmits a different set of data and each requires a different Protocol Data Unit (PDU) to describe its encoding. Examples of how Standard SET messages are encoded are given in the SET documentation previously incorporated by reference.
2. Extended SET messages The Extended SET messages are utilized as an "escape mechanism'' to implement acquirer- specific messages such as settlement/ reconciliation, employee logon/ logoff, and parameter download. The messages are developed as a set of name-value pairs encapsulated in a PKCS-7 wrapper and wrapped m Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) , described in a book by N. Borenstem 86 N. Freed, "RFC 1521. MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One: Mechanisms for Specifying and Descπbmg the Format of Internet Message Bodies" (Sept. 1993). The name-value pairs can have arbitrary (8-bit) data, so arbitrary items can be passed through the extended SET channel, including executable programs and Dynamic Load Libraπes (DLL)s.
Figure 18B illustrates a multipart MIME message with one Extended SET message and one Standard SET authorizing message Mime is utilized as an outer wrapper 1890 to allow an
Extended SET message 1891 to be transmitted as a component of messages embedded in one MIME multipart message. In this manner, a standard SET message can be sent with an Extended SET message in one VPOS/ GATEWAY communication transaction. Embedding the Extended SET messages in a PKCS-7 wrapper enables the same message authentication to occur as in standard SET messages. Thus, for SET-compliant and non-SET- compliant messages, the same mechanism may be used to restrict which entities the VPOS or Gateway will trust in any communications. An important concept m Extended SET is that all messages, of any type, are sent in a uniform name/value pair format, thus allowing a single Protocol Data Unit to suffice for any type of message sent through the Extended SET channel. Since arbitrary data may be sent this way, a mechanism must be provided to preclude the use of the Extended SET channel by parties other than approved financial institutions. If this is not ensured, then the NSA and the US Department of Commerce will not approve the software for export.
SET itself to some degree ensures that this Extended SET channel is used only by financial institutions. The protocol stack extension library only processes messages that have been signed by a financial institution SET certificate that is in turn signed by a payment instrument brand certificate (such as Visa or MasterCard).
Stronger control over the Extended SET channel can be achieved by further restricting processing of messages to those signed (either instead of or m addition to the financial institution SE certificate) by a second certificate belonging to a third-party agency, either governmental or pπvate (e.g., VeriFone, as manufacturer of the software).
In this way, a particular set of Extended SET messages can be implemented by Bank X, and a different set of messages by Bank Y If a VPOS has an extended terminal transaction interface as shown in Figure 18A at block 1834 for Bank X, and has been configured to only accept messages from a Gateway with Bank X's certificate, then it will be able to communicate those messages to a Gateway that has the certificate for Bank X, and accepts messages of the types in Bank X's message set. The VPOS will not be able to connect to the Bank Y gateway, or to any other system that purports to communicate via Extended SET. This restriction is further secured by utilizing a public key certificate that is "hard wired" into VPOS, and which is distributed only to gateways that use the Extended SET mechanism.
Figure 18C is an example flowchart of message processing in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Processing commences at function block 1880 when a message is received by an HTTPS server or other listener and passed to decision block 1883 to determine if the sending VPOS has transmitted an authentic message and if the VPOS is authorized to communicate with this gateway If the message is not authentic, then the message is logged as an error and the error is handled as shown m function block 1889. If the message is authentic, then the message is decrypted at function block 1884 and the PDU parses the message into name / value pairs Then, based on the message type and the extended SET version information, the remaining message is parsed at function block 1885 and the message is checked for conformance to the appropriate specification as shown at decision block 1887. If the message does not conform, then it is logged and the error handled at function block 1889. If the message conforms to the proper specification in decision block 1887 then the message is translated into the appropriate host format and sent to the host as shown in function block 1888. Thus, when a gateway receives an incoming message from a VPOS and parses the Extended SET portion of the message, a single MIME message can transmit a SET message and/or an Extended Set Message.
An export license for the encryption can be obtained on a case-by-case basis, and since there will be potentially millions of VPOS's, it is desirable to obtain a commodities juπsdiction for the VPOS, to enable a single version of the VPOS (rather than one version for each bank) to be supported by the VPOS architecture The architecture described here ensures that the single version of VPOS, no matter how it is configured with extended terminal transaction interfaces, cannot be used to communicate any data other than that contained in the extended SET messages that have been approved for export by the US government to be used exclusively for a specific bank
Figure 18D is an example of a simple message between VPOS and Gateway using the Extended SET channel enabling an employee to sign on, or "logon to a given terminal in accordance with the subject invention The message must contain the employee's logon ID, a password to be verified by the bank host computer, and the date and time as shown at 1894
While the contents of the message are shown without encryption in Figure 18D, it should be noted that the information (including the logon password) are SET encrypted inside the PKCS-7 wrapper 1894 Certain fields may be designated as mandatory for an Extended SET message, to allow the Gateway or VPOS to decide how to handle the message For the sake of claπty, m this message 1894, only two fields, 'message type' and "ESETversion", are mandatory These fields inform the Gateway that this message is of type "logon," and that the VPOS is usmg version ' 1.0A" of the ESET message formats defined for the Gateway. In this embodiment, the length indicator "(5J" is used to distinguish the length (in bytes) of the field of type "messagetype" m the message In this way, there are no special end-of-data characters, and therefore arbitrary data need not have any ' escaped" characters.
It should be noted that using escaped characters will work equally well. Total message integπty is assured by the digital signatures in the PKCS-7 wrapper. This does not, however, preclude the use of other checksumming schemes for additional pinpointing of transmission or encoding errors. The messagetype and ESETversion name/value pairs facilitate Gateway look up of what name/value pairs are expected in the 'logon" message Some name/value pairs may be mandatory, and others may be optional
Figure 18E is an example of a simple message between VPOS and Gateway using the Extended SET channel enabling an employee to sign on, or ' logon" to a given terminal in accordance with the subject invention In response to the logon request message from a VPOS, the Gateway may respond with a "logon accepted" message 1894, as depicted in Figure 18E, which VPOS, upon receipt and authentication, then uses to unlock the terminal for that user.
Figure 49 shows how the VPOS authenticates an incoming response to a request m accordance with a preferred embodiment Processing commences at function block 4930 when a message is received by the HTTPS, SET server, or other listener that originated the request to which this reponse corresponds The message is passed to decision block 4940 to determine if the sending Gateway has transmitted an authentic message and if the gateway is authorized to communicate with this VPOS If the message is not authentic, then the message is logged as an error or possible attack and the error is handled as shown in function block 4970. If the message is authentic, then the message is decrypted at function block 4950 and the PDU parses the message into name/ value pairs Then, based on the message type and the extended SET version information, the remaining message is parsed at function block 4960 and the message is checked for conformance to the appropπate specification as shown at decision block 4980. If the message does not conform, then it is logged and the error handled at function block 4970. If the message conforms to the proper specification in decision block 4980 then the message is translated into a standardized argument stπng to be passed to the appropπate executable or code entry point in the VPOS, as shown in function block 4990. Thus, when a VPOS receives an incoming message from a Gateway and parses the Extended SET portion of the message, the message may cause VPOS to execute a program that takes action or queπes the user to take action.
3 Gateway-initiated messages
Since all SET messages between a merchant and an acquirer are currently merchant-initiated
(as specified in the SET documentation), there must be a separate mechanism for initiating a message from a gateway, for example to request the upload of management information base (MIB) data, or to download new parameters This is accomplished by requiring the gateway to send a message to the merchant via a MIME-encapsulated PKCS-7 conformant message containing name-value pairs to the merchant server directly, rather than to the SET module. This channel is shown in Figure 18A at block 1860.
The message is veπfied for origination from the acquirer, and is utilized to either initialize a merchant action, such as to update the merchant's administration page (for example by blinking a message saymg, "PLEASE RE-INITIALIZE YOUR TERMINAL"), or by initiating a request/response message pair originating from the merchant (for example, "HERE ARE THE CONTENTS OF MY MIB") This is achieved by calling one of the extended terminal transaction interfaces (Figure 18A at 1834), which in turn initiates a SET or Extended SET transaction
Gateway Customization via the Extended SET Channel
Gateway customization m extended SET is extremely powerful and a novel concept for VPOS processing Each VPOS contains one or more "seπal numbers" unique to each copy of the software (a seπal number may be embedded in the software, or may be a component of a public key certificate used in the software) Once a merchant has selected an acquirer and obtained the appropπate certificates, the VPOS can be customized utilizing the communication link and messages containing customization applications
A bank distπbutes VPOS via different sales channels The first is direct from a bank to an existing merchant with whom the bank already has an existing relationship In this case, a version of VPOS already customized for a bank is sent to the merchant, either directly by a bank, or through a third-party distributor or service bureau. The customizations may involve modification or replacement of, for example, a store front 1822, shopping cart 1824, pay page 1826, standard terminal administration transaction interface 1828-1830 or an extended terminal transaction interface 1834. This is a standard model of distribution of software that is customized for small target market segments.
The more interesting case, and the one that concerns the novel use of the Extended SET channel, is where the potential merchant acquires, through some non-bank channel, a "generic" VPOS which has not yet been customized to interact with a specific bank. This VPOS can communicate with a "test gateway", which the merchant may use to experiment with the various features of VPOS and to test the integration of the VPOS into a total online storefront.
In order to actually transact business over the Internet, the merchant must first obtain a merchant ID from the merchant bank with which he signs an acquiring agreement. For online payment processing, the merchant must also obtain an appropriate set of digital credentials in the form of public key certificates and possibly additional passwords, depending on the financial institution. Once these credentials are obtained, the merchant is ready to customize the already-obtained VPOS to communicate with a merchant bank's gateway.
Using the built-in "serial number" certificate and the Test Gateway public key certificate (which is "hard-wired" into the VPOS software), it is possible to securely download a particular bank's customization applications to a specific copy of the VPOS software . Once the VPOS is appropriately configured, the last stage of customization download is to configure the VPOS so that it only responds to a public key certificate of the merchant's acquirer. This process is illustrated here in the context of a merchant who obtains a VPOS that talks to the VeriFone test gateway, and desires to customize the VPOS to interact with a gateway at a bank.
The merchant has purchased a VPOS from a non-bank channel. The version communicates with the VeriFone Test Gateway. The merchant uses the gateway to learn about using VPOS, and to test the integration of his storefront system with his payment system. The merchant also obtains certificates for payment processing from a bank, the merchant bank of choice for the merchant. The merchant is now ready to customize VPOS to talk to the bank gateway. The flowchart for the merchant interaction with the Test Gateway is shown in Figure 50. The merchant begins at function block 5000, where the newly-obtained merchant SET certificates are installed in the VPOS. The merchant then directs the VPOS to connect to the VeriFone Test Gateway, by selecting this option from the VPOS terminal administration home page 5005. The choice of this option invokes an extended terminal admin page from the default set of such pages supplied with the generic version of VPOS. This program guides the customization process.
The merchant, interacting with the extended terminal admin page, navigates to the list of gateways which is maintained by the Test Gateway, and selects the bank to connect by selecting from the list of banks, at function block 5015. During this process, the merchant's public key certificates are uploaded to the Test Gateway, and checked (at decision block 5025) to verify that the certificates have been signed by the bank to customize the bank for the VPOS. If the certificates do not match, the merchant is advised of the situation in function block 5028, and must select a different bank. If the certificates are not valid SET certificates as detected at decision block 5020, the merchant is advised at function block 5028, and the session terminates. If the certificates are valid and match the selected bank, customization continues at function block 5030.
The extended terminal administration program in VPOS receives a list of the customizations from the Test Gateway that must be performed to specialize the VPOS for a specific bank. Some of these customizations are mandatory, while others are optional. In function block 5030, the VPOS advises the merchant of the customizations, prompting for any choices that must be made by the merchant. The merchant's actions at this point drive decision block 5035, in which the VPOS either returns itself to the "generic" state and terminates the interaction, or begins the configuration of the VPOS, depending on the merchant's confirmation of the request to begin the configuration.
If the merchant has authorized the changes, control is passed to function block 5040 where, the POS stores the certificates of any gateways that it will allow future configuration changes to be initiated from in its database. This may be only a specific bank, such as a bank and the Test Gateway, or other combinations. If only a single, non-Test, bank-owned, gateway is allowed to download changes, the VPOS is no longer customizable for any other bank. Then, a new copy would be purchased by the merchant to have it customized for another bank If the Test Gateway is still allowed to customize the VPOS, the merchant could switch to another merchant bank and have the current VPOS updated to work with the new bank.
In function block 5050, the customizations are downloaded to the VPOS. The downloads compnse a set of HTML pages and a set of executable programs or scπpts that read data from the merchant, perform vaπous functions, and present data to the merchant In general, the customizations downloaded may augment or replace in part or in whole any and all of function blocks 1822, 1824, 1826, 1828, 1830, or 1834 in Figure 18A. At a minimum, the terminal "home page" will be replaced so that it points to the new functionality. At this point, the customization of the VPOS has been completed, and the merchant may now begin sending payment requests to the merchant bank or processor through the VPOS.
Thread Safe VPOS - TID Allocation Physical terminals process a single transaction at a time since clerks are usually only able to process one transaction at a time Web Servers can process many transactions at a time, so payment requests can often occur simultaneously Thus, the VPOS Software must have support for multi-tasking and provide support for multiple threads to be active at the same time in the same system as well as the same process. This requirement is relatively straight forward However, the authorizing banks require that all transaction requests include a
Terminal ID (TID), and, for many banks, no single TID may be active in any two transaction requests that overlap in time Thus, the VPOS requires dynamic allocation of TIDs to requesting threads
One way of providing for multiple TID's is to assign a "base" TID, and either an "extension" (a set of extra digits appended to the base), or an increment (a number which is added to the base to obtain the complete TID) While such a solution can be used for the majoπty of banks and processors, not all banks /processors can accommodate this solution. One example is First Data Corporation For its ENVOY protocol, the terminal ID must use the Luhn check as recited in an ISO remark, which adds a checksum digit to the terminal ID to reduce chances of fraud or of mistyped information Thus, to be general enough to handle all bank/ processor situations, a pool of TID's is used The TID's stored in the pool need not be a sequential set of numbers, in fact they can be alpha/ special/ numeric combinations, and the TID's need have no relation to one another. In a preferred embodiment, a TID is represented as a token in a pool that can be associated with a particular transaction.
To provide for this requirement, the VPOS provides a TID pool in tabular form in a database management system (DBMS). This table has two columns: TID NAME & Allocation date/time. If the TID date is null, then the TID is not in use and may be assigned. A date/ time field is utilized to allow TID allocations to expire. TID requests are made utilizing a SQL query on the TID Pool to find the first null or expired date /time, which is replaced with the current date/ time and the TID name returned.
REMOTE VPOS
The unique architecture of the Cardholder 120, Merchant 130 and Gateway 140, as shown in Figure IB, provides communication capability between the modules utilizing the Internet to support linkages 150 and 170. Since the Internet is so pervasive, and access is available from virtually any computer, utilizing the Internet as the communication backbone for connecting the cardholder, merchant and access to the authorizing bank through a gateway allows the merchant VPOS software to be remotely located from the merchant's premises. For example, the cardholder could pay for goods from any computer system attached to the Internet at any location in the world. Similarly, the merchant VPOS system could be located at a central host site where merchant VPOS systems for various merchants all resided on a single host with their separate access points to the Internet. The merchant could utilize any other computer attached to the Internet utilizing a SSL or SET protocol to query the remote VPOS system and obtain capture information, payment administration information, inventory control information, audit information and process customer satisfaction information. Thus, without having to incur the overhead of maintaining sufficient computer processing power to support the VPOS software, a merchant can obtain the information necessary to run a business smoothly and avoid hiring IS personnel to maintain the VPOS system.
VPOS Multi-Merchant Processing Multiple merchant processing refers to the ability of a plurality of merchants to process their individual VPOS transactions securely on a single computer. The architecture relies on each payment page obtaining the merchant name in a hidden field on the payment page. The VPOS engine receives the merchant name with a particular transaction and synchronizes the processing utilizing a Set Merchant method This command causes the VPOS API to look up a unique registry tree based on the merchant name. This process causes the VPOS engine to engage the appropriate configuration to process the transaction at hand utilizing a Registry Tree. A registry tree contains Card Definition Tables (CDT)s, acquirer Definition Tables (ADT)s, Merchant Definition Tables (MDT)s, Protocol Configuration Tables (PCT)s, etc. The CDTs point to specific ADTs since each supported card can be supplied by a distinct acquirer. This is one form of split connection. Each of the ADTs in turn point to PCTs, and some acquirers can support multiple parallel gateways. A merchant's name refers to a unique database in the database management system which contains for example, TIDs.
So, for example, to fully qualify a particular merchant in a multi-merchant system, the acquirer Definition Table is queried to ascertain the particular Gateway (VFITest), then if Bank of Ameπca requires verification of network communication information, the particular CardDT is accessed with for example VISA. The particular merchant will service VISA transactions utilizing a particular acquirer. The particular piece of merchandise will also be detailed in a data base. Finally, the merchant Configurations will 1 also be stored in the database to facilitate E-mail and name lookup.
VPOS CLIENT The interaction between the VPOS and a client commences when a pay page solicits parameters of a transaction. Then, the parameters are validated to be sure the payment instrument, for example, cardnumber is not null. Then, a transaction object is created, eg. AUTHONLY, and the object is initialized and stuffed with parameters of the transaction, eg ao.setpan(accnum), and the object is executed. This execution invokes the VPOS engine. The VPOS engine further validates the parameters based on the particular merchant's configuration. For example, some merchants do not accept American Express Cards, but will take Visa, and all merchants check the expiration date of the card. Assuming a valid and acceptable card has been tendered, then a TID is assigned (expiring, existing TIDs) or block a new TID from the TID Pool. This generates a STAN, XID, RRPID unique tag and creates an initial record in the transaction database which is flagged as before gateway processing in case the transaction crashes and must be backed out. Then the protocol parameters are identified m the registry based on card type, and a particular acquirer identified Then, a protocol object is created and executed to extract results from the protocol object and the before gateway "bit" is flipped to again flag the location of the transaction in the process as it is submitted to the Gateway.
The results received back from the Gateway are placed into a transaction object with is reported back to the pay page and ultimately back to the pay page user.
VPOS Merchant Pay Customization
A novel feature of the VPOS software provides payment page customization based on a merchant's preferences. This feature automatically lists cards that are accepted by a particular merchant based on the active terminal configuration. Each approved card for a particular merchant is linked to the display via an URL that provides a pointer to the credit card information supported by the merchant. Each card has an entry in a data structure referred to as the Card Definition Table (CDT).
A preferred embodiment of the VPOS merchant pay customization software in accordance with a preferred embodiment is provided in Figure 19 which illustrates the logic utilizing a flowchart, and a listing of the source code below. Processing commences at terminal 1900 and immediately flows to function block 1910 where an index variable is initialized for stepping through each of the accepted payment instruments for the merchant's page. Then, at function block 1930, a URL key is obtained associated with the current merchant pay page and index value. The URL key is a registry key name that points to a picture of a credit card that the merchant has associated with the pay page and which the merchant accepts as payment. At output block 1940 the card image associated with the URL key is obtained and displayed on the terminal. The CDT entry is obtained at function block 1950 utilizing the URL key. The CDT is utilized for storing information associated with each card. Then, at decision block 1960, a test is performed to determine if the last payment method card has been processed and displayed on the merchant display. If not, then the index is incremented at function block 1920 and the loop reiterated to process the next card at function block 1930. If all the cards have been processed, then control is returned to the merchant program for processing the transaction at terminal 1970. Figures 20A through 20H are block diagrams and flowcharts setting forth the detailed logic of thread processing in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Figure 20A illustrates a pπor art approach to POS processing utilized in most grocery stores and department stores today. POS Terminal 2001 accepts transactions provided to it one at a time by customers 2000. For each transaction, POS Terminal 2001 builds a transaction request 2002 and transmit it to acquiπng bank 2004 over communications link 2003.
Figure 20B is a data structure 2002 representing a POS transaction request in accordance with a preferred embodiment The data structure 2002 includes a TID field 2005, which identifies the physical terminal from which the transaction originates. In addition to the TID field, the data structure also includes other data 2006 necessary to process a transaction. This data includes such fields as a transaction type, a transaction amount, a currency type (such as U.S. dollars), credit card account number, credit card expiration date, etc
Figure 20C illustrates a VPOS architecture with account requests being processed by a single acquinng bank. VPOS 2007 processes a plurality of customers 2000 concurrently. For each such customer 2000, VPOS 2007 builds a data structure 2010, representing the transaction to be performed for that customer. Each data structure 2010 contains a unique "virtual terminal" ID. VPOS 2007 selects a virtual terminal ID using database 2008. For each data structure 2010, VPOS 2007 initiates communication with acquiring bank 2004 using communication link 2003.
Figure 20D is a data structure 2010 representmg a VPOS transaction request in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The data structure 2010 includes a TID field 2012, which identifies a virtual terminal ID associated with a particular transaction. In addition to the TID field 2012, the data structure also includes other data 2006 necessary to process a transaction. This data includes such fields as a transaction type, a transaction amount, a currency type (such as U.S. dollars), credit card account number, credit card expiration date, etc.
Figure 20E illustrates a TID allocation database 2008 in accordance with a preferred embodiment Database 2008 includes a TID allocation table 2011. TID allocation table 2011 includes a plurality of rows, one for each TID used by each acquiπng bank. One such row 2013 is illustrated in detail Row 2013 includes a good/service order (GSO) identifier 2014, which identifies the order being transmitted, a TID field 2015, which identifies a terminal ID that may be used with a particular acquiπng bank, and an acquiπng bank field 2016, which identifies the acquiring bank for which the TID is valid In addition, row 2013 may optionally include other fields 2017 that may be used in conjunction with the order processing A null GSO value indicates that the TID/acquirer combination is not currently m use.
Figures 20F through 20H are flowcharts of the detailed logic used to perform virtual terminal ID allocation Figure 20F illustrates the main line operation of virtual TID allocation. In step 2020, execution begins In step 2021 , a skeletal transaction request structure is prepared. In step 2022, the mam line routine obtains a virtual TID for inclusion within the transaction request structure, as will be more fully disclosed with reference to Figure 20G, below In step 2023, the routine veπfies that a TID was obtained If the TID was not obtained, for example, if more transactions are currently being processed than there are TIDs, then execution continues to step 2024. In step 2024, the transaction request is put on a queue for future processing. In step 2025, the routine waits for a transaction process to end, which would free up a TID in use. At that point, control resumes from step 2022, and the routine again attempts to obtain a TID.
If the TID was successfully obtained in step 2023, control proceeds to step 2026. In step 2026, the routine submits the transaction to the acquiπng bank. In step 2027, the transaction is processed. In step 2028, the routine makes a database call to free up the TID that was used in the transaction. In step 2029, transaction processing ends.
Figure 20G depicts in detail the process of obtaining a TID from the database. Execution begins step 2040. In step 2041, the routine constructs a database call to reserve a TID for processing, for example, by constructing an SQL statement to retπeve a TID row from the database. In step 2042, the routine executes the database call that was constructed in step 2041. In step 2043, the routine constructs a second database call to extract the TID from the row that was reserved in step 2042. In step 2044, the database call constructed in step 2043 is executed to obtain the TID. In step 2045, a return code is checked to verify whether the TID was successfully obtained. If the TID was successfully obtained, control proceeds to step 2046, which returns to the calling program. If, however the TID was not obtained, control proceeds to step 2047. In step 2047, the routine checks to see whether an excessive number of retπes have already been attempted. If there have been an excessive number of retπes, control proceeds to step 2048, which exits with an error indication. If there has not been an excessive number of retries, control proceeds once again to step 2043 to retry the extraction operation.
Figure 20H depicts the operation of releasing a TID that had been used in a prior transaction. Execution begins in step 2060 In step 2062, the routine constructs a database call to update the row for the selected TID so that the value for the good and service order is null, thereby indicating that the selected TID is not associated with any good or service order, and is therefore free for reuse. In step 2064, the routine executes the SQL statements constructed in step 2062, thereby releasing the TID for use m future transactions. In step 2069, the routine returns to the calling program.
A source code listing for the transaction request processing is provided below in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
#ιnclude "rr.h" #ιfndef_NT #define _NT extern void _setenvp() ; #endif
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // AcquireBillHtml // On Pay page, output form entπes to acquire billing information
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// EStatus AcquιreBillHtml(CWSINT& clWSINT, int nTot, CProf& clProfile, EPCLCurrency eCurrency) {
//Current time time_t tNow; //figure out current year for Credit card expiry struct tm *tmNow; char szYear(DB_YEAR_SZ + 1]; char szAmount[FORMATTED_CURRENCY + 1];
time(δεtNow); tmNow = localtιme(δctNow); strftime(&szYear[0], (sιze_t)DB_YEAR_SZ + 1, "%Y", tmNow); //needs extra 1 for null int nYear = atoι(szYear); /*<TH>Payment Type</TH> \n<TD><INPUT SIZE = 20 NAME=b_instrument VALUE= \"" \ << clProfile.m_b_instrument << " \"></TD>" \ « "*/ clWSINT « "<CENTER><TABLE BORDER=0><CAPTION ALIGN = TOP><B>Bill To</B></CAPTION>\n"; clWSINT << "<TR ALIGN=LEFT><TH>Account Number</TH><TD COLSPAN = 5><INPUT SIZE = 56 MAXLENGTH = "
« ACCT_NUM_SZ « " NAME=b_card> </TD></TR> \n"; clWSINT « "<TR ALIGN=LEFT><TH>Name on Card</TH><TD><INPUT SIZE= 20 MAXLENGTH= " « NAME.SZ
<< " NAME=b_name VALUE=\"" << clProfile.m_b_name << " \"> </TD><TH>Expiration</THχTD>Month <SELECT NAME = b_expire_month><OPTION> 01 \n <OPTION> 02 \n" <<
"<OPTION> 03\n <OF ION> 04 \n<OPTION> 05\n<OPTION> 06 \n<OPTION> 07 \n<OPTION> 08 \n<OPTION> 09\n" «
"<OPTION> 10\n<OPTION> l l \n<OPTION> 12 \n</SELECT> Year < SELECT NAME = b_expire_year><OPTION>" << nYear <<
"<OPTION>" « nYear + 1 « "<OPTION>" « nYear + 2 « "<OPTION>" « nYear + 3 << "<OPTION>" << nYear + 4 « "</SELECT></TDχ/TR> \n" ;
/ /<TH>Expires</TH><TD>Month <INPUT SIZE=3 NAME=b_expire_month> Year <INPUT SIZE=5 NAME=b_expire_^earχ/TD>< /TR> \n"; clWSINT << "<TR ALIGN=LEFT><TH>Address Line 1</TH><TD COLSPAN=5><INPUT SIZE=56 MAXLENGTH= " << ADDR_SZ « " NAME=b_addrl VALUE=\"" « clProfile.m_b_addrl « " \"> </TD>< /TR> \n"; clWSINT « "<TR ALIGN=LEFT><TH>Address Line 2</TH><TD COLSPAN=5><INPUT SIZE=56 MAXLENGTH= " « ADDR_SZ
« " NAME=b_addr2 VALUE= \"" « clProfile.m_b_addr2 « " \"> </TD></TR> \n"; clWSINT « "<TR ALIGN=LEFT><TH>City</TH><TD><INPUT MAXLENGTH= " « CITY_SZ « " NAME=b_city VALUE= \""
« clProfile.m_b_city « " \" > </TD>" « "<TH>State/Province</TH><TD><INPUT MAXLENGTH= " « STATE_SZ
« " NAME=b_state VALUE=\"" « clProfile.m_b_state « "\"> </TD>< /TR> \n"; clWSINT « "<TR ALIGN=LEFT><TH>Country</TH><TD><INPUT MAXLENGTH= " « COUNTRY_SZ
<< " NAME=b_country VALUE=\"" << clProfile.m_b_country « "\"> </TD><TH>Zip/Postal Code</TH><TD><INPUT MAXLENGTH= " « ZIP_SZ << " NAME=b_zιp VALUE=\"" << cIProfile.m_b_zip « "\">
</TD></TR> \n"; clWSINT « "<TR ALIGN=LEFTxTH>Email</TH><TDxINPUT MAXLENGTH= " « BEMAIL_SZ « " NAME=b_email VALUE=\""
« clProfile.m_b_email << " \"> </TD>" << "<TH>Phone</TH><TD><INPUT MAXLENGTH= " « BPHONE_NUM_SZ
<< " NAME=b_phone VALUE= \"" « clProfile.m_b_phone « "\">
</TDχ/TR>\n"; clWSINT << "</TABLEχ/CENTER><P> \n";
//NPW« " NAME=b_addrl > </TD>" << "<TH>Payment
Instrument</TH> \n<TD><SELECT NAME =b_ιnstrument>";
//hack from ini (bug) which pay instruments supported //NPW clWSINT « "<OPTION> Credit Card\n" « "<OPTION> Debit Card\n</SELECTx/TDχ/TR> \n"; CurrFormat(nTot, eCurrency, szAmount); clWSINT « "<CENTER><FONT SIZE=5>Total = " « szAmount « "</FONT></ CENTER>" ; return (eSuccess);
}
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// //PayButtonsHtml
// Output buttons on pay page: return to shop, pay, pay window, // modify order /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// void PayButtonsHtml(CWSINT& clWSINT, char* pszShopUrl, CRRReg& clReg) {
char *pszHomeUrl = clWSINT.LookUpf home_url"); char 'pszModifyUrl = clWSINT. LookUp("modify_url"); char *pszSoftUrl = clWSINT. LookUp("soft_url");
if (IpszHomeUrl) pszHomeUrl = pszShopUrl; //Home Page //if (IpszModifyUrl) pszModifyUrl = pszShopUrl; //Shopping Cart typically
clWSINT « "<CENTERχH4>By pressing the Pay! button I agree to pay the above total amount<br> according to the card issuer agreement<H4></CENTER>\n"; clWSINT « "<CENTER>\n<A HREF = " « pszShopUrl « "> <IMG SRC=" << clReg.m_szReturnShop << " BORDER = 0></A>\n"; #ifdef_SC clWSINT « "<INPUTTYPE = IMAGE NAME = gso SRC = " « clReg.m_szModifyOrder « " BORDER = 0>\n"; #else if (pszModifyUrl) clWSINT « "<A HREF = " << pszModifyUrl « "> <IMG SRC=" « clReg.m_szModifyOrder « " BORDER = 0></A>\n"; #endif clWSINT « "<INPUT TYPE = HIDDEN NAME = home_url VALUE = " « pszHomeUrl « ">\n"
« "<INPUT TYPE = IMAGE NAME = VPOS SRC = " « clReg.m_szPay « " BORDER = 0>\n"
« "<INPUT TYPE = HIDDEN NAME = shop_url VALUE = " « pszShopUrl « ">\n" « "<INPUT TYPE = HIDDEN NAME = store VALUE = " « clWSINT. LookUp(" store") « ">\n"; //Can't be NULL or error previously if (pszSoftUrl) clWSINT « "<INPUT TYPE = HIDDEN NAME = soft_url VALUE = " « pszSoftUrl « ">\n"; clWSINT « "</CENTER>\n"; }
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// DisplayPayPage
// Outputs billing form, buttons, and static gso ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
EStatus DisplayPayPage(CWSINT& clWSINT, CRRReg& clReg, int nError) (
EStatus eStat; char szFileLine[BUFFER_SZ + 1]; char *pszTag, *pszRefererUrl, *pszShopUrl, *pszExePath, *pszServerName; time_t tNow; int nTagExist = FALSE;
HKEY hCardsKey; //To enumerate cards long retCode; int nNoCards;
DWORD dwtype, dwlen;
HKEY hCardKey; char szCardBuf]MAX_PATH + 1], szCardPic[MAX_PATH + 1];
#ifdef_SC
CPOLBk clBkGso; #else char *pszTxn, *pszGsoNum, *ρszGsoOpaque, *pszTot; #endif
//Shipping headers. If come from gso page and cookies are not set, set. CProf *pProfile; pProfile = new CProf(); if (! pProfile) return (eRRNew Failed); eStat = pProfile->Init(clWSINT); if (eStat != eSuccess) return (eStat); //Init failed
#ifdef _SC /*No session cookie for the pay page. This means the user will either use a long term cookie or type in their info each time*/ clWSINT « "Set-Cookie: profile**--" « pProfile->GetCookieLine() « "; path=/\n"; /* if (clWSINT.LookUpC'Server Name")) clWSINT << "; domain = " << clWSINT.LookUpC'Server Name") << ";\n";*/ - I l l -
#endif
#ifdef _SC
/ / Shipping filled in? if (!(pProfile->m_s_name[0] && pProfile->m_s_addrl [0] && pProfile->m_s_city[Oj && pProfile- >m_s_state[0] && pProfile->m_s_zip[0] && pProfile->m_s_country[0] && pProfile->m_s_ship[0])) eStat = DisplayGsoPage(clWSINT, clReg, ERROR_DISPLAY); / /bug, return correct? return eStat;
)
/ /Creates shopping basket from CGI/Cookies eStat = clBkGso.Init(clWSINT, *pProfιle, clReg); if (eStat != eSuccess) return (eStat); / / eRRBasketCreateError
/ / Cookies then other headers clBkGso.ToCookies(clWSINT, REGULAR); #endif
/ /clWSINT « "Pragma: no-cache\n" ; clWSINT « "Content-type: text/html\n\n" ;
/ /Where to position the page, if all information is filled in, here, if (InError) {clWSINT « "<A NAME=jumpχ/A>";j
/ /Output HTML ifstream ifPay; ifPay.open(clReg.m_szPayTemρlate, ιos: :in | ios::nocreate); if (ifPay.failQ) return (eRRCantOpenPayTempIate); / /couldn't read pay template file
/ /HTML Template while (ifPay) ) ifPay.getline(szFileLine, BUFFER_SZ); if (!(pszTag = strstrfszFileLine, DYNAMIC_TAG))) clWSINT « szFileLine << " \n"; else { nTagExist = TRUE; / /Null the tag, Output the beginning of the line,
/ /make the dynamic basket call, output the rest of the line if (strlen(szFιleLιne) == strlen(DYNAMIC TAG)) pszTag[0] = NULL; else { pszTagjO] = (char) NULL; pszTag <-= strlen(DYNAMIC_TAG) + 1 ; / /was 9
} clWSINT << szFileLine;
/ /Dynamic call pszRefererUrl = clWSINT.LookUpf'Referer"); if (IpszRefererUrl) return (eRRNoRefererUrl); pszExePath = clWSINT LookUpf'Executable Path"); if (IpszExePath) return (eRRNoExePath); pszServerName = clWSINT.LookUpC'Server Name"); if (IpszServerName) return (eRRNoServerName); clWSINT << "<FORM METHOD = POST ACTION = http"; if (clReg.m_nUseSSL) clWSINT « "s' , clWSINT « " 11 << pszServerName << pszExePath << "#jump>"
/*clWSINT « <FORM METHOD = POST ACTION = " « pszExePath «
"#jump>";7
/ /Setting Long Cookies clWSINT « <CENTER>If you wish to have billing and shipping defaults set in your browser, check this box "
« "<INPUT TYPE = CHECKBOX NAME=long_cookiesχ /CENTER> \n", / / Fill it in message if (nError) { clWSINT << "<A NAME=jumpx/A>"; clWSINT << '<CENTER><H4>You must fill in <I>all</I> of the billing information except for <I>address line 2</I> and <I>email</I>.</H4></CENTER>";
}
/ /GsoNum #ifdef _SC time(δεtNow); / /For multithreading, append instantiation number clWSINT « "<TABLE ALIGN=RIGHT><TR><TH>Order
Number</TH><TD>" << tNow
« "</TDχ/TRχ/TABLE><BR CLEAR=ALL> \n< INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN NAME=b_gso_num VALUE = " « tNow « ">\n"; #else / /Pay page API: transaction type, GSO #, gso opaque pszGsoNum = clWSINT.LookUp("b_gso_num"); if (pszGsoNum) clWSINT « "<TABLE ALIGN=RIGHT><TR><TH>Order Number</TH><TD>" << pszGsoNum « "</TDχ /TRχ/TABLE><BR CLEAR=ALL> \n<INPUT
TYPE=HIDDEN NAME=b_gso_num VALUE = « pszGsoNum « ">\n"; else { time(&tNow) ; / /For multithreading, append instantiation number clWSINT << "<TABLE ALIGN=RIGHT><TR><TH>Order Number</TH><TD>" « tNow
« "</TDχ/TRχ/TABLE><BR CLEAR=ALL> \n<INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN NAME=b_gso_num VALUE = " << tNow « ">\n";
}
/ /Some pay page only specifics: transaction to execute, gso opaque pszTxn = clWSINT.LookUp("transaction"); if (pszTxn) clWSINT « "<INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN NAME=transaction VALUE = " « pszTxn << ">\n"; pszGsoOpaque = clWSINT. LookUp("gso_opaque"); if (pszGsoOpaque) clWSINT « "<INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN NAME=gso_opaque VALUE = \"" << pszGsoOpaque << " \"> \n"; #endif
#ifdef _SC
/ /Bill to information & Payment Instrument eStat = AcquireBillHtml(clWSINT, clBkGso.GetTot(), *pProfile,
(EPCLCurrency) cIReg.m_eDefaultCurrency); #else
/ /Pay Page alone requires a total pszTot = clWSINT.LookUp("total"); if (IpszTot) return (eRRNoPayTotal); eStat = AcquireBιllHtml(clWSINT, atoi(pszTot), *pProfile, (EPCLCurrency) clReg. m_eDefaultCurrency) ; clWSINT « "<INPUT TYPE=HIDDEN NAME=total VALUE = " « pszTot « "> \n"; #endif if (eStat != eSuccess) return (eStat); / /error from db? within
AcquireBillHtml clWSINT « "<P> \n\
/ /Output Buttons on Form pszShopUrl = clWSINT.LookUp("shop_url"); if (IpszShopUrl)
PayButtonsHtml(clWSINT, pszRefererUrl, clReg); else PayButtonsHtml(clWSINT, pszShopUrl, clReg);
/ /Registry Card LookUp clWSINT << VCENTERxTABLE CELLSPACING = 5><TR><TH>Cards Accepted:</TH>";
RegOpenKeyEx(clReg.m_hStoreKey, "API\ \CDT", 0, KEY_READ, βδhCardsKey); dwlen = sizeof(int);
RegQueryValueEx(hCardsKey, "NoOfRows", 0, δcdwtype, (LPBYTEJ&nNoCards, δsdwlen); for (int l = 0; i < nNoCards; i++) {
RegEnumKey(hCardsKey, i, szCardBuf, MAX_PATH + 1); RegOpenKeyEx(hCardsKey, szCardBuf, 0, KEY_READ, &hCardKey); dwlen = MAX_PATH + 1; retCode = RegQueryValueEx(hCardKey, "CardPicture", 0, &dwtype, (LPBYTE)szCardPιc, &dwlen); if (retCode != ERROR_SUCCESS) return eRRRegistryFailure; clWSINT << " <TD><IMG SRC = " « szCardPic « "></TD>"; RegCloseKey (h CardKey) ;
RegCloseKey(hCardsKey) ; clWSINT « "< /TRχ/TABLE></CENTER>"; clWSINT << "</FORM> \n<HR>\n";
#ifdef SC
/ / Output static HTML Table clBkGso.ToHtml(clWSINT, NOEDIT); / /Output static Shipping information StaticShipHtml(clWSINT, *pProfile); //Also NO_EDIT clWSINT « "<HR> \n";
#else
/ /Pay page alone takes and passes through a gso if (pszGsoOpaque) clWSINT << pszGsoOpaque « " \n";
#endif
/ / Rest of Line from template file if (pszTag) clWSINT « pszTag;
if (nTagExist != TRUE) return(eRRNoDynamicTag) ; else return (eSuccess);
//////////////////////////////// //Receipt Page
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// ////////////////#ifdef_SC
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // StaticShipHtml
// On Pay page, output Static table of shipping information // based on cookies set in prior page
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// void StaticShipHtml(CWSINT& clWSINT, CProf clProfile) { clWSINT « "<CENTER><TABLE CELLSPACINGS OxCAPTION ALIGN = TOP><B>Ship
To<B></CAPTION>\n"; clWSINT « "<TR><TH ALIGN=LEFT>Name</TH><TD>" « clProfile.m_s_name << "</TD>" «
"<TH ALIGN=LEFT> Address Line 1</TH><TD>" « clProfile. m_s_addrl « "</TD></TR>\n"; clWSINT « "<TR><TH ALIGN=LEFT>Address Line 2</TH><TD>" << clProfile. m_s_addr2 << "</TD>" <<
"<TH ALIGN=LEFT>City</TH><TD>" << clProfile. m_s_city « "</TD></TR>\n"; clWSINT « "<TR><TH ALIGN=LEFT>State/Province</TH><TD>" « clProfile.m_s_state << "</TD>" «
"<TH ALIGN=LEFT>Zip/Postal Code</TH><TD>" « clProfile. m_s_zip « "</TD></TR>\n"; clWSINT « "<TR><TH ALIGN=LEFT>Country</TH><TD>" « clProfile.m_s_country « "</TD>" <<
"<TH ALIGN=LEFT>Shιppιng Method</TH><TD>" « clProfile.m_s_ship « "</TD></TR>\n"; clWSINT « "</TABLE></CENTERxP>", }
#endif
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // StaticBillHtml
// On Receipt page, output static table of billing information
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// void StatιcBιllHtml(CWSINT& clWSINT, CProf clProfile) (
/*<TH>PaymentType</TH>\n<TD>" << clProfile.m_b_instrument
« "</TD>7 clWSINT « "<CENTER><TABLE CELLSPACINGS OxCAPTION ALIGN = TOP><B>BiIl To<Bx/CAPTION>\n"; clWSINT « "<TR ALIGN=LEFT><TH>Account Number</TH><TD COLSPAN=3>" « clProfile.m_b_card « ' </TD></TR>\n , clWSINT « "<TR ALIGN=LEFT><TH>Name on Card</TH><TD>" « clProfile. m_b_name <<
"</TD><TD><B>Expιres </B><I>Month</I> " << clProfile. m_b_expιre_month << " <I>Year</I> " << clProfile. m_b_expιre_year << "</TD></TR>\n", clWSINT « "<TR ALIGN=LEFTχTH>Address Line 1</TH><TD COLSPAN=3>" « clProfile.m_b_addrl << "</TD></TR>\n", clWSINT << "<TRALIGN=LEFT><TH> Address Line 2</TH><TD COLSPAN=3>" « clProfile. m_b_addr2 « "</TDχ/TR>\n' , clWSINT « "<TR ALIGN=LEFTχTH>Cιty</TH><TD>" << clProfile m_b_cιty « "</TD>" « "<TH>State/Provιnce</TH><TD>" « clProfile. m_b_state « "</TDx/TR>\n"; clWSINT « "<TR ALIGN=LEFT><TH>Country</TH><TD>" « clProfile.m_b_country « "</TD><TH>Zιp/Postal Code</TH><TD>" << clProfile.m_b_zip « "</TD></TR>\n"; clWSINT « <TR ALIGN=LEFTχTH>Emaιl</TH><TD> « clProfile m_b_emaιl « "</TD>'
« "<TH>Phone</TH><TD> << clProfile m_b_ρhone « </TD></TR> \n", clWSINT « </TABLE></ CENTER ><P> \n",
Default Gateway Configuration
The VPOS is initially shipped enabled to connect to a default gateway with a single instance of a gateway defined that accesses a predefined site for testing of an installation before bringing it online m a production mode The test installation contacts and converses with an actual gateway that simulates live transactions After the installation checks out utilizing a set of test transactions, the test gateway downloads the pre-checked customizations to the installation so that it can switch over to the production acquirer This download processing is enabled in extensions to SET
Internet Transaction Gateway Payment methods that issue cards for conducting business utilize four major entities These entities are the issuer, consumer, merchant and the acquirer The issuing bank that provides the consumer with a credit card are usually not the same bank as the acquiπng bank that serves the merchant When the consumer utilizes a credit card to pay for a purchase, the merchant swipes the card through the POS terminal which makes a connection to the merchant's acquirer via the telephone network and transmits an authorization request with data read from the magnetic stripe The acquirer's host processor, depending on the card number, will either perform local processing or switch the request to the correct issuing bank's host processor through the interchange network In a few seconds, the authorization response is returned to the originating POS indicating either an approval or a rejection
The Internet is a viable infrastructure for electronic commerce Ubiquitous browser software for the World Wide Web provides around-the-clock access to a large base of information content provided by Web servers Utilizing a preferred embodiment, consumers using browsers can shop at virtual stores and malls presented as Web pages managed by the merchants' servers Consumers can make purchases and pay for them using credit cards or other digital payment instruments in a secure manner. For such Internet- based payments to be authorized, a "gateway" is necessary at the back end to channel transactions to legacy processors and interchange networks.
Figure 21 is a detailed diagram of a multithreaded gateway engine in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Processing commences when a TCP transaction 2100 is received by a HTTPS Server 2102 and parsed to an appropriate Web Adaptor 2104 which posts an encrypted set transaction to the multithreaded gateway engine 2110. The encrypted SET request is received at a decryptor 2120, decrypted into a standard SET transaction and authenticated for converting by the forward converter 2124. Inside the forward converter 2124, decides if the request is an original request, and honest retry attempt or a replay attack. The converted transaction is passed to the socket multiplexor 2130 to communicate via an existing communication link 2140 to a host computer. A security logger 2150 is also utilized for passing security records back via a database server 2160 to a database administration application 2190. A transaction logger 2155 also utilizes the database server 2160 to capture transaction logs in a database 2180. Other system administration tasks 2195 include a web server administration task 2190 which logs web hits in a log 2170.
Figure 22 is a flow diagram in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Processing flows from customers 2200 that are paying for products over the Internet or other communication medium utilizing HTTPS or other protocols to one or more merchants 2210, 2220 or 2230 to a gateway 2240 which directs transactions to a particular host processor 2250 for authorization processing in accordance with the present invention.
Internet Payment Authorization The Gateway is a secure computer system that mediates transactions between the merchants' servers and a payment processor. The Gateway supports secure communications between merchants using the Internet on one side, and a processor using standard secure financial networks on the other side. Between the two interfaces, the Gateway maintains a detailed log of all transactions, whether in-progress, completed, or failed. The Gateway accepts transactions from merchants and converts them into legacy compatible formats before forwardmg them to the host processor Responses from the host, after the reverse conversions, will be returned to the originating merchants
The Gateway performs many functions, including
• Receives encrypted credit card transactions from the merchants via the Internet • Unwraps and decrypts transactions
• Authenticates digital signatures of transactions based on certificates
• Supports all transaction types and card types
• Accepts concurrent transactions from each of the merchant servers
• Converts transaction data to legacy formats, forwards the mapped requests (in the clear) to a payment processor over existing communication links
• Converts transaction responses, correlates them with the original requests, and sends the mapped responses back to the merchants
• Provides logging, monitoring, reporting, and system administration
Figure 23 illustrates a Gateway's 2330 role in a network m accordance with a preferred embodiment The Gateway 2330 strictly conforms to all SET stipulations regardmg certificate management, PKCS signed data encapsulation, PKCS encrypted data encapsulation, ASN.1 representation, DER encoding, MIME encapsulation, and message sequencing A merchant server 2300 communicates via the Internet 2310 using the SET protocol 2320 through a gateway server 2330 using a network interface processor 2340 to communicate to a legacy network 2360 in, for example the X 25 protocol 2350 The legacy host 2370 ultimately receives and processes the transaction from the merchant server 2300 without modification to its code
Internet Communication Protocols
As discussed above, the TCP/IP protocol suite is utilized at the transport level At the application level, in compliance with SET, all requests arrive at the Gateway in MIME encapsulated HTTP format Similarly, all responses from the Gateway to the merchant servers will be transferred in HTTP The HTTP protocol stipulates that a request-response pair will go through the same TCP connection and that the originator, in this case a merchant server, will establish a connection to send the request and will take down the connection when it has received the response.
Host Payment Protocols
Message conversions performed by the Gateway will be significantly more than format transliterations: per-protocol differences in data elements and message semantics must be considered carefully. Some of the transaction types that are supported are listed below.
Figure imgf000123_0001
Host Communications Protocols A virtual, private network between the Gateway and the host processor is established to expedite host communication. In addition, two Network Interface Processors (NIP)s - a "near end" NIP that interfaces to the Gateway and a "far end" NIP that interfaces to the host. The NIPs will handle virtual connections between themselves. The far-end NIP will take care of specific communication details. The near-end NIP is an IP-addressable device that converts between TCP messages and packets. It is installed on a public network 2330, which is a LAN outside the corporate firewall. The Gateway, on the secure public network 2330, utilizes TCP/IP 2320 to communicate with the near-end NIP.
GATEWAY FEATURES
Because the Gateway must sustain reliable operations and enable graceful evolution, it is designed with some important attributes, including: Security, Availability, Performance, Scalability, and Manageability.
Security
Channel Security
At the application level, SET provides signed and encrypted data encapsulations of payment information portions of the transaction messages. Transport-level encryption of the entire message packet is required for additional security. The HTTPS protocol - i.e., HTTP over SSL 3.0 - is utilized between the merchants and the Gateway. The virtual connections between the near-end NIP and the host are part of a private network. The termination will occur outside the firewall. Data between the Gateway and the host is sent in the clear with no encryption. In this network configuration, a transaction between a merchant's VPOS and the host will cross the firewall four times: SET request from VPOS to Gateway, legacy request from Gateway to NIP, LEGACY response from NIP back to Gateway, and SET response from Gateway back to VPOS.
Certificate Management Payment Protocol Certificates
The Gateway uses certificates to authenticate the two parties involved in each MOSET transaction. Through a Certificate Authority, one certificate is issued for the Gateway and one certificate for each of the merchant servers.
Secure Channel Certificates SSL will require separate certificates for the Gateway and the merchants. Availability
Site redundancy and location redundancy allows the Gateway to sustain service through virtually instantaneous recover}* from internal failures or external disasters that cause physical damages to the system. Minimum-outage recovery is possible with redundant configurations of important components.
Site Redundance,
The Gateway supports connections to a proprietary bank network and supports mirrored disk arrays.
Location Redundancy The Gateway architecture supports location redundancy where a secondary remote system is connected to the primary system via dedicated WAN links for software-driven database duplication.
Scalability
The Gateway software architecture, the choice of third-party software components, and the selection of hardware platforms enable the system to gracefully adapt and evolve to take on new demands in different dimensions.
The Gateway resides on an HP 9000 that is housed in a standard 19" EIA rack.
Gateway Hardware Configuration
Figure imgf000125_0001
650 MB CD-ROM Drive
HP-UX 10.10 Operating System (with two-user license)
4 HP-PB Slots
Additions
SCSI-2 Disk Controller to support disk mirroring over dual SCSI-2 buses
2 GB Internal SCSI-2 Disk Drive, 20MB/ s transfer rate, not mirrored for systems software and swap space
4 GB External High-Availability Disk Arrays for databases - total of x 2 MB modules required
4 GB DAT drive with data compression
HP-PB Slot Expansion Option provides 4 additional HP-PB slots for penpheral controllers
FDDI interface cards (each card uses 2 HP-PB slots)
Option for eight-user license for HP-UX
Cryptographic Hardware
The encryption and decryption algorithms used in processing SET/ SSL messages require significant computational power. A "security processor" is deployed with the Gateway to boost the performance of cryptographic algorithms. The processor is a networked peripheral device to the HP 9000 server. It provides cryptographic services suitable for SET/ SSL processing, and its services are accessible via calls to software libraries running on HP-UX. Figure 24 is a block diagram of the Gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
Gateway Architecture Operating System Software
The Gateway runs under the HP-UX Version 10.10 operating system and is upgraded to support future significant system releases. HP-UX 10.10 conforms to major standards, including: • X/Open UNIX 95 (conforming with the Single UNIX Specification, SPEC 1 170)
• X/Open Portability Guide Issue 4 Base Profile (XPG4) OSF AES
• IEEE POSIX 1003.1 and 1003.2
• AT&T System V Interface Definition (SVID3 base and kernel extensions subset) Level 1 API support • UC Berkeley Software Distribution 4.3 (BSD 4.3) including such features as job control, fast file system, symbolic links, long file names, and the C shell
• System V.4 File System Directory Layout
This compliance with various software standards assures that while a preferred embodiment of the invention is disclosed in association with a best mode of practicing the invention other similar software and hardware environments can be readily substituted without undue experimentation .
Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) Software
The Gateway uses Oracle7 Server version 7 3 as the RDMBS and will be upgraded to use future significant system releases The multi-threaded, multi-server architecture of Oracle7 provides applications with scalability to high-volume transaction workloads. When deployed with the HP 9000 K-Class platform, Oracle? performs a symmetrically parallel database operation across all available processors In addition, Oracle7 includes options for creating high- availability systems:
• The Oracle7 Parallel Server option extends the reliability of applications by transparently harnessing the power of clustered computers in a single logical processing complex that can tolerate individual machine failures.
• Oracle7 Symmetric Replication provides high data availability. Data can be replicated from the primary system to one or more alternative sites. HTTP Server
The Gateway utilizes Netscape's Enterprise Server 2.0 as the HTTP server. The server is designed for large-scale Internet commerce deployment, Enterprise Server 2.0 achieves performance and reliability with such features as optimized caching, SMP support, enhanced memory management, and SNMP-based performance monitoring. Efficient process management features minimize system load and increase server reliability. Secuπty features are provided using the SSL 3.0 protocol.
Protocol Stacks
Internet and LAN - The TCP/ IP protocol stack will be provided as part of the HP-UX operating system.
Other Application-Level Protocols
Application-level protocols enable client-server interoperability Each of the following protocols are transported using TCP or UDP
• HTML. HTML will be used to define screens for Gateway system administration. • HTTP. The HTTP layer is part of Enterprise Server 2.0. The server is administered with a Web browser.
• SQL*Net. The Gateway's Oracle7 database can be accessed by administration clients using SQL*Net. Administration software can establish database connectivity to retπeve data for generating transaction reports • SNMP. Enterprise Server 2 0 can be monitored using SNMP The Gateway utilizes SNMP for remote system management
Transaction Performance Monitoring and Measurement
• The "hits" performance indicators are available from the Web server. Statistics can be generated at any time to highlight the load pattern or to pmpomt the time when the server was most active. • Gateway statistics about transaction requests (by transaction type) and transaction results (e.g. , success, failed due to host, failed due to authentication, etc ) can be determined at any time for a particular time interval by generating a report.
The Gateway is upgradeable to interoperate with a real-time event monitoring system such as OpenVision's Performance Manager
TokenOpaque Contents
The Gateway requires information captured at the time of an AuthReq that must be repeated to the host at the time of the associated CapReq The mechanism of choice (built into SET) for this is enabled utilizing this data in the TokenOpaque token of the CapToken which is sent m an AuthRes This CapToken is stored at the Merchant system and represented to the Gateway at the time of the CapReq The format of an TokenOpaque is an OctetStnng.
The following general format (not specific to LEGACY) is proposed for captuπng this information:
Field Name Field Data Type Explanation/Example
VersionName char(8) e.g. "LEGACY"
VersionRevision char(8) e.g "1 0" (generally <major, mιnor>)
PILength integer length of PI data
PI unsigned char(PILength) strongly encrypted
HostSpecDataLengt integer length of host specific data h
HostSpecData unsigned host specific data char(HostSpecDataLength)
Host Specific Data (LEGACY-only)
For "LEGACY" version " 1 0", it is proposed that newhne separated "name [length] = value" pairs be used to store the host specific data A null character will terminate the host specific data. The following host specific data (name value pairs) will need to be included BrandlD
CPSACIFlag
CPSTransactionld
CPSVa dationCode
VisaResponseCode
MerchantCategoryCode
EntryMode
NOTE PI contains PAN and ExpiryDate
Certificate Processing
Merchants require a mechanism for verifying legitimate cardholders is of valid, branded bankcard account numbers A preferred embodiment utilizes technology to link a cardholder to a specific bankcard account number and reduce the incidence of fraud and thereby the overall cost of payment processing Processing includes a mechanism that allows cardholder confirmation that a merchant has a relationship with a financial institution allowing it to accept bankcard payments Cardholders must also be provided with a way to identify merchants they can securely conduct electronic commerce Merchant authentication is ensured by the use of digital signatures and merchant certificates.
In a preferred embodiment, a holder of a payment instrument (cardholder) surfs the web (Internet) for required items This is typically accomplished by using a browser to view on- ne catalog information on the merchant's World Wide Web page However, order numbers can be selected from paper catalogs or a CD-ROM and entered manually into the system This method allows a cardholder to select the items to be purchased either automatically or manually
Then, the cardholder is presented with an order form containing the list of items, their pπces, and totals The totals could include shipping, handling and taxes for example The order form is delivered electronically from the merchant's server or created on the cardholder's computer by electronic shopping software An alternative embodiment supports a negotiation for goods by presenting frequent shopper identification and information about a competitor's pπces
Once the pπce of goods sold and the means of payment has been selected, the merchant submits a completed order and the means for payment The order and payment instructions are digitally signed by cardholders who possess certificates. The merchant then requests payment authoπzation from the cardholder's financial institution Then, the merchant sends confirmation of the order, and eventually ships the goods or performs the requested services from the order. The merchant also requests payment from the cardholder's financial institution.
Figure 1C is a block diagram of a payment processing system m accordance with a preferred embodiment. The Certificate Issuance at the Bank Web Site 162 resides at the bank web site 182. It is utilized for issuing SET complaint / X.500 certificates to consumers. The implementation of this system may vary from one bank to another. However, the system gathers consumer's personal information, and after processing the information, the system issues a certificate along with a payment instrument to the consumer.
The Single Account Wallet 160 at the bank web site 182 represents the MIME message that is created by the Certificate Issuance system This MIME message contains a VeriFone wallet. The VeriFone wallet contains a single payment instrument and the certificate associated with it. For secuπty reasons, the private key is not included in the wallet. The has to specify a pπvate key before using the instrument for payment When the consumer is issued the certificate, this MIME message is sent to the browser The browser launches the Certificate Installation application 174, 144 which is defined as a helper application in the browser The Certificate
Installation application 174, 144 reads the MIME message and install the wallet into the wallet database 158.
Vaπous helper applications 198, 172, 174, 176 are provided to make the consumer's shopping expeπence easy and efficient including the following helper applications. The Paywindow helper application 188 is utilized by the consumer to authorize the payment to the merchant, to administer their wallets, to review their previously completed payment transactions and to perform housekeeping activities on the wallets. This application is defined as a "helper' application on the consumer's desktop The browser launches this application when the merchant system sends a MIME message requesting payment.
The Pay Window Setup Helper application 172 is used by the consumer to install helper applications and other modules from the web site onto the consumer desktop When a consumer attempts to install an application for a first time, the consumer does not have a helper application on the desktop Thus, the first time installation of an application requires a consumer to perform two steps First the user must download the system package to their desktop and then the user must run setup to decompress and install the system. Thereafter, whenever the consumer gets a new release of system software, the browser launches this helper application which in turn installs the appropriate other system modules.
The Certificate Installation Helper Application 174 is utilized to install a wallet that is issued by a bank. When the bank's certificate issuance web system sends the MIME message containing the VeriFone wallet, the browser launches this application This application quenes a consumer to determine if the payment instrument contained in the wallet is to be copied to an existing wallet or to be kept in the new wallet This application then installs the payment instrument and the certificate into the wallet database 158.
The Certificate Issuance CGI scripts 162 and the Single Account Wallet 160 at the Bank Web Site 182 is processed as described in the native system. The Certificate Installation Applet of the Bank Web Site 182 is utilized by the Certificate Issuance CGI scπpts 162 system to deliver a consumer's certificate to the consumer's desktop.
Figure 26 is an architecture block diagram m accordance with a preferred embodiment of the subject invention. Processing commences at function block 2600 where the Graphical User Interface (GUI) part of the application is initialized. The GUI application 2600 provides the consumer with support for ordering and making payments during the shopping process. There are also GUI components provided for wallet creation, importing, certificate and payment method creation and maintenance, and for transaction register review and reporting. The screen designs, and their associated logic, for the helper applications and applets are individually discussed in detail below
The Certificate Manager 2604 manages the automatic downloading of a consumer's certificate from a bank, validation of a consumer's and a merchant's certificates and automatic requisition of certificate renewal. The Payment Manager 2606 coordinates and completes the payment request that is received from the merchant system. The payment request is received via a MIME message in the native code implementation or via an applet in the Java implementation. The payment request received contains the final GSO, Ship-To name, merchant certificate, merchant URL, coupons and the payment amount. The manager 2606 then communicates with the payment related GUI component to interact with the consumer to authorize and complete the payment transaction. The manager is also responsible for determining the payment protocol based on the consumer's payment instrument and the merchant's preferred payment protocol.
The manager 2606 includes a well defined Application Programming Interface (API) which enables OEMs to interface with the payment manager 2606 to make payments to specific HTTP sites. The detailed logic associated with the payment manager 2606 is presented in Figure 27.
The payment manager 2606 enforces standard operations in the payment process. For example the receipt and the transaction record can automatically be transferred to the Wallet file once the payment is completed. The payment manager architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment is presented in Figure 27. A user interfaces with the payment manager 2730 via a user interface 2700 that responds to and sends a variety of transactions 2710, 2708, 2706, 2704 and 2702. The transactions include obtaining the next record, payment record, receipt, acceptance of the payment instrument and GSO components. In turn, the payment manager 2730 sends transactions 2714 and receipts 2720 to the wallet manager 2722 and receives payment instruments, certificates and private keys from the wallet manager 2722.
The payment manager 2730 also sends and receives transactions to the protocol manager 2770 including a merchant's payment message 2760, a consumer certificate and PK handle 2750, a merchant URL 2742, a payment 2740, a signed receipt 2734 and a GSO, Selected Payment Protocol and Selected Payment Instrument 2732. The payment manager 2730 also accepts input from the payment applet or MIME message from the merchant as shown at function block 2780. One aspect of the payment processing is a Consumer Payments Class Library (CPCL) 2770 which encapsulates the payment protocols into a single API. By encapsulating the payment protocols, applications are insulated from protocol variations. A SET Protocol provides an implementation of the client-side component of the Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) Protocol. A complete implementation of the client-side component of the CyberCash micro-payment protocol is also provided.
The Wallet Manager 2722 provides a standard interface to the wallet. It defines the wallet database structures and the payment instrument data structures, controls the access to the wallet and provides concurrency checking if more than one application attempts to open the same wallet. The interface to the wallet manager 2722 is published to allow OEMs to interface with the wallet manager and access the wallet database.
The wallet manager consists of the following sub-components: Wallet Access. This component provides an interface to read and write wallet information.
Transaction Manager. This component provides an interface to read and write transaction corresponding to a wallet into the wallet database.
Payment Instrument Manager. This component manager provides a common interface to the specific payment instrument access components. Credit Card Access, Debit Card Access, Check Access. These components deal with a specific payment instrument.
A Data Manager provides storage and retrieval of generic data items and database records. It is assumed that data fields, index fields or entire data records can be marked as encrypted and the encryption process is largely automated. The data manager has no specific knowledge of database records appropriate to different payment methods. This layer is separated out so as to reduce changes required when new payment methods are introduced. However RSA key pairs and certificates might be considered as "simple" data types. This component also provides an abstraction which supports wallet files on computer disk or contained in smart cards.
The Open Data Base Connectivity (ODBC) /Java Data Base Connectivity (JDBC) component provides Data Base Connectivity where formal database components are required. An embodiment of the Smart Card Wallet allows wallet data to be stored and/ or secured by a cryptographic token.
A preferred embodiment includes a single file or directory of files comprising a "wallet" which contains personal information and information about multiple payment methods with the preferred implementation. These payment methods ( Visa cards, debit cards, smart cards, micro-payments etc. ) also contain information such as account numbers, certificates, key pairs, expiration dates etc. The wallet is envisaged to also contain all the receipts and transaction records pertaining to every payment made using the wallet. A Cryptographic API component provides a standard interface for RSA and related cryptographic software or hardware. This support includes encryption, signature, and key generation. Choice of key exchange algorithm, symmetric encryption algorithm, and signature algorithm should all be configurable. A base class stipulates generic behavior, derived classes handle various semantic options (e.g. software based cryptography versus hardware based cryptography.)
The Cryptographic Software portion provides RSA and DES support. This may be provided utilizing the SUN, RSA or Microsoft system components depending on the implementation selected for a particular customer. Cryptographic Hardware creates a lower level API which can underpin the Cryptography API and be utilized to replace Cryptography Software with an off the shelf cryptography engine. The message sequence charts describe the flow of messages/data between the consumer, the browser and /or the various major components of the Semeru system. The major components of the system are the Merchant system which includes the VPOS, the PayWindow, and the Payment Gateway. The merchant system allows a consumer to shop, accept the payment transactions sent by the PayWindow application, and send payment transactions to the acquiring bank. The Consumer Payments Class Library (CPCL) module is a layer within the application which sends the payment transactions, securely, from the consumer to the merchant.
Figure 28 is a Consumer Payment Message Sequence Diagram in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the invention. The diagram presents the flow of messages between the consumer, the browser, the merchant system, the PayWindow application, and CPCL. This message flow describes the payment process from the time an order is completed and the consumer elects to pay, to the time the payment is approved and the receipt is returned to the consumer. The difference between the Native implementation and Java implementation of the PayWindow application is in the delivery of the order information to the PayWindow. Once the order information is received by the PayWindow, the flow of messages/ data is the same for both implementations. In the case of the Native implementation, the order information is delivered via a MIME message. This MIME message is sent to the PayWindow by the browser via a document file. In the Java implementation, the order information is delivered to the PayWindow by an applet. The merchant system sends an applet with the order information to the browser which in turn delivers the order to the PayWindow. Once the order is received, the PayWindow interacts with the consumer and the Protocol modules for the completion of the payment process.
Enters Order and Clicks Calculate Order 2820
This message represent the consumer order entry and the clicking of the 'Calculate Order' button. The consumer's shopping experience is all condensed into this one message flow for the purpose of highlighting the payment process. The actual implementation of the shopping process varies, however, the purpose does not, which is the creation of the order. Order 2830
This message represents the order information which is sent by the browser to the merchant via an HTML form.
Payment Applet with GSO, PPPs, AIs, merchant certificate and URL 2840 On receipt of the order, the merchant system calculates the payment amount. This message represents the HTML page which is sent by the merchant system detailing the payment amount along with the Java payment applet which contains the GSO, PPPs, AIs, merchant certificate and URL.
Run Payment Applet 2845
The Java enabled browser runs the Payment applet. The applet displays a button called "Pay" for the consumer to click. This is embedded in the HTML page delivered by the merchant.
Clicks Pay 2850
This message represents the clicking of the Pay button on the browser by the consumer after confirming the payment amount.
GSO. PPPs. AIs. merchant certificate and URL 2860
This message represents the GSO, PPPs, AIs, merchant certificate and the merchant URL carried by the Java applet. The Java applet now delivers these to the PayWindow application. Merchant certificate 2862
This message represents the merchant's certificate which is sent to the CPCL module for checking the validity of the merchant.
Merchant's validity 2864
The CPCL modules examines the merchant's certificate and send this message to the PayWindow indicating whether or not the merchant is a valid merchant.
Wallet, Payment Instruments 2866 This message represents the wallets and payment instruments that is displayed to the consumer. Not all payment instruments from a wallet is shown to the consumer. Only the ones accepted by the merchant is shown.
Payment Instrument 2868 This message represents the payment instrument selected by the consumer. This message is created in the current design when the user double clicks on the payment image in the "Select Payment Method" Window.
GSO 2870 This indicates that the GSO is displayed to the consumer in the "Make Payment Authorization" screen.
Authorization of Payment 2872
This message represents the authorization of the payment by the consumer. The consumer authorizes the payment by clicking the 'Accept' button on the "Payment Authorization" screen.
Decide Payment Protocol 2874
Once the consumer authorizes the payment, the payment protocol is decided by PayWindow based on the merchant's Payment Protocol Preferences and the consumer selected payment instrument.
Payment Authorization 2875 These messages represent the merchant's URL, the GSO, payment protocol (PP) to use, account number, certificate and the pπvate key handle (PK) associated with the payment instrument which is sent to the protocol module.
GSO with Payment Authorization 2876
This message represents the payment instructions which is sent by the protocol module to the Merchant system. The GSO, PI, consumer certificate and PK is packaged based on the payment protocol.
Signed Receipt 2878
This message represents the digitally signed transaction receipt received by the protocol module from the merchant.
Save Receipt with hash value 2880 The digitally signed transaction receipt is saved by the PayWindow for future reference.
Payment Successful 2882
This indicates that the transaction receipt and the 'payment successful' have been displayed to the consumer.
Certificate Processing A payment instrument must be certified by a "certificate issuing authority" before it can be used on a computer network. In the case of credit card payments, the issuer may be one of the card issuing banks, but it might also be a merchant (eg SEARS), a transaction acquiring bank or an association such as VISA or Mastercard.
Payment instrument information is stored in the consumer's wallet. The certificate which authorizes the payment instrument will be stored along with that data in a secured database. The process of acquiring a certificate is described below. A certificate can be delivered to a consumer in a preconfigured wallet The consumer receives a wallet which contains the certificate together with the necessary details associated with a payment instrument including a payment instrument bitmap which is authorized by a certificate issuing authority or the agencies represented by the issuing authority Obtaining a certificate
A consumer will deliver or cause to be delivered information to a certificate issuing authority. Figure 29 is an illustration of a certificate issuance form in accordance with a preferred embodiment. A user may fill out the form on-line, on paper and mail it in, or get his bank or credit card company to deliver it The consumer delivered data will usually contain a public key belonging to a security kev pair generated by consumer software. This information will normally be mailed to the consumer's address and actuated by a telephone call from the consumer. The certificate authority takes this information and uses it to validate that he is indeed entitled to use the payment method. This processing normally takes a few days to accomplish Information will normally be exchanged with the organization issuing the payment method in the physical space if there is one, and with credit agencies. The certificate information is loaded into the consumer's software to enable payment processing to proceed online.
In some cases the consumer will be able to select details about a payment instrument holder (wallet) he desires to own This may be the icon representing a holder, the access password or other information. After creating the certificate, the issuing authority can use information received in the certificate application to create a custom payment instrument holder ready to use. This payment instrument holder will contain the following information. Payment instrument information including card number 2900 and expiration date 2902. Personal information including name 2904. address 2906, social secuπty number 2908 and date of birth 2910.
The associated certificate ( eg X509 standard ), an associated public key or in some cases public/pπvate key pair ( eg RSA), and an approved bitmap representing the payment instrument are provided to the requesting consumer. Figure 30 illustrates a certificate issuance response m accordance with a preferred embodiment. An approved bitmap for a VISA card is shown at 3000 Also a default payment holder 3010 and a default payment holder name are provided with the certificate issuance. After the consumer aquires the payment instrument holder 3010, the payment instrument holder is immediately visible to him m his collection of payment instrument holders Figure 31 illustrates a collection of payment instrument holders in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The predefined payment instrument holder 3100 is the same JOHN's WALLET that was predefined based on defaults by the certificate issuance form Figure 32 illustrates the default payment instrument bitmap 3200 associated with the predefined payment instrument holder 3210 resulting from the consumer filling m and obtaining approval for a VISA card.
Figure 33 illustrates a selected payment instrument with a fill in the blanks for the cardholder in accordance with a preferred embodiment Next time the payment instrument holder is opened in a payment context the certificate issuing authority's approved instrument bitmap can be used to select the payment instrument and utilize it to make purchases. Figure 34 illustrates a coffee purchase utilizing the newly defined VISA card m accordance with a preferred embodiment of the invention.
Figure 35 is a flowchart of conditional authorization of payment in accordance with a preferred embodiment. Processing commences at 3500 where the program initializes the connection between the cardholder and the merchant for the purposes of shopping. After the cardholder completes shopping, a new SSL connection is established which provides authenticating information to the merchant. At this point the merchant is able to execute payment functionality (based on SSL or SET) conditionally, based upon the quality and character of the digital signature and the certificate used to validate said signature. Then, at function block 3510, the cardholder selects the payment instrument for the particular transaction Payment instruments could include VISA, MASTERCARD, AMERICAN EXPRESS, CHECK, SMARTCARD or DEBIT CARDS. The payment method is then submitted to the merchant at function block 3520 The merchant then initializes the SET connection to the acquiring bank at function block 3530 if the connection is not already established Then, at function block 3540, the certificate is submitted to the merchant from the acquiπng bank. The certificate includes a public key portion and a pπvate key used as an irrebu table digital signature to authenticate the parties to the transaction. The certificate also includes information on the level of credit risk which allows a merchant to conditionally decide on the authoπzation or rejection of credit under a particular payment instrument based on their risk level and the merchant's personal comfort level with the ability of the cardholder to pay This processing has not previously been possible because the information returned from the authorizing bank did not include a level of credit πsk a cardholder posed, it only contained credit rejected or approved. A detailed description of the gateway internals is presented below in accordance with a preferred embodiment.
Gw ClearSetRequestHandler Figure 51 depicts a flow diagram for the GatewayClearSetRequestHandler routine. Execution begins in Step 5105. In Step 5110 an SET analysis routine is called to analyze the SET request, as will be more fully disclosed below. Step 5110 sets a status flag indicating the next stage to be performed by the Gateway. In Step 5120 the Gateway checks to see whether the status is set to indicate that a response should be provided to the user. If so, execution proceeds to Step 5190, which ends the request handling routine and returns control to a calling routine, which then provides a response to the user. Otherwise execution proceeds to Step 5130. In Step 5130, the Gateway checks to see if the status is set to indicate that forward translation is required Forward translation is necessary to translate an outgoing message into a format that can be understood by the host computer. If forward translation is indicated, execution proceeds to Step 5135. In Step 5135, the outgoing message is forwarded translated, as more fully disclosed below with respect to Figure 53. If no forward translation is indicated, for example, if an already-translated transaction is being retried, execution proceeds to Step 5140. In Step 5140, the Gateway checks to see if the next step is communication to the host. If so, the Gateway proceeds to Step 5145, and initiates host communication as will be more fully discussed below with respect to Figure 54. If not, execution proceeds to Step 5150. In Step 5150, the Gateway checks to see whether reverse translation is indicated. Reverse translation translates a response from a host into a format useable by the calling routine. If reverse translation is indicated, execution proceeds to Step 5155, and the reverse translation is performed, as will be more fully discussed below with respect to Figure 55. In any case, after either forward translation in Step 5135, host communication in Step 5145, or reverse translation in Step 5155, control returns to Step 5120 for further processing. As will be more fully disclosed below, the forward translation, host communication, and reverse translation routines manipulate status indicators to prevent the occurrence of an infinite loop.
The Gw_ClearSetRequestHandler routine as depicted in Fig. 51 may be implemented using the following C++ code:
int Gw_ClearSetRequestHandler(CPCLRequest *pRequest) gwAction action; char fatalError;
CPCLCCRequest *pVehιcle = (CPCLCCRequest *) pRequest;
CGW_Engine *setTrans = (CGW_Engine *) pVehicle- >GetContext();
action = setTrans->AnalyzeSetRequest(pVehicle, &fatalError);
while ( (actιon!=GW_PROCEED. TO_RESPOND) && (IfatalError) ) { switch (action) { case GW_PROCEED_TO_FWD_XLAT: action = setTrans->TranslateForward(pVehιcle); break;
case GW_PROCEED_WITH_HOST_COMMS: action = setTrans->DoHostCommunication(pVehicle); break;
case GW_PROCEED_TO_REV_XLAT: action = setTrans->TranslateReverse(pVehιcle); break;
case GW_PROCEED_TO„RESPOND: default: break;
// Response should be built, return up the protocol
// stack so that it will encode and then crypt our response. if (fatalError) {
/ / Set an error code for the protocol stack. pVehιcle->SetError(eEInvahdRequest); retum(O), } else { return) 1), I )
AnalvzeSetRequest
Figures 52A and 52B describe the AnalyzeSetRequest routine This routine is by Step 5110 as illustrated in Figure 51 Execution begins in Step 5200 In Step 5205 the vaπous fields in the SET record are obtained, as will be more fully disclosed below with respect to Figures 56A and 56B. In Step 5210 the Gateway checks the retry count A retry count is zero indicates that the request being analyzed is a new request, and control proceeds to Step 5212, indicating a new request If the retry account is non-zero, this means that the request is a retry of a pπor request, and control proceeds to Step 5214 where a retry is indicated.
Following either step 5212 or 5214, execution proceeds to Step 5215. In Step 5215 the
Gateway checks to see whether the request represents a "stale request," as will be more fully descπbed below with respect to Figure 57 In Step 5220, the Gateway tests the result of the stale check from Step 5215 If the request is stale it is marked as stale in Step 5222 Otherwise the record is marked as not stale in Step 5224 Following either Step 5222 or Step 5224, control proceeds to Step 5230 In Step 5230 a message representing the SET request is inserted into the database for tracking purposes, and control proceeds to Step 5240
In Step 5240 the Gateway checks to see if the request had been marked stale in Step 5222. If so, it proceeds to Step 5242, exiting with an error condition. In Step 5245, the Gateway attempts to retπeve from the database a message corresponding to the current SET request, as will be fully disclosed below with respect to Figure 59 Step 5260 checks to see whether the message was successfully retrieved from the database. If the message was not found in the database, this indicates that the SET request represents a new message, and control proceeds to Step 5270 In Step 5270 a new message representing the SET request is added to the database, as is more fullv disclosed below with respect to Figure 60 Because this is a new request, it must be processed from the beginning, including forward translation Therefore, after the new message is added in Step 5270, control proceeds to Step 5275 In step 5275, where a status flag is set indicating that the next step to be performed for this message is for translation If the message was found in Step 5260, this indicates that the request represents a request that is already in progress Therefore, control proceeds to Step 5280 to update the database with current information representmg the request status The update process is descπbed in further detail with respect to Figure 61, below Following Step 5280, control proceeds to Step 5282. In Step 5282 the Gateway checks to see the disposition in which the SET request was left as a result of partial processing This is done, for example, by interrogating fields in the database record that indicate the steps that have already been performed for this request In Step 5283, based upon this status information, the Gateway indicates the next stage of processing to be performed either forward translation, reverse translation, or communication with the host After this status has been set, whether for a new request in Step 5275, or for an already-existing request in Step 5283, control proceeds to Step 5290, which exits the AnalyzeSetRequest routine, returning control to Step 5110 m Figure 51.
The AnalyzeSetRequest routine as depicted in Figs 52A and 52B may be implemented using the following C++ code.
gwAction CGW_Engιne AnalyzeSetRequest(CPCLCCRequest *pVehιcle, char *fatalError)
{ gwAction acuon, gwDBRC dbrc, gwRC re, int retryCount, char staleMsgFlag,
*fatalError = _FALSE, / / Default to "all is OK"
/ / Extract the key SET fields that are required The key / / SET fields contain the primary key elements of the "set sg" // table. if ( (rc=GetSetKeyFields(pVehicle)) != GW_SUCCESS) { switch(rc) { case GW_NOT_SUPPORTED:
BuildSetErrorResponse(pVehicle, ISO_RESP_FUNC_NOT_SUPP); break; default:
BuildSetErrorResponse(pVehicle, ISO_RESP_SYS_MALFUNC); break;
)
*fatalError=_TRUE; / / Only place we return this! return (GW_PROCEED_TO_RESPOND);
else
/ / Set this so that the front-end will be able to tell / / whether enough information was derived from the request / / in order to do update the "setmsg" log. m_haveKeyFields = 1 ;
/ / If the count of SET messages with current xid and rrpidbase is / / non-zero then the message is an honest retry otherwise it / / is a new request. if ( (dbrc=Gwdb_GetSetMsgRetryCount(&retryCount)) == GWDB_SUCCESS) { if (retryCount == 0) m_setRequestClass = GW_SREQCL_NEW_REQUEST; else m_setRequestClass = GW_SREQCL_HONEST_RETRY;
else {
BuildSetErrorResponscfpVehicle, ISO_RESP_SYS_MALFUNC); GW_LogError( LOG_ERR, "Gwdb_GetSetMsgRetryCount() : %d", dbrc); return (GW_PROCEED_TO_RESPOND),
/ / Check whether the message is stale If it is, we still / / insert it into the database shortly but we will not process
/ / it
Gwdb_IsSetMsgStale(&staleMsgFlag), if (staleMsgFlag == _TRUE) m_setRequestDιsposιtιon = GW_SREQDI_STALE, else m_setRequestDιsposιtιon = GW_SREQDI_OK, // Not stale
/ / Log the "SET message in the database If the insert fails // then we must have a replay attack1 dbrc = Gwdb_InsertSetMsg(),
switch (dbrc) { case GWDB_SUCCESS break, case GWDB_DUPLICATE_ON_INSERT
BuιldSetErrorResponse(pVehιcle, ISO_RESP_SECURITY_VIOLATION), dbrc = GwdbJnsertReplayAttackQ, if (dbrc ι= GWDB.SUCCESS) {
GW_LogError( LOG^ERR, 'Gwdb nsertReplayAttack() %d' , dbrc), ) return (GW_PROCEED_l 0_RESPOND), break, default.
BuιldSetErrorResponse(pVehιcle, ISO_RESP_SYS_MALFUNC); GW_LogError( LOG_ERR, "GwdbJnsertSetMsgQ %d", dbrc), return (GW_PROCEED_TO_RESPOND), break, / / If the message is stale do no more. if (m_setRequestDιsposιtιon == GW_SREQDI_STALE) {
BuιldSetErrorResponse(pVehιcle, ISO_RESP_SECURITY_VIOLATION); return (GW_PROCEED_TO_RESPOND);
/ / If we reach this far in this function then: / / 1) the request is new or an honest retry AND / / ii) the request is not stale AND
/ / in) a setmsg record has been added for this request.
/ / If there is already a "host message" then update the key / / with the new retry count If there was not a "host message" / / then insert one. dbrc = Gwdb^GetHostMsgO,
switch(dbrc) { case GWDB_SUCCESS. dbrc = Gwdb_UpdateHostMsgKeys(); break; case GWDB_ROW_NOT_FOUND: dbrc = Gwdb_InsertHost sg(); if (dbrc ι= GWDB_SUCCESS) { BuιldSetErrorResponse(pVehιcle, ISO_RESP_SYS_MALFUNC);
> return(GW_PROCEED_TO_FWD_XLAT); break, default. BuildSetErrorResponsefpVehicle, ISO_RESP_SYS_MALFUNC),
GW_LogEπor( LOG_E , ' Gwdb_GetHostMsg() : %d", dbrc); return (GW_PROCEED„TO_RESPOND); break; if (dbrc != GWDB_SUCCESS) (
BuildSetErrorResponse(pVehicle, ISO_RESP_SYS_MALFUNC) ; GW_LogError( LOG_ERR, "Gwdb_UpdateHostMsgKeys() : %d", dbrc); return (GW_PROCEED_TO_RESPOND);
/ / If this request is an honest retry then determine if we / / can "short circuit" a) the forward translation, b) the
/ / communications to the host or c) the reverse translation / / all of which will save time if (m_setRequestClass == GW_SREQCL_HONEST_RETRY) { switch (m_hostResponseDιsposition) { case GW_HRESDI_UNKNOWN: action = GW_PROCEED_TO_FWD_XLAT; break;
case GW_HRESDI_RECEIVED_OK: action = GW_PROCEED_TO_REV_XLAT; break;
case GW_HRESDI_REV_XLAT_FAILED: action = GW_PROCEED_TO_REV_XLAT; break;
case GW_HRESDI_RECEIVE_FAILED: case GW_HRESDI_TIMEOUT: action = GW_PROCEED_WITH_HOST_COMMS; break;
default- break, return (action);
TranslateForward
Figure 53 depicts the execution of the TranslateForward routine, which is called by Step 5135 in Figure 51. Execution begins at Step 5310. In Step 5320, the Gateway forward- translates the request to prepare it for transmission to the host. Forward translation consists of packaging the fields in the request into a format that is understandable by the legacy system at the financial institution The exact format of the translated request will vary from institution to institution. However, in general, the format will consist of a fixed length record with predetermined fields, using a standard character set such as ASCII or EBCDIC. In Step 5330, the Gateway checks to see whether the translation was successfully performed. If not control proceeds to Step 5340, which returns an error condition. If the translation was successful, control proceeds to Step 5350. In Step 5350, the Gateway sets a status flag to indicate that the next stage to be performed for this SET request is to proceed to host communication. This will be used m the next iteration of the Gw_ClearSetRequestHandler routine as depicted in Figure 51. After the status is set in Step 5350, the translate forward routine returns control in Step 5360.
The TranslateForward routine as depicted in Figure 51 may be implemented using the following C++ code.
gwAction CGW_Engιne::TranslateForward(CPCLCCRequest *pVehicle)
{ gwRC re; gwDBRC dbrc;
re = HM_TranslateForward(m hostSpecificMessage, pVehicle);
if (re == GW_SUCCESS) { return (GW_PROCEED_WITH_HOST_COMMS); }
m_hostRequestDιsposιtιon = GW_HREQDI_FWD_XLAT_FAILED, BuildSetErrorResponse(pVehιcle, ISO_RESP_FORMAT_ERR);
dbrc = Gwdb_UpdateHostMsgRequestDιsρ(), if (dbrc ι= GWDB_SUCCESS) \
GW_LogError( LOG_ERR, Gwdb_UpdateHostMsgRequestDιsp() %d", dbrc); }
return (GW_PROCEED_TO_RESPOND),
DoHostCommunication
Figure 54 depicts the step of host communication, as shown in Step 5145 in Figure 51. Execution begins in Step 5400 In Step 5405 the Gateway obtains from the request object the string representing the request text In Step 5410 it obtains the sequence number for the request. In Step 5415 the Gateway determines the current time, m order to record the time at which the request is made. In Step 5420 the Gateway sends the request to the host and waits for a response from the host When a response is received, execution continues in Step 5425 In Step 5425, the Gateway again checks the current time, thereby determining the time at which a response was received In Step 5430, the Gateway checks to see whether the communication was successfully performed If a communication was not successful, the Gateway records that an error occurred in Step 5432 If the communication was successful, the Gateway, in Step 5435, indicates that the request was successfully sent and responded to In Step 5437, the Gateway sets the response string based upon the response received in Step 5420. In Step 5439 the Gateway sets a status to indicate that reverse translation of the received response is required Regardless of whether the communication was successful or unsuccessful, execution continues to Step 5450 In Step 5450, the database is updated with status information from the host communication In Step 5490, control is returned to the calling routine. The DoHostCommunication routine as depicted m Fig. 54 may be implemented using the following C++ code:
gwAction CGW_Engιne::DoHostCommunication(CPCLCCRequest *pVehicle) { gwHMRC hmrc; gwDBRC dbrc; gwAction action = GW_PROCEED_TO_RESPOND; unsigned char hostRequestMessage[HOSTREQ_SZ+ lJ; int hostRcquestLength = 0; unsigned char hostResponseMessage[HOSTREQ_SZ+l]; int hostResponseLength = 0; long sequenceNo,
HM_GetRequestStπng( m_hostSpecιficMessage, 6chostRequestMessage[0], &hostRequestLength) ;
HM_GetSequenceNo( m_hostSpecificMessage, δtsequenceNo ); time( &m_hostRequestTime ); hmrc = SendToHostAndWaιt(
&hostRequestMessage[0], hostRequestLength, &hostResponseMessage[01, &hostResponseLength); time( &m_hostResponseTιme ), swιtch(hmrc) | case GWHM_SUCCESS: m_hostRequestDιsposιtιon = GW_HREQDI_SENT_OK; m_hostResponseDisposιtιon = GW_HRESDI_RECETVED_OK;
HM_SetResponseStnng( m_hostSpecιficMessage, &hostResponseMessage[0], hostResponseLength) ; action = GW_PROCEED_TO_REV_XLAT; break; case GWHM_SEND_FAILED: m_hostRequestDιsposιtιon = GW_HREQDI_SEND_FAILED; m_hostResponseDisρosιtιon = GW_HRESDI_UNKNOWN; break; case GWHM_RCV_FAILED. m_hostRequestDιsposιtιon = GW_HREQDI_SENT_OK; m_hostResponseDisposιtιon = GW_HRESDI_RECEIVE_FAILED; break;
case GWHM_RCV TIMEOUT: m_hostRequestDisposιtιon = GW_HREQDI_SENT_OK; m_hostResponseDιsposιtιon = GW_HRESDI_TIMEOUT; break;
default: break,
) if (hmrc != GWHM.SUCCESS) {
BuildSetErrorResponse(ρVehicle, ISO_RESPJSSUER NOP);
} dbrc = Gwdb_UpdateHostMsgAllInfo(sequenceNo,
&hostRequestMessage(0], hostRequestLength, &hostResponseMessage[0], hostResponseLength); if (dbrc ι= GWDB_SUCCESS) \
BuildSetErrorResponse(pVehicle, ISO_RESP_SYS_MALFUNC); GW_LogError( LOG_ERR, "Gwdb_UpdateHostMsgAllInfo() : %d", dbrc);
} return (action);
TranslateReverse
Figure 55 depicts the operation of the TranslateReverse routine, as executed in Step 5155 in Figure 51. Execution begins at Step 5500. In Step 5510 the Gateway reverse-translates the response received from the legacy system host. Reverse translation consists of extracting data from the data records received from the legacy system, and placing them in objects so that they are useable by the Gateway In Step 5520, the Gateway checks to verify that translation was successful. If translation was successful control proceeds to Step 5530, where a status flag is set indicating a successful translation If translation was not successful, control proceeds to Step 5540, in which the Status Flag is set to indicate an unsuccessful translation. Regardless of whether translation was successful or unsuccessful, execution proceeds to Step 5550. In Step 5550, a status flag is set to indicate that the next stage for the request is to provide a response from the Gateway This step is always executed, because, regardless of whether the translation or any other aspect of the transaction was successful, a response indicating either success or failure must be returned by the Gateway Control then proceeds to Step 5590, in which the TranslateReverse routine returns control to the calling routine in Figure 51. It will be seen that the TranslateForward routine in Figure 53, the DoHostCommunication routine depicted m Figure 54, and the TranslateReverse routine depicted in Figure 55, each alter the status of the request As a result as the loop depicted in Figure 51 executes a particular request will proceed through all three stages and finally to exit in Step 5190
The TranslateReverse routine as depicted in Figure 55 may be implemented using the following C++ code: gwAction CGW_Engme TranslateReverse(CPCLCCRequest *pVehicle)
{ gwRC re, gwDBRC dbrc; re = HM_TranslateReverse(m_hostSpecιficMessage, pVehicle); if (re == GW_SUCCESS) {
/ / Success, we have a normal PDU to send back to VPOS! // If there is any problem further to this (eg: PCL/ASN libs) / / that the frond-end is responsible for calling the method
/ / LogSetErrorResponse() on this engine instance. m_setResponseClass = GW_SRESCL_APP_NORMAL_PDU; m_setResponseDιsposιtιon = GW_SRESDI_SENT_OK; HM_GetResponseCode(m_hostSpecιficMessage, m_setResponseCode); } else { m_hostResponseDιsposιtιon = GW_HRESDI_REV_XLAT_FAILED; BuildSetErrorResponsefpVehicle, ISO_RESP_INVALID_RESPONSE); dbrc = Gwdb_UpdateHostMsgResponseDιsp(); if (dbrc '= GWDB_SUCCESS) {
GW_LogError( LOG_ERR, "Gwdb_UpdateHostMsgResponseDιsp() %d", dbrc);
}
/ / Whether there was a translation error or not we need to respond. return (GW_PROCEED_TO_RESPOND),
GetSetKevFields
Figures 56A and 56B describe the GetSetKeyFields routine. This routine is called by Step 5205 as illustrated in Figure 52A Execution begins in Step 5600. In Step 5610, the Gateway interrogates the request object to determine the request type In Step 5620, the Gateway determines whether the request type is for authorization only. If the request type is not for authoπzation only, execution proceeds to Step 5625 In Step 5625, the Gateway checks to see whether the request type is for a sale If the request type is neither for authorization only nor for a sale, execution proceeds to Step 5630 In Step 5360, the Gateway indicates that the request type is not a supported request, and proceeds to Step 5635, where it returns to the caller
If the request type is either lor authorization only or for a sale, execution proceeds with Step 5640. In step 5640, the Gateway initializes a container object to represent the request. In
Step 5650, the Gateway extracts the [transaction identifier?] (XID) for the transaction In Step 5652, the Gateway extracts the merchant identifier (MID) for the transaction In Step 5654, the Gateway extracts the [what is the RRPID?] (RRPID) and the terminal identifier (TID) for the request. In Step 5656, the Gateway extracts the retry count associated with the current request In Step 5660, a message data area is initialized with the extracted contents. The message area can then be used for further processing by the called routine In Step 5690, the GetSetKeyFields routine returns control to the caller. The GetSetKeyFields as depicted in Figures 56A and 56B may be implemented using the following C++ code: gwRC CGW_Engιnc .GetSetKeyFιelds(CPCLCCRequest *pVehicle)
{ gwRC transRc = GW_SUCCESS; unsigned int got; char s_RrpidTid[2*XID_SZ]; unsigned long rrpid; unsigned long UdOffset; m_setKeyFιelds.reqType = pVehicle->GetRequestType(); switch ( m_ se tKey Fie Ids. reqType) ( case CPCLRequest::CCAuthOnly: case CPCLRequest: :CCSale:
{ / / Initial cast to correct subclass.
CASNAuthorizationRequestDataContainer *s_req =
((CPCLCCAuthOnlyRequest*)pVehicle)->GetRequestContainer()- >get_data()->get_data(); // id s_req->get_transactιon_ιd()->get_x_id()-> get_value( (unsigned char *) &m_setKeyFields.xid, XID_SZ, θεgot); // mid #ifdef JUNE_3RD strncpy(m_setKeyFιelds.mid, "42581", MID_SZ); #else
/ / TODO. get code from Deepak for pulling MID out of s_req! strncpy(m_sctKeyFields.mιd, "42581", MID_SZ); / /bah! #endif // -- -
// NOTE: We have agreed with VPOS team that the RRPID field
/ / will contain the following:
/ / / / <rrpιd> <space> <tιd> <null>
//
/ / where <rrpιd> is a string representing the rrpid value / / and <tιd> is a stπng representing the tid value. //
/ / memset(s_RrpιdTιd, ' \0', sιzeof(s_RrpιdTid) ); s_req->get_AuthoπzatιonRequestData_extensιons()-> get_auth_req_res_paιr_ιd () - > get_value( (unsigned char *) &s_RrpidTid, sιzeof(s_RrpidTid), &got),
// get rrpid and offset to the tid. sscanf(s_RrpιdTιd, "%d %n", &rrpιd, &tιdOffset); / / rrpidBase and retryCount m_setKeyFιelds retryCount = rrpid % 100; m_setKeyFιelds.rrpιdBase = rrpid - m_setKeyFields.retryCount;
// tid strncpy(m_setKeyFιelds.tιd, (s_RrpιdTιd+tιdOffset), TID_SZ); / / reqDate
GW_GetTιmeFromASNTιme( &(m_setKeyFields.merchantTime), s_req->get_authonzation_request_date() ); break;
case CPCLRequest::CCAuthReversal: / / == Void case CPCLRequest::CCCredιtReversal: case CPCLRequest .CCCapture. case CPCLRequest.. CCCredit* // == Refund | Return case CPCLRequest .CCCaptureReversal. / / == Void / / case eBallnquiry
transRc = GW_NOT_SUPPORTED; break; default transRc = GW_NOT_SUPPORTED, break,
} / / Initialize the host message will with the key fields "in the clear"' if (m_hostSpecιficMessage == NULL) { transRc = GW_FAILED,
} else { HM mtιalιze(m_hostSpecιficMessage, &m_setKey Fields),
} return (transRc),
Gwdb IsSetMsgStale
Figure 57 depicts the GwdbJsSetMsgStale routine This routine is called by Step 5215 as illustrated in Figure 52A Execution begins in Step 5700 In Step 5710, the Gateway checks to see whether this is the first time the GwdbJsSetMsgStale has been called for this request If this is the first time, Steps 5715 through 5730 are performed, otherwise those steps are skipped In Step 5715, a field representing the message life is initialized to a predetermined duration The message life is a field that will be used to determine how long the message representing the transaction will remain valid The use of the message life field prevents a transaction that is effectively lost due to extensive processing delays from being processed. In Step 5720, the Gatew ay checks to see if the value of the message life is equal to zero If the message life is equal to zero, a default value, 1 e , 300 seconds or 5 minutes, is assigned to the message life m Step 5725 In Step 5730, an indicator for this request is set to indicate that first time processing has aheady been performed for this request This flag is the same flag interrogated in Step 5710, and is used to prevent successive reinitialization of the message life field
In Step 5740, the Gateway checks to see whether the merchant s time stamp, plus the value of the message life, is less than the time of the request If so, then the request is considered stale, and is marked stale in Step 5750 If not, the request is not stale, and is marked not stale in Step 5755. Following either of Step 5750 or 5755, the GwdbJsSetMsgStale exits m Step 5790. The GwdbJsSetMsgStale routine as depicted m Figure 57 may be implemented using the following C++ code: void CGWJϊngine GwdbJsSetMsgStale(char *staleFlag) { static char gotStaleDuration=0, static long setMsgLife, static char *funcName = "GwdbJsSetMsgStale"; / / Only get this once per process lifetime. if (gotStaleDuration == 0) {
FILE *fp, char duratιon[INIJVlAXLNSZ+ l], if ( (fp=OpenInιFιle()) '= NULL) ( setMsgLife = 0; (void) ιnιGetParameter(fp, "GATEWAYADMIN", "SetMsgLife", duration); setMsgLife = atol(duratιon); / / could return 0; handled later, (void) CloseΙniFιle(fp),
\ if (setMsgLife == 0) { setMsgLife = 5 * 60, / / Default to 5 minutes;
} gotStaleDuration = 1 ,
) / / If the message has expired its lifetime. if ( (m_setKeyFιelds.merchantTιme+setMsgLife) < m_setRequestTime)
*staleFlag = _TRUE, / / request is stale, else
*staleFlag = JrALSE, / / honour request, it is not stale. return;
}
Gwdb Insert SetMsg Figure 58 depicts the GwdbJnsertSetMsg routine. This routine is called from Step 5230 as illustrated in Figure 52A. Execution begins in 5800. In Step 5810, the routine invokes a database insert function by, for example, executing an SQL INSERT command. In Step 5820, the database return code is obtained in order to be used as a return code from the GwbdJnsertSetMsg routine. In Step 5830, a database commit function is performed, thereby instructing the database engine to commit the database changes to a permanent recording, i.e., by writing the information to the file, and/or by journalizing the change made by INSERT function. In Step 5890, the routine returns control to the calling program.
The GwdbJnsertSetMsg as depicted in Figure 58 may be implemented using the following C++ code: gwDBRC CGWJ2ngine::GwdbJnsertSetMsg() i
EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION; / / Key. char *h_xid = &(m_setKeyFields.xid[0]); long h_rrpidBase = m_setKeyFields.rrpidBase; int h_retryCount = m_setKeyFields.retryCount;
/ / Columns to insert into. char *h_mid = &(m_setKeyFields.mid[0]); char *h_tid = &(m_setKeyFields.tid[0]); char h_merchantTime[26j; int h. requestType = (int) m_setKeyFields.reqType; char h_requestTime[26J; int h_requestClass = (int) m_setRequestClass; int h_requestDisposition = (int) m_setRequestDisposition; char h_responseTime[26]; int h_responseClass = (int) m_setRequestClass; int h_responseDisposition = (int) m_setResponseDisposition; char *h_responseCode = m_setResponseCode;
EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION; static char *funcName = "GwdbJnsertSetMsg"; gwDBRC dbrc; GWJVlakeDateStπng(h_merchantTιme, &(m_setKeyFields.merchantTιme) ), GWJvIakeDateStπng(h_requestTιme, &m_setRequestTime); GWjVϊakeDateStπng(h_responseTιme, &m_setResponseTime);
EXEC SQL INSERT INTO setmsg ( xid, rrpidbase, retrvcount, mid, tid, merchanttime, requesttype, requesttime, requestclass, requestdisposition, responsetime, responseclass, responsedisposition, responsecode
VALUES
h_xιd, .h_rrpιdBase, .h_retryCount, :h_mιd, :h ιd, TOJDATE(.h_merchantTιme, 'DY MON DD HH24:MI:SS YYYY'), . h_requestType ,
TOJ}ATE(:h_requestTιme, 'DY MON DD HH24:MI:SS YYYY'), h_requestClass, h_requestDispositιon,
TOJ}ATE(.h_responseTιme, 'DY MON DD HH24.MLSS YYYY'), h_responseClass, h_responseDιsposιtιon, :h_responseCode
dbrc = DbJirror(funcName),
(void) DbJ2ommιt(funcName), return (dbrc);
Gwbd GetHost se
Figure 59 depicts the Gwbd_GetHostMsg routine. This routine is called by Step 5245 as shown in Figure 52B Execution begins in Step 5900. In Step 5910, the routine invokes a database select function by, for example, executing an SQL SELECT command In Step 5920, the database return code is obtained in order to be used as a return code from the GwbdJnsertSetMsg routine. In Step 5930, the Gateway checks to see whether the database retrieve operation was successfully performed. If so, execution proceeds to Step 5935. In Step 5935, the Gateway sets a number of status variables from the values retrieved from the database records. This includes the time the request was made, the time a response was received, the contents of the request string, the contents of the response string, and a sequence number for this request. In Step 5940, a commit operation is performed. [What is the point of a commit operation following a retrieval, as opposed to an insert or an update?] In Step 5900, control returns to the calling program.
The GwdbJ3etHostMsg as depicted in Figure 59 may be implemented using the following C++ code: gwDBRC CGW_Engme::GwdbJ3etHostMsg()
struct tm requestTimeTM; struct tm responseTimeTM; EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION;
/ / Key. char *h_xid = &(m_setKeyFields.xid[0]); long h_rrpidBase = m_setKeyFields.rrpidBase; / / Indicator Variables. short h_requestStringInd; short h_responscStringInd; / / Columns to retreive. long h_sequenceNo 0; int *h_reqYear = &requestTimeTM.tm_year; int *h_reqMonth = &requestTimeTM.tm_mon; int *h_reqDay = &requestTimeTM.tm_mday; int *h_reqHour = βsrequestTimeTM.tmJiour; int *h_reqMinute = &requestTimeTM.tm_min; int *h_reqSecond = &requestTimeTM.tm_sec; int *h_requestDisposition = (int *) &mJιostRequestDisposition;
VARCHAR h_requestString[ 128]; int *h_resYear = &responseTimeTM.tm_year; int *h_resMonth = &responseTimeTM.tm_mon; int *h_resDay = &responseTimeTM.tm_mday; int *h_resHour = &responseTimeTM.tmJ our; int *h_resMinute = &responseTimeTM.tm_min; mt *h_resSecond = &responseTimeTM.tm_sec; int *h_responseDisposιtion = (int *) -ScmJ ostResponseDisposition;
VARCHAR h_responseString[ 128]; EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION; static char *funcName = "GwdbJjetHostMsg"; gwDBRC dbrc;
/ / Set the "tm" structures to null. Set tm sdst to - 1 so that the
// mktimef) function will determine if whether Daylight Savings Time
/ / is active. memset(&requestTimeTM, '\0' , sιzeof(tm) ); requestTimeTM . tm Jsdst=- 1 ; memset(&responseTimeTM, '\0', sizeof(tm) ); responseTιmeTM.tm_ιsdst=- 1 ,
EXEC SQL SELECT sequenceno,
TOJ^UMBER( TO 3HAR(requesttιme,'YYYY'))- 1900, / / see "man mktime" TCLNUMBER( TO_CHAR(requesttιme,'MM'))- l , / / see "man mktime"
TO JUMBER( TO_CHAR(requesttime,'DD')), TOJWMBER( TO 3HAR(requesttime,,HH24,))> TOJWMBER( TO HAR(requesttime,'MT)), TOJWMBER( TO 3HAR(requesttime,'SS')), requestdisposition, requeststring,
TOJWMBER(TO_CHAR(responsetime,'YYYY'))- 1900, / / see "man mktime" TOJMUMBER(TO_CHAR(responsetime,'MM'))-l, // see "man mktime"
TOJ UMBER(TOJ3HAR(responsetime,'DD')), TO lUMBER(TO_CHAR(responsetime,'HH24')), TC NUMBER(TO_CHAR(responsetime,'MT)), TOJSIUMBER(TO HAR(responsetime,'SS)), responsedisposition, responsestring INTO
:h_sequenceNo,
:h_reqYear, :h_reqMonth, :h_reqDay, :h_reqHour, :h_reqMinute, :h_reqSecond, :h_requestDisposition, :h_requestString:h_requestStringInd, :h_resYear, :h_resMonth, :h_resDay, :h_resHour, :h_resMinute, :h_resSecond, :h_responseDisposition, :h_responseString:h_responseStringInd
FROM hostmsg WHERE xid = :h_xιd AND rrpidbase = :h_rrρidBase; dbrc = DbJError(funcName); if (dbrc == GWDB_SUCCESS) { if (h_requestStringInd == - 1) h_requestString.len=0; if (h_responseStringInd == - 1) h_responseString.len=0; mJiostRequestTime = mktime( fitrequestTimeTM ); mJiostResponseTime = mktime ( &responseTimeTM ); HMJ3etRequestString( mJ-iostSpecificMessage, h_requestStπng.arr, h_requestStπng.len) ; HMJ3etResponseString( mJ ostSpecificMessage, h_responseString.arr, h_responseString.len); HMJ etSequenceNo( mJiostSpecificMessage, h_sequenceNo);
(void) DbJ3ommιt(funcName); return (dbrc); Gwdb InsertHostMsg
Figure 60 depicts the GwdbJnsertHostMsg routine. This routine is called by Step 5270 as illustrated in Figure 52B Execution begins in Step 6000. In Step 6010, the routine invokes a database insert function by, for example, executing an SQL INSERT command. In Step 6020, the database return code is obtained in order to be used as a return code from the GwbdJnsertSetMsg routine in Step 6040, a commit operation is performed. In Step 6090, the routine returns control to the calling program.
The GwdbJnsertHostMsg as depicted in Figure 60 may be implemented using the following C++ code: gwDBRC CGWJΞngine GwdbJnsertHostMsgQ
(
EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION, / / Key. char *h_xid = &(m_setKeyFields.xid[0]); long h_rrpιdBase = m_setKeyFieIds.rrpidBase; int h_retryCount = m_setKeyFields.retryCount;
/ / Columns to insert into. long h_sequenceNo = 0; char h_requestTιme[26]; int h_requestDisposιtιon = (int) mJiostRequestDisposition; char h_responseTιme[26]; int h_responseDisposιtιon = (int) mJiostResponseDisposihon; EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION, static char *funcName = "GwdbJnsertHostMsg"; gwDBRC dbrc,
GWJ\ΛakeDateStπng(h_requestTιme, fismJiostRequestTime);
GWJVΪakeDateStrmg(h_responseTιme, &mJιostResponseTime); EXEC SQL INSERT INTO hostmsg
( xid, rrpidbase, retrycount, sequenceno, requesttime, requestdisposition, responsetime, responsedisposition )
VALUES
(
:h_xid, :h_rrpidBase, :h_retryCount,
:h_sequenceNo, TOJDATE(:h_requestTime, 'DY MON DD HH24:MI:SS YYYY'),
:h_requestDisposition,
TOJ3ΛTE(:h_responseTime, 'DY MON DD HH24:MI:SS YYYY), : h_responseDisposition
); dbrc = DbJϊ,rror(funcName);
(void) DbJHommit(funcName); return (dbrc);
Gwdb UpdateSetMsgResponselnfo
Figure 61 depicts a flow diagram for the Gwdb JpdateSetMsgResponselnfo routine. Execution begins at Step 6100. In Step 6110, the routine invokes a database update function by, for example, executing an SQL UPDATE command. In Step 6120, the database return code is obtained in order to be used as a return code from the GwbdJJpdateSetMsgResponselnfo routine. In Step 6190, the routine returns control to the calling program.
The GwdbJJpdateSetMsgResponselnfo as depicted in Figure 61 may be implemented using the following C++ code: gwDBRC CGWJϊngine::GwdbJJpdateSetMsgResponseInfo()
EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION; / / Key. char *h_xid = &(m_setKeyFields.xid[0]); long h_rrpιdBase = m_setKeyFields.rrpιdBase; int h_retryCount = m_setKeyFιelds. retryCount,
/ / Columns to update. char h_responseTιme[26]; int h_responseClass = (int) m_setResponseClass; int h_responseDιsposιtιon = (int) m_setResponseDisposιtιon, char *h_responseCode = m_setResponseCode;
EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION, static char *funcName = "GwdbJJpdateSetMsgResponselnfo", gwDBRC dbrc;
GWjVlakeDateStrmg(h_responseTιme, &m_setResponseTιme); EXEC SQL UPDATE setmsg SET responsetime = TOJ3ATE( h_responseTιme, 'DY MON DD HH24:MI.SS YYYY'), responseclass = .h_responseClass, responsedisposition = -h_responseDιsposιtιon, responsecode = :h_responseCode WHERE xid = h_xιd AND rrpidbase = h_rrpιdBase AND retrycount = h_retryCount; dbrc = DbJ£rror(funcName); (void) DbJCommιt(funcName), return (dbrc), )
Figure 62 is the mam administration display for the Gateway in accordance with a preferred embodiment A set of menu selections are presented at 6200 which will be descπbed in more detail for each display Figure 63 is a configuration panel m accordance with a preferred embodiment The configuration panel provides access to management information for configuπng a gateway management information database. The Merchant Identifier (Mid) 6310 is a thirty character, alphanumeric field that uniquely defines a merchant. The Merchant Name 6320 is a fifty character, alphanumeric field, the Edit 6330 and Delete field 6340 are hyperlinks to detailed panels for modifying information in the management information database Figure 64 is a host communication display for facilitating communication between the gateway and the acquirer payment host The IP Address Field 6410 contains the Internet Protocol address for communicating via TCP/IP to the Internet The TCP logical port field 6430 uniquely identifies the port for accessing the Internet, and the SAVE field 6430 invokes stormg of the host communication information in the database Figure 65 is a Services display m accordance with a preferred embodiment This display initiates portions of the Gateway such as the host muhtplixer 2130 of Figure 21 Figure 66 is a graphical representation of the gateway transaction database in accordance with a preferred embodiment Each of the fields represents a portion of the internet database schema in accordance with a preferred embodiment
Gateway System Administration As descπbed above, the gateway is a secure computer system that mediates Internet based payment transactions between merchant servers and the acquiπng bank's card processing host. The gateway supports secure communications between merchants using the Internet and acquirers using private financial networks and maintains appropπate logs of all transactions
Figure 67 illustrates the gateway hardware architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment Internet 6730 based merchants communicate transaction information via merchant servers 6700 running the VPOS software described earlier to a gateway 6740 The gateway 6740 performs all conversion necessary to route transaction requests through the bank network 6750 to the host processor 6760 Results from the host legacy system 6760 are routed back through the bank network 6750 to the gateway 6740 which transfers the information through the Internet 6730 to the merchant system 6700
Figure 68 is a block diagram setting forth the gateway software architecture in accordance with a preferred embodiment The gateway 6870 includes an SSL-compliant HTTP server 6800 that ensures transport-level security of HTTP communication between the gateway 6870 and the acquirer's data operations center The VPOS transmits SET requests utilizing HTTP and public key certificates are used to facilitate authentication of merchant and gateway identity The HTTP server 6800 facilitates the communication between the gateway 6870 and the VPOS terminals over the Internet utilizing HTTP. The VPOS terminals are configured to communicate with the gateway utilizing the gateway IP address and port number. The HTTP server 6800 also supports HTML pages for gateway system administration, and utilizes Netscape's Enterprise Server 2.0 to support URL access to the port number. The administrative information contained on the gateway can be accessed by any commercial browser if the user has appropriate authority to access the gateway.
The gateway web adaptor 6820 is a Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program that is invoked by the HTTP Server 6800 when a request arrives from a VPOS terminal. The web adaptor 6820 extracts the contents of a posted transaction and passes it to the SET library 6850 which decrypts the SET request into a plain text SET object utilizing the cryptographic library 6810. The SET library 6850 then calls the gateway engine 6870 to convert the plaintext SET object into a host specific request message utilizing the host message converter 6860. When a response is received, it is passed to the SET library 6850 for encryption utilizing the cryptographic library 6810. The encrypted SET response is sent back to the VPOS terminal. An error is logged if an invalid HTTP request is detected, if the library cannot decrypt the SET response, or if the library cannot encrypt the SET response. Stale messages are rejected.
For credit card transactions, the gateway 6870 supports Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) requests providing for message encryption, authentication and encapsulation. The SET librεuy 6850, converts SET requests into messages that are processed by the Host Message Converter. The SET Cryptographic library 6810 performs the following functions. 1) Converts an encrypted byte stream from an HTTP message sent by a POST method from a VPOS terminal to a plaintext SET object representing the request; and 2) converts a plaintext SET object representing the response into an encrypted byte stream which is transmitted back to the originating VPOS terminal. The SET library 6850 uses the cryptographic library for all standards based security operations. The cryptographic library also provides an interface to the cryptographic hardware.
The host message converter 6860 converts messages to bank-specific formats and routes messages to the appropriate host processor. The converter 6860 also converts messages from the host processor to the format used by the SET library 6850. The multi-threaded gateway engine 6870 utilizes SET decryption and encryption and the host message converter 6860 to support simultaneous SET requests from multiple VPOS terminals. The gateway also determines whether a plaintext SET request is an original request, an honest retry attempt, or a replay attack. The possible results include for an honest retry, possibly because an earlier response did not reach the VPOS, the gateway looks up the response from the database and returns it. If it is a replay attack, an error is logged. If it is an original request, then the VPOS engine proceeds to convert it to a host-specific request message. Then, it sends the request out to the remote host via the gateway host multiplexer 6890 and waits for a response. The gateway also logs all intermediate processing states, request messages and response messages, and groups all protocol-specific processing actions in a module with common API functions. The gateway also converts host responses to plaintext SET response objects, logs an error if the forward conversion fails, logs an error if the host multiplexer 6890 cannot send the request, logs an error if the gateway times out the response and logs an error if the reverse conversion fails.
The gateway host multiplexer 6890 communicates with the host based on the host's IO address and port number. If the host does not support TCP/IP, a link-level protocol converter must be installed. The gateway host multiplexer also sends multiple request messages to the host, serializes them, and receives messages asynchronously from the host and matches each of them with the corresponding request message which allows a particular gateway process to stop waiting and proceed with the reverse conversion.
The gateway 6870 stores all transaction information in a relational database 6845 controlled by a database server 6840 and specifically designed for high transaction volume. The database also records the details and state of every transaction processed by the gateway and generates transaction reports utilizing the gateway administrative interface. The sequence generator
6880 supplies the gateway with unique sequence numbers utilized in host request messages for identification of each transaction. An optional host simulator resides on the gateway server and transparently simulates a host for testing purposes. The gateway host communication configuration screen can utilize the IP address and port address of the host simulator to simulate a host processor that receives host requests and supplies host responses for testing purposes, and returns an authorization approval response message appropriately formatted. During normal transaction processing the host simulator is disabled and the gateway communication configuration screen contains the IP address and port number of the host processor.
The gateway includes a set of tools for administering gateway, database, operating system and Web server software. Also, the database schemas and the gateway administrative interface allows system administrators to create custom database reports to remotely monitor gateway performance. A gateway merchants display is provided to manage the merchant information on a gateway. Merchants can be added, deleted or modified using a display. The gateway also incorporates a system variable reflective of the maximum length of time to allow for a transaction request to reach the gateway from the VPOS terminal If the stale message time limit is exceeded, then the transaction request is rejected and the merchant must resend the transaction. All of the gateway tools are accessible from commercial browsers assuming the user requesting the access has appropπate authorization
The gateway provides a secure server that mediates transactions between merchants VPOS (Virtual Point-Of-Sale) servers and a financial institution's host processor The gateway supports secure communications between merchants using the Internet on one side, and the host processor using legacy secure financial networks on the other side. Between the two interfaces, the gateway maintains a detailed log of all transactions, whether completed or m- progress The gateway can handle multiple requests simultaneously and is designed to be easily scaled to handle a high transaction load
The gateway accepts transactions from merchants over the Internet and converts them to a host- specific format before forwarding them to a host processor belonging to an existing financial network Responses from the host, after the reverse conversions, are returned to the originating merchants over the Internet Transactions between VPOS and the gateway are made secure by utilizing the SET protocol for all communication.
GATEWAY CORE ENGINE COMPONENTS
This document details a software interface between the gateway core engine software component and the host message specific software that implements the host specific financial message formatting and conversion functions The gateway performs the following functions 1. Receives encrypted payment requests from merchants, as HTTP POST messages via the Internet. 52. Unwraps and decrypts the requests
3. Authenticates digital signatures of the requests based on certificates.
4. Supports transaction types and card types as required by a financial institution.
5. Accepts concurrent VPOS transactions from each of the merchant servers.
6. Converts transaction data to host-specific formats and forward the mapped requests (in 0 the clear) to the host processor using the existing financial network.
7. Receives transaction responses from the host.
8. Converts the responses from host-specific formats and correlate the mapped responses with the original requests.
9. Encrypts the responses, encapsulates them in HTTP reply messages, and sends them back to 5 the originating merchants over the Internet
10. Provides transaction logging in a relational database, symbolic transaction tracing, performance reporting, and other system administration functions.
The Host Message interface is the interface between the gateway core engine and the host specific functions that implement steps 6 through 8 m the above list There may be more than one Host Message implementation but only one vGATE core software implementation
Host Message Interface .Purpose 5 The Host Message interface grew from the desire to separate the core functions of the gateway software from those functions that are host specific There are a variety, currently over 1 ,400 understood by VeriFone equipment and software, of legacy financial networks and protocols that exist worldwide We expect to have great demand for our VPOS and gateway payment solutions and must be in a position to quickly develop and deploy our Internet payment solutions for the top Banks and acquirers The Host Message interface (HM interface) will be used by the vaπous software development organizations of VeπFone to develop software that will enable the gateway product to be deployed with existing financial networks without changing the interface point to the financial network Gateway, along with VPOS allows the acquirers to offer Internet Payment solutions to their Merchant base without changing their current financial networks
The VPOS software, although it too can be customized and branded for a particular acquirer, is not as tightly coupled with the financial network as is gateway. The protocol between the VPOS and gateway that is currently used is SET and this protocol, in pnnciple, isolates the VPOS software from the legacy network that it is ultimately connected to (via gateway).
Overview
The host specific portion of gateway are accessed by the gateway core engine by calling the functions contained m the Host Message implementation. The software that implements the host message interface is linked to the gateway core engine software either statically or dynamically (shared object libraπes in UNIX or DLLs on Windows NT). The Host Message API is defined in this document
The software that implements the host message interface must be re-entrant. The gateway engine will call the host message interface from either a process or a thread. The gateway engine is designed to be multi-threaded and will be capable of handling multiple requests simultaneously.
The host message interface is a "C based API The implementaUon of the host specific library must be implemented in "C++" as some of the data that is needed is contained m "C++" objects and is only accessible usmg the methods for those objects The host specific software need only use very basic features of "C++" and need not be completely designed and or programmed using object-oπented techniques.
Transaction Types
There are currently seven transaction types, or payment request types, that can arπve at gateway from VPOS Each of these request types has an associated request object and response object. There are methods that are made public for each of these request objects that allow the host specific module to "get" the data from the incoming request in order to build the host specific request There are also public "methods" for the response object allowing the host specific functions to "set" the response data that will be communicated by the gateway engine back to VPOS.
VGATE API Figure 69 illustrates the gateway components and interfaces in accordance with a preferred embodiment. The gateway API specifies the expected behaviors and information exchange for transaction processing functions, transaction data structures, SET access functions, certificate management functions, string utility functions and system configuration parameters. The architecture includes three distinct sections to enhance distribution of the functions. The upper API 6910 consists of concise functions which are available via a call out interface to custom modules 6901-6903 provided by application developers. The lower API 6940 allows the gateway 6930 and the custom modules 6901-6903 to call in to reusable helper functions 6950-6970 which facilitate isolation from possible future fluctuations in structural definitions of SET data elements. The system configuration custom parameters 6920 include the more static information elements required for such things as the network address of the host or its proxy equipment, timeout values, expected length of certain messages and other system configuration information. These parameters are specified as name-value pairs in the gateway system initialization file.
The vGATE SET Access API shields application developers from the structural complexities of the SET (Secure Electronic Transaction) protocol by providing high-level access functions to SET-defined data elements and allowing the use of such functions to be integrated seamlessly with the translations of a particular acquirer-specific message format. The need for the SET Access API is twofold: first, program abstraction and, second, separation of concerns. The forest of deeply nested data structures generated from compiling the textual SET ASN.1 definitions is very tedious to traverse, and direct exposition to multiple levels of pointer manipulation is a major distraction in developing acquirer-driven custom applications for vGATE. Furthermore, the SET proposed standard, still in draft form, has been and is expected to be going through various revisions in which the ASN. l definitions are changed significantly. Any code that is involved in directly accessing the container structures will have to be rewritten. The above two software-engineering considerations are serious enough to warrant a solution using abstract representations and access methods. The vGATE SET Access API provides the application developers with a set of predefined classes for each of the SET messages with simple access methods to get data from, and set values to, the different elements of the SET protocol data units. The present content of the API is a current implementation of the PCL (Payment Class Library) 6950. In using the SET Access API, vGATE application developers will be able to insulate their code from all future fluctuations in SET structural definitions. For example, extensions to SET are segregated from the standard SET functions utilizing an extend SET PCL 6960.
The system is partitioned to separate design concerns at different levels and to allow for graceful adaptations by external modules. The language was selected for the API by recognizing, classifying, distilling and exposing the programmatic activities that are typically required for translating legacy payment protocols and in communicating with host processors. Within a generic framework of reusable, prefabricated components (the core gateway), points of access have been defined to allow customization activities to occur (gateway API). The resulting architecture allows a software developer to focus on custom applications by freeing them from the underlying operational details already handled by the gateway core engine.
The gateway core handles basic transaction management (control flow, logging, error detection and recovery), internal interprocess communication, relational database access, communication with vPOS terminals over the Internet, interfacing with a host processor via a legacy network, and overall system administration. Whereas the gateway controls the processing of payment messages, it has no embedded knowledge of any acquirer- specific payment protocols.
The custom applications for a particular acquirer can be developed in C or C++ and linked to the gateway core software either statically or dynamically. If they are dynamically linked, then they are considered "shared objects" on Unix or "dynamic link libraries" on Windows NT. A gateway installation consists of the core gateway engine and the custom modules designed for a particular acquirer. While various embodiments have been described above, it should be understood that they have been presented by way of example only, and not limitation. Thus, the breadth and scope of a preferred embodiment should not be limited by any of the above described exemplary embodiments, but should be defined only in accordance with the following claims and their equivalents.

Claims

CLAIMSWhat is claimed is:
1. A method for processing information accumulated at a gateway between a network application and a host system utilizing a gateway administrative interface, comprising the steps of:
(a) receiving information at the gateway from the network;
(b) processing the information;
(c) storing gateway transaction and administrative information at the gateway in a database;
(d) receiving requests for gateway information from a network application at the gateway administrative interface and translating the requests into a query for the database;
(0 submitting the query to the database;
(g) receiving gateway information from the database in response to the query; and
(h) transmitting the gateway information to the network application.
2. A method, as recited in clεdm 1 , further comprising the step of processing requests for gateway from a browser utilizing the Internet.
3. A method as recited in claim 1, wherein the gateway information includes dynamic tracing of transactions.
4. A method as recited in claim 1, wherein the gateway information includes status information.
5. A method as recited in claim 1, wherein the gateway information includes exception information associated with transactions.
6. A method as recited in claim 1 , wherein the network communication utilizes HTTP for information exchange.
7. A method as recited in claim 1, wherein the gateway administrative interface provides system configuration parameters to the gateway.
A method as recited in claim 1 , wherein the gateway administrative interface activates gateway functions.
9. A system for processing administrative information accumulated at a gateway between a network application and a host system utilizing a gateway administrative interface, comprising:
(a) a network adaptor that receives encrypted information at the gateway from the network;
(b) a software code segment that decrypts the information;
(c) a first application program interface to access custom modules and process the information;
(d) a database that stores gateway administrative information at the gateway;
(e) a gateway administrative interface that receives requests for gateway information from a network application and translates the requests into a query for the database; w a software code segment that submits the query to the database;
(g) a software code segment that receives gateway information from the database in response to the query; and
(h) a software code segment that transmits the gateway information to the network application.
10. A system as recited in claim 9, further comprising the step of processing requests for gateway information from a browser utilizing the Internet.
11. A system as recited in claim 9, wherein the gateway information includes dynamic tracing of transactions.
12. A system as recited in claim 9, wherein the gateway information includes status information on transactions.
13. A system as recited in claim 9, wherein the gateway information includes exception information associated with transactions.
14, A method as recited in claim 9, wherein the network communication utilizes HTTP for information exchange
15. A computer program embodied on a computer-readable for processing administrative information accumulated at a gateway between a network application and a host system utilizing a gateway administrative interface, compπsmg:
(a) a code segment that receives encrypted information at the gateway from the network;
(b) a code segment that decrypts the information;
(c) a first application program interface to access custom modules and process the information;
(d) a code segement that stores gateway administrative information at the gateway;
(e) a code segment that receives requests for gateway information from a network application and translates the requests into a query for the database;
(f) a code segment that submits the query to the database;
(g) a code segment that receives gateway information from the database in response to the query, and
(h) a code segment that transmits the gateway information to the network application.
16 A computer program as recited in claim 15, further compπsing a code segment that processes requests for gateway information from a browser utilizing the Internet.
17 A computer program as recited in claim 15, wherein the gateway information includes dynamic tracing of transactions
18, A computer program as recited in claim 15, wherein the gateway information includes status information on transactions
19 A computer program as recited in claim 15, wherein the gateway information includes exception information associated with transactions.
20 A computer program as recited in claim 15, wherein the network communication utilizes HTTP for information exchange.
PCT/US1997/017377 1996-09-26 1997-09-26 A system, method and article of manufacture for a gateway system architecture with system administration information accessible from a browser WO1998013796A2 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP97945312A EP0934578A2 (en) 1996-09-26 1997-09-26 A system, method and article of manufacture for a gateway system architecture with system administration information accessible from a browser
AU46541/97A AU4654197A (en) 1996-09-26 1997-09-26 A system, method and article of manufacture for a gateway system architecture with system administration information accessible from a browser

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US08/721,167 1996-09-26
US08/721,167 US5931917A (en) 1996-09-26 1996-09-26 System, method and article of manufacture for a gateway system architecture with system administration information accessible from a browser

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1998013796A2 true WO1998013796A2 (en) 1998-04-02
WO1998013796A3 WO1998013796A3 (en) 1998-09-17

Family

ID=24896829

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1997/017377 WO1998013796A2 (en) 1996-09-26 1997-09-26 A system, method and article of manufacture for a gateway system architecture with system administration information accessible from a browser

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (2) US5931917A (en)
EP (1) EP0934578A2 (en)
AU (1) AU4654197A (en)
WO (1) WO1998013796A2 (en)

Cited By (25)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0961245A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Automated banking machine with a print URL feature
EP0961248A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Automated banking terminal with security features such as for example signed applets
EP0961246A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Methods by which an ATM selectively accesses documents based on the transaction function devices present in the machine
EP0961250A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Method of delivering different documents for producing displays at different machines (multilingual, special features, advertising, etc.)
EP0961249A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated System configuration where certain transaction devices are run through browser interface to HTTP and other devices are run responsive to messages in ATM legacy system
EP0961247A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Automated transaction machine which operates responsive to HTML documents accessed with a browser
EP0961252A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Automated banking machine with selective accessing of HTML documents and other promotional information during dwell time in the machine transaction sequence
EP0964374A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-15 Diebold, Incorporated Transaction data object features including persistence, passing object and using object data for printing
EP1030276A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 2000-08-23 Diebold, Incorporated Using server ATM to present device status messages and accessing/operating devices for service activity with browser interface
EP1030275A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 2000-08-23 Diebold, Incorporated Terminal configuration methods
EP1030277A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 2000-08-23 Diebold, Incorporated Legacy interface for communication with existing host systems (including passing object features)
US6363363B1 (en) * 1996-06-17 2002-03-26 Verifone, Inc. System, method and article of manufacture for managing transactions in a high availability system
GB2332604B (en) * 1997-12-18 2003-03-19 Ibm A method and apparatus for electronically integrating data captured in heterogeneous information systems
EP0961251A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Automated banking machine with accessing data based on customer inputs including biometric customer identification and producing selected displays based on customer identity (profile bean)
EP1030495A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Pre-navigate bean (including testing for download speed in determining whether to access HTTP records)
US6983259B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2006-01-03 Ebs Group Limited Anonymous trading system
US7024386B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2006-04-04 Ebs Group Limited Credit handling in an anonymous trading system
US7184982B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2007-02-27 Ebs Group Limited Architecture for anonymous trading system
US7270267B2 (en) 2001-03-29 2007-09-18 3M Innovative Properties Company System for third party management of product manufacture ordering by a franchisee upon approved products of franchisor
WO2007125412A2 (en) * 2006-05-03 2007-11-08 Skype Limited Secure transmission system and method
US7333952B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2008-02-19 Ebs Group Limited Compound order handling in an anonymous trading system
US7366690B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2008-04-29 Ebs Group Limited Architecture for anonymous trading system
US7774260B2 (en) 2000-06-23 2010-08-10 Ebs Group Limited Deal matching in an anonymous trading system
US7827085B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2010-11-02 Ebs Group Limited Conversational dealing in an anonymous trading system
US10147089B2 (en) 2012-01-05 2018-12-04 Visa International Service Association Data protection with translation

Families Citing this family (375)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5742845A (en) 1995-06-22 1998-04-21 Datascape, Inc. System for extending present open network communication protocols to communicate with non-standard I/O devices directly coupled to an open network
US20020178051A1 (en) 1995-07-25 2002-11-28 Thomas G. Scavone Interactive marketing network and process using electronic certificates
US6785905B1 (en) * 1995-10-24 2004-08-31 Sony Corporation Television transmitter, television transmitting method, television receiver and television receiving method
US9519915B1 (en) 1996-12-23 2016-12-13 Catalina Marketing Corporation System and method for providing shopping aids and incentives to customer through a computer network
US5931917A (en) * 1996-09-26 1999-08-03 Verifone, Inc. System, method and article of manufacture for a gateway system architecture with system administration information accessible from a browser
US6230193B1 (en) * 1996-10-31 2001-05-08 3Com Corporation Method and apparatus supporting network communications
US6233318B1 (en) * 1996-11-05 2001-05-15 Comverse Network Systems, Inc. System for accessing multimedia mailboxes and messages over the internet and via telephone
US20050165699A1 (en) * 1996-11-12 2005-07-28 Hahn-Carlson Dean W. Processing and management of transaction timing characteristics
US8392285B2 (en) 1996-11-12 2013-03-05 Syncada Llc Multi-supplier transaction and payment programmed processing approach with at least one supplier
US20080172314A1 (en) 1996-11-12 2008-07-17 Hahn-Carlson Dean W Financial institution-based transaction processing system and approach
US20070055582A1 (en) * 1996-11-12 2007-03-08 Hahn-Carlson Dean W Transaction processing with core and distributor processor implementations
US8396811B1 (en) 1999-02-26 2013-03-12 Syncada Llc Validation approach for auditing a vendor-based transaction
US6161113A (en) * 1997-01-21 2000-12-12 Texas Instruments Incorporated Computer-aided project notebook
FI111195B (en) * 1997-02-24 2003-06-13 Solid Information Technology O Intelligent transaction
US7272625B1 (en) 1997-03-10 2007-09-18 Sonicwall, Inc. Generalized policy server
US8914410B2 (en) 1999-02-16 2014-12-16 Sonicwall, Inc. Query interface to policy server
US7821926B2 (en) 1997-03-10 2010-10-26 Sonicwall, Inc. Generalized policy server
US6408336B1 (en) 1997-03-10 2002-06-18 David S. Schneider Distributed administration of access to information
US7580919B1 (en) 1997-03-10 2009-08-25 Sonicwall, Inc. Query interface to policy server
AU740012B2 (en) 1997-03-12 2001-10-25 Nomadix, Inc. Nomadic translator or router
WO1998041918A1 (en) * 1997-03-14 1998-09-24 Ian Charles Ogilvy Method and apparatus for controlling communications
US6829595B2 (en) * 1997-06-27 2004-12-07 Valista, Inc. MicroTrac internet billing solutions
DE19730363B4 (en) * 1997-07-15 2011-08-11 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Site-specific World Wide Web services in digital cellular communication networks
US6338074B1 (en) * 1997-07-23 2002-01-08 Filenet Corporation System for enterprise-wide work flow automation
US6233584B1 (en) * 1997-09-09 2001-05-15 International Business Machines Corporation Technique for providing a universal query for multiple different databases
US6671810B1 (en) * 1997-09-18 2003-12-30 Intel Corporation Method and system for establishing secure communication over computer networks
US7146618B1 (en) 1997-11-10 2006-12-05 Microsoft Corporation Simple object access protocol
US6457066B1 (en) * 1997-11-10 2002-09-24 Microsoft Corporation Simple object access protocol
US6247052B1 (en) * 1997-12-23 2001-06-12 Alcatel Usa Sourcing, L.P. Graphic user interface system for a telecommunications switch management system
US6856974B1 (en) * 1998-02-02 2005-02-15 Checkfree Corporation Electronic bill presentment technique with enhanced biller control
US6108644A (en) * 1998-02-19 2000-08-22 At&T Corp. System and method for electronic transactions
US6237004B1 (en) * 1998-02-24 2001-05-22 International Business Machines Corporation System and method for displaying data using graphical user interface control elements
US6421781B1 (en) 1998-04-30 2002-07-16 Openwave Systems Inc. Method and apparatus for maintaining security in a push server
US6654786B1 (en) * 1998-04-30 2003-11-25 Openwave Systems Inc. Method and apparatus for informing wireless clients about updated information
CA2237678C (en) * 1998-05-14 2003-08-05 Ibm Canada Limited-Ibm Canada Limitee Secure flexible electronic submission acceptance system
US6490617B1 (en) * 1998-06-09 2002-12-03 Compaq Information Technologies Group, L.P. Active self discovery of devices that participate in a network
US6738815B1 (en) * 1998-07-01 2004-05-18 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods for utilizing a communications network for providing mobile users access to legacy systems
US6947908B1 (en) 1998-08-27 2005-09-20 Citibank, N.A. System and use for correspondent banking
WO2000016219A1 (en) * 1998-09-10 2000-03-23 Pekarek Kostka Peter Detection of unauthorized use of payment instruments over commercial network systems
US6715080B1 (en) * 1998-10-01 2004-03-30 Unisys Corporation Making CGI variables and cookie information available to an OLTP system
US7533064B1 (en) 1998-10-07 2009-05-12 Paypal Inc. E-mail invoked electronic commerce
US6981222B2 (en) * 1998-10-22 2005-12-27 Made2Manage Systems, Inc. End-to-end transaction processing and statusing system and method
US8266266B2 (en) 1998-12-08 2012-09-11 Nomadix, Inc. Systems and methods for providing dynamic network authorization, authentication and accounting
US7194554B1 (en) 1998-12-08 2007-03-20 Nomadix, Inc. Systems and methods for providing dynamic network authorization authentication and accounting
US8713641B1 (en) 1998-12-08 2014-04-29 Nomadix, Inc. Systems and methods for authorizing, authenticating and accounting users having transparent computer access to a network using a gateway device
CA2291920A1 (en) * 1998-12-11 2000-06-11 Karuna Ganesan Technique for conducting secure transactions over a network
US6850991B1 (en) * 1998-12-22 2005-02-01 Citibank, N.A. Systems and methods for distributing information to a diverse plurality of devices
US6718332B1 (en) * 1999-01-04 2004-04-06 Cisco Technology, Inc. Seamless importation of data
US6157618A (en) * 1999-01-26 2000-12-05 Microsoft Corporation Distributed internet user experience monitoring system
US7917744B2 (en) * 1999-02-03 2011-03-29 Cybersoft, Inc. Apparatus and methods for intercepting, examining and controlling code, data and files and their transfer in instant messaging and peer-to-peer applications
US7389540B2 (en) * 1999-02-03 2008-06-17 Cybersoft, Inc. Apparatus and methods for intercepting, examining and controlling code, data and files and their transfer
US6678250B1 (en) * 1999-02-19 2004-01-13 3Com Corporation Method and system for monitoring and management of the performance of real-time networks
US6973444B1 (en) * 1999-03-27 2005-12-06 Microsoft Corporation Method for interdependently validating a digital content package and a corresponding digital license
US6678664B1 (en) * 1999-04-26 2004-01-13 Checkfree Corporation Cashless transactions without credit cards, debit cards or checks
US8117125B1 (en) 1999-06-11 2012-02-14 Citicorp Developement Center, Inc. Method and system for controlling certificate based open payment transactions
US6938154B1 (en) 2000-06-19 2005-08-30 Xerox Corporation System, method and article of manufacture for a cryptographic key infrastructure for networked devices
DE69919033T2 (en) 1999-07-19 2005-09-15 Ringfree Co., Ltd., Anyang METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PRODUCING A RECALL CONSISTING OF LANGUAGE / TEXT / PICTURE COMMERCIAL INFORMATION IN THE WAITING STATE OF A COMMUNICATION
US7657910B1 (en) * 1999-07-26 2010-02-02 E-Cast Inc. Distributed electronic entertainment method and apparatus
US7389256B1 (en) * 1999-08-02 2008-06-17 Jpmorgan Chase Bank, N.A. Network based financial transaction processing system
WO2001013297A2 (en) * 1999-08-14 2001-02-22 Merchantonline.Com, Inc. Method for conducting financial transactions over a wide area network
US8706630B2 (en) 1999-08-19 2014-04-22 E2Interactive, Inc. System and method for securely authorizing and distributing stored-value card data
US6317744B1 (en) * 1999-08-23 2001-11-13 International Business Machines Corporation Method, system and program products for browsing fully-associative collections of items
US7343351B1 (en) 1999-08-31 2008-03-11 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Methods and apparatus for conducting electronic transactions
US7505941B2 (en) 1999-08-31 2009-03-17 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Methods and apparatus for conducting electronic transactions using biometrics
US7953671B2 (en) * 1999-08-31 2011-05-31 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Methods and apparatus for conducting electronic transactions
US7889052B2 (en) * 2001-07-10 2011-02-15 Xatra Fund Mx, Llc Authorizing payment subsequent to RF transactions
US7837116B2 (en) 1999-09-07 2010-11-23 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Transaction card
US7239226B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2007-07-03 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for payment using radio frequency identification in contact and contactless transactions
US7319986B2 (en) * 1999-09-28 2008-01-15 Bank Of America Corporation Dynamic payment cards and related management systems and associated methods
US20020046046A1 (en) * 1999-09-30 2002-04-18 Barrott John Christopher Computerized family advising system and method for making funeral arrangements
US8190708B1 (en) 1999-10-22 2012-05-29 Nomadix, Inc. Gateway device having an XML interface and associated method
AU4135201A (en) * 1999-10-29 2001-05-30 Singleshop.Com System and method of data exchange for electronic transactions with multiple sources
US6876991B1 (en) 1999-11-08 2005-04-05 Collaborative Decision Platforms, Llc. System, method and computer program product for a collaborative decision platform
US7143144B2 (en) * 1999-11-30 2006-11-28 Ricoh Company, Ltd. System, method and computer readable medium for certifying release of electronic information on an internet
NZ519959A (en) * 1999-12-24 2004-08-27 Telstra New Wave Pty Ltd A virtual token carrying rules of use, capabilities and token relational information
US7103570B1 (en) * 1999-12-28 2006-09-05 First Data Corporation Merchant account activation system
US8543423B2 (en) 2002-07-16 2013-09-24 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Method and apparatus for enrolling with multiple transaction environments
US7172112B2 (en) 2000-01-21 2007-02-06 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Public/private dual card system and method
US8429041B2 (en) 2003-05-09 2013-04-23 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Systems and methods for managing account information lifecycles
WO2001065364A1 (en) 2000-03-02 2001-09-07 Wind River Systems, Inc. System and method for common code generation
WO2001067355A2 (en) 2000-03-07 2001-09-13 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System for facilitating a transaction
US20050015608A1 (en) 2003-07-16 2005-01-20 Pkware, Inc. Method for strongly encrypting .ZIP files
US6879988B2 (en) * 2000-03-09 2005-04-12 Pkware System and method for manipulating and managing computer archive files
EP1301878A2 (en) 2000-03-29 2003-04-16 Mastercard International, Inc. Method and system for processing messages in a bill payment and presentment system over a communications network
KR100670058B1 (en) * 2000-03-30 2007-01-16 삼성전자주식회사 A liquid crystal display
US6598036B1 (en) * 2000-04-04 2003-07-22 Ford Global Technologies, Llc Method for serving engineering rules on a network through servlet and applet
US7146422B1 (en) 2000-05-01 2006-12-05 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for validating documents based on a validation template
US6732175B1 (en) 2000-04-13 2004-05-04 Intel Corporation Network apparatus for switching based on content of application data
US6981028B1 (en) 2000-04-28 2005-12-27 Obongo, Inc. Method and system of implementing recorded data for automating internet interactions
US8099501B1 (en) * 2000-06-15 2012-01-17 Unisys Corporation Adapter architecture
US7237255B2 (en) * 2000-06-16 2007-06-26 Entriq Inc. Method and system to dynamically present a payment gateway for content distributed via a network
US7991697B2 (en) * 2002-12-16 2011-08-02 Irdeto Usa, Inc. Method and system to digitally sign and deliver content in a geographically controlled manner via a network
US6961858B2 (en) 2000-06-16 2005-11-01 Entriq, Inc. Method and system to secure content for distribution via a network
US7404084B2 (en) * 2000-06-16 2008-07-22 Entriq Inc. Method and system to digitally sign and deliver content in a geographically controlled manner via a network
AU6985601A (en) * 2000-06-16 2002-01-02 Mindport Usa Methods and systems to distribute content via a network utilizing distributed conditional access agents and secure agents, and to perform digital rights management (drm)
US7228427B2 (en) * 2000-06-16 2007-06-05 Entriq Inc. Method and system to securely distribute content via a network
US7024395B1 (en) * 2000-06-16 2006-04-04 Storage Technology Corporation Method and system for secure credit card transactions
US7389531B2 (en) * 2000-06-16 2008-06-17 Entriq Inc. Method and system to dynamically present a payment gateway for content distributed via a network
US7107462B2 (en) * 2000-06-16 2006-09-12 Irdeto Access B.V. Method and system to store and distribute encryption keys
US6754821B1 (en) * 2000-06-19 2004-06-22 Xerox Corporation System, method and article of manufacture for transition state-based cryptography
US7051199B1 (en) 2000-06-19 2006-05-23 Xerox Corporation System, method and article of manufacture for providing cryptographic services utilizing a network
US7421583B1 (en) 2000-06-19 2008-09-02 Xerox Corp System, method and article of manufacture for determining a price of cryptograph IC services based on a computational burden thereof
US6990468B1 (en) 2000-06-19 2006-01-24 Xerox Corporation System, method and article of manufacture for cryptoserver-based auction
JP3481188B2 (en) * 2000-06-20 2003-12-22 富士通株式会社 Online sales promotion method and device
WO2002007038A2 (en) * 2000-06-29 2002-01-24 Morrell Calvin Jr Systems and methods for producing reward advertising and distributing by click-through incentives
US7003490B1 (en) 2000-07-19 2006-02-21 Ge Capital Commercial Finance, Inc. Multivariate responses using classification and regression trees systems and methods
US7024552B1 (en) 2000-08-04 2006-04-04 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Location authentication of requests to a web server system linked to a physical entity
US6453329B1 (en) * 2000-08-08 2002-09-17 Stephen Dodgen Method for translating distilled filed for handling of large data files and programs by computing devices with limited processing capability
SG97913A1 (en) * 2000-08-10 2003-08-20 Payment Channel Pte Ltd System and method for the prevention of unauthorized transactions using common payment instruments over a public network
US8600783B2 (en) 2000-08-18 2013-12-03 The Crawford Group, Inc. Business to business computer system for communicating and processing rental car reservations using web services
US7899690B1 (en) 2000-08-18 2011-03-01 The Crawford Group, Inc. Extended web enabled business to business computer system for rental vehicle services
US7295992B2 (en) * 2000-08-30 2007-11-13 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Method and system for delivering products and services to a point of sale location
GB2366706B (en) * 2000-08-31 2004-11-03 Content Technologies Ltd Monitoring electronic mail messages digests
US7080147B2 (en) * 2000-09-04 2006-07-18 International Business Machines Corporation Computer network system, computer system, method for communication between computer systems, method for measuring computer system performance, and storage medium
US7233920B1 (en) 2000-09-07 2007-06-19 Paymentech, L.P. System and apparatus for credit transaction data transmission
US7330884B1 (en) * 2000-09-14 2008-02-12 Sony Corporation Internet strawman and user interface therefor
US6671687B1 (en) * 2000-09-29 2003-12-30 Ncr Corporation Method and apparatus for protecting data retrieved from a database
US8145567B2 (en) 2000-10-31 2012-03-27 Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. Transaction ID system and process
US7333953B1 (en) 2000-10-31 2008-02-19 Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. Method and apparatus for integrated payments processing and decisioning for internet transactions
US20020082927A1 (en) * 2000-11-22 2002-06-27 Borenstein Nathaniel S. Intelligent caching routers
US7286994B1 (en) 2000-12-26 2007-10-23 At&T Bls Intellectual Property, Inc. System for facilitating technician sales referrals
US7660754B1 (en) 2000-12-26 2010-02-09 At&T Delaware Intellectual Property Inc. Technician communications system with automated claims processing
US20020087468A1 (en) * 2000-12-28 2002-07-04 Ravi Ganesan Electronic payment risk processing
US20020128981A1 (en) * 2000-12-28 2002-09-12 Kawan Joseph C. Method and system for facilitating secure customer financial transactions over an open network
US7023970B1 (en) * 2001-01-30 2006-04-04 Cisco Technology, Inc. Arrangement in a local computer for sending voice messages to a unified communications system
US7207031B2 (en) * 2001-03-01 2007-04-17 Wind River Systems, Inc. System and method for utilization of a command structure representation
US7404212B2 (en) * 2001-03-06 2008-07-22 Cybersoft, Inc. Apparatus and methods for intercepting, examining and controlling code, data and files and their transfer
US20020133466A1 (en) * 2001-03-13 2002-09-19 Pugh James B. Internet payment system
US8121937B2 (en) 2001-03-20 2012-02-21 Goldman Sachs & Co. Gaming industry risk management clearinghouse
US7899722B1 (en) * 2001-03-20 2011-03-01 Goldman Sachs & Co. Correspondent bank registry
US8209246B2 (en) 2001-03-20 2012-06-26 Goldman, Sachs & Co. Proprietary risk management clearinghouse
US8140415B2 (en) * 2001-03-20 2012-03-20 Goldman Sachs & Co. Automated global risk management
US7206935B2 (en) * 2001-04-13 2007-04-17 Nokia Inc. System and method for protecting network appliances against security breaches
US20020161828A1 (en) * 2001-04-30 2002-10-31 Michael Edison System and method for communicating with a device
US20020161935A1 (en) * 2001-04-30 2002-10-31 James Blaisdell System and method for dynamically adding management information base object
US20020169984A1 (en) * 2001-05-09 2002-11-14 Kumar Gopikrishna T. Session management for wireless E-commerce
US7650314B1 (en) 2001-05-25 2010-01-19 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for securing a recurrent billing transaction
US7725427B2 (en) 2001-05-25 2010-05-25 Fred Bishop Recurrent billing maintenance with radio frequency payment devices
US20050198379A1 (en) 2001-06-13 2005-09-08 Citrix Systems, Inc. Automatically reconnecting a client across reliable and persistent communication sessions
US8831949B1 (en) 2001-06-28 2014-09-09 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Voice recognition for performing authentication and completing transactions in a systems interface to legacy systems
US7606712B1 (en) 2001-06-28 2009-10-20 At&T Intellectual Property Ii, L.P. Speech recognition interface for voice actuation of legacy systems
US7401144B1 (en) 2001-06-28 2008-07-15 At&T Delaware Intellectual Property, Inc. Technician intranet access via systems interface to legacy systems
US7219137B1 (en) 2001-06-28 2007-05-15 Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corp Technician wireline and wireless intranet access via systems interface to legacy systems
US7503480B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2009-03-17 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Method and system for tracking user performance
US7705732B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2010-04-27 Fred Bishop Authenticating an RF transaction using a transaction counter
US7119659B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2006-10-10 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Systems and methods for providing a RF transaction device for use in a private label transaction
US20040236699A1 (en) 2001-07-10 2004-11-25 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Method and system for hand geometry recognition biometrics on a fob
US7303120B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2007-12-04 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System for biometric security using a FOB
US7805378B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2010-09-28 American Express Travel Related Servicex Company, Inc. System and method for encoding information in magnetic stripe format for use in radio frequency identification transactions
US8960535B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2015-02-24 Iii Holdings 1, Llc Method and system for resource management and evaluation
US8001054B1 (en) 2001-07-10 2011-08-16 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for generating an unpredictable number using a seeded algorithm
US7762457B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2010-07-27 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for dynamic fob synchronization and personalization
US8294552B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2012-10-23 Xatra Fund Mx, Llc Facial scan biometrics on a payment device
US8284025B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2012-10-09 Xatra Fund Mx, Llc Method and system for auditory recognition biometrics on a FOB
US8538863B1 (en) 2001-07-10 2013-09-17 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for facilitating a transaction using a revolving use account associated with a primary account
US9454752B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2016-09-27 Chartoleaux Kg Limited Liability Company Reload protocol at a transaction processing entity
US7996324B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2011-08-09 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Systems and methods for managing multiple accounts on a RF transaction device using secondary identification indicia
US7668750B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2010-02-23 David S Bonalle Securing RF transactions using a transactions counter
US8548927B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2013-10-01 Xatra Fund Mx, Llc Biometric registration for facilitating an RF transaction
US7360689B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2008-04-22 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Method and system for proffering multiple biometrics for use with a FOB
US9031880B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2015-05-12 Iii Holdings 1, Llc Systems and methods for non-traditional payment using biometric data
US7925535B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2011-04-12 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for securing RF transactions using a radio frequency identification device including a random number generator
US7249112B2 (en) * 2002-07-09 2007-07-24 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for assigning a funding source for a radio frequency identification device
US7746215B1 (en) 2001-07-10 2010-06-29 Fred Bishop RF transactions using a wireless reader grid
US9024719B1 (en) 2001-07-10 2015-05-05 Xatra Fund Mx, Llc RF transaction system and method for storing user personal data
US7493288B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2009-02-17 Xatra Fund Mx, Llc RF payment via a mobile device
US8635131B1 (en) 2001-07-10 2014-01-21 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for managing a transaction protocol
US7827106B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2010-11-02 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for manufacturing a punch-out RFID transaction device
US6948159B2 (en) * 2001-08-01 2005-09-20 Lucent Technologies Inc. Automatic compilation of electronic telecommunications system message generation code
US20040205554A1 (en) * 2001-08-22 2004-10-14 Goswami Kumar K. Systems and methods for accessing multiple internal information sources of a business from a composite web document
CA2404552C (en) * 2001-09-21 2008-12-09 Corel Corporation System and method for secure communication
PT1442404E (en) * 2001-09-24 2014-03-06 E2Interactive Inc System and method for supplying communication service
GB2382439B (en) * 2001-10-26 2004-11-03 Qonnectis Group Ltd Internet based data communication system
US8819253B2 (en) * 2001-11-13 2014-08-26 Oracle America, Inc. Network message generation for automated authentication
US7243853B1 (en) * 2001-12-04 2007-07-17 Visa U.S.A. Inc. Method and system for facilitating memory and application management on a secured token
US20030110266A1 (en) * 2001-12-10 2003-06-12 Cysive, Inc. Apparatus and method of using session state data across sessions
US20070174383A1 (en) * 2001-12-11 2007-07-26 Open Invention Network Llc System and method for effectively configuring a marketsite application integrator
AU2002351573A1 (en) * 2001-12-12 2003-07-09 Paradata Systems Inc. Global integrated payment system
US7149702B1 (en) 2001-12-31 2006-12-12 Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corp. System and method for document delays associated with a project
US8190530B2 (en) 2002-01-30 2012-05-29 Visa U.S.A. Inc. Method and system for providing multiple services via a point-of-sale portal architecture
US7334251B2 (en) * 2002-02-11 2008-02-19 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Management of television advertising
US7228417B2 (en) 2002-02-26 2007-06-05 America Online, Inc. Simple secure login with multiple-authentication providers
US7707287B2 (en) * 2002-03-22 2010-04-27 F5 Networks, Inc. Virtual host acceleration system
JP2004054897A (en) * 2002-05-29 2004-02-19 Toshiba Tec Corp Card authentication server apparatus and card authentication program
US8108231B2 (en) 2002-06-14 2012-01-31 The Crawford Group, Inc. Method and apparatus for improved customer direct on-line reservation of rental vehicles
US20040039612A1 (en) 2002-06-14 2004-02-26 Neil Fitzgerald Method and apparatus for customer direct on-line reservation of rental vehicles
US20040003287A1 (en) * 2002-06-28 2004-01-01 Zissimopoulos Vasileios Bill Method for authenticating kerberos users from common web browsers
SE0202133D0 (en) * 2002-07-08 2002-07-08 Astrazeneca Ab Novel compounds
US7774473B2 (en) * 2002-07-31 2010-08-10 Oracle America, Inc. System and method for sticky routing of requests within a server farm
US7860975B2 (en) * 2002-07-31 2010-12-28 Oracle America, Inc. System and method for secure sticky routing of requests within a server farm
US8229855B2 (en) 2002-08-27 2012-07-24 Jean Huang Method and system for facilitating payment transactions using access devices
US7280981B2 (en) * 2002-08-27 2007-10-09 Visa U.S.A. Inc. Method and system for facilitating payment transactions using access devices
US20040044739A1 (en) * 2002-09-04 2004-03-04 Robert Ziegler System and methods for processing PIN-authenticated transactions
US6805287B2 (en) 2002-09-12 2004-10-19 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for converting a stored value card to a credit card
US6837425B2 (en) 2002-09-13 2005-01-04 Visa U.S.A. Inc. Compact protocol and solution for substantially offline messaging between portable consumer device and based device
JP3445986B1 (en) * 2002-09-27 2003-09-16 松下電器産業株式会社 Servers, devices and communication systems connected to the Internet
US20040139021A1 (en) 2002-10-07 2004-07-15 Visa International Service Association Method and system for facilitating data access and management on a secure token
US20040083296A1 (en) * 2002-10-25 2004-04-29 Metral Max E. Apparatus and method for controlling user access
EP1420546A1 (en) * 2002-11-15 2004-05-19 Tektronix International Sales GmbH Method to set up a communication sequence between at least two instances and protocol tester therefore
US7363000B2 (en) * 2002-12-13 2008-04-22 Agere Systems Inc. Method, system, and computer program product for providing multi-tiered broadcasting services
US7706540B2 (en) * 2002-12-16 2010-04-27 Entriq, Inc. Content distribution using set of session keys
US6888431B2 (en) * 2003-01-30 2005-05-03 Square D Company Remotely operated circuit breaker for emergency lighting circuits
US7370212B2 (en) 2003-02-25 2008-05-06 Microsoft Corporation Issuing a publisher use license off-line in a digital rights management (DRM) system
US7457778B2 (en) * 2003-03-21 2008-11-25 Ebay, Inc. Method and architecture for facilitating payment to e-commerce merchants via a payment service
US7900038B2 (en) * 2003-04-29 2011-03-01 Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. Method and apparatus for a broker entity
US7895119B2 (en) * 2003-05-13 2011-02-22 Bank Of America Corporation Method and system for pushing credit payments as buyer initiated transactions
US20040230526A1 (en) * 2003-05-13 2004-11-18 Praisner C. Todd Payment control system and associated method for facilitating credit payments in the accounts payable environment
GB0311621D0 (en) * 2003-05-20 2003-06-25 Nokia Corp A system for crytographical authentication
US8180681B2 (en) * 2003-08-05 2012-05-15 Intraware, Inc. Automated entitlement management method and apparatus for capturing maintenance renewals revenues
US20050033652A1 (en) * 2003-08-05 2005-02-10 James Brentano Method and system for managing digital goods
US7958163B2 (en) * 2003-08-05 2011-06-07 Intraware, Inc. System and method for bulk transfer of digital goods
US7412489B2 (en) * 2003-08-21 2008-08-12 Ameriprise Financial, Inc. Method and system for electronic archival and retrieval of electronic communications
US8489452B1 (en) 2003-09-10 2013-07-16 Target Brands, Inc. Systems and methods for providing a user incentive program using smart card technology
US7496097B2 (en) * 2003-11-11 2009-02-24 Citrix Gateways, Inc. System, apparatus and method for establishing a secured communications link to form a virtual private network at a network protocol layer other than at which packets are filtered
US7978716B2 (en) 2003-11-24 2011-07-12 Citrix Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for providing a VPN solution
US8655309B2 (en) 2003-11-14 2014-02-18 E2Interactive, Inc. Systems and methods for electronic device point-of-sale activation
US20050154886A1 (en) * 2004-01-12 2005-07-14 International Business Machines Corporation Declarative trust model between reverse proxy server and websphere application server
US8054947B2 (en) * 2004-02-02 2011-11-08 Eicon Networks Corporation Apparatus and method for multiplexing communication signals
US7610219B2 (en) * 2004-02-17 2009-10-27 Omar Farooq Sayed System and methods for assembly of a web site for an online store by a seller
US7774834B1 (en) 2004-02-18 2010-08-10 Citrix Systems, Inc. Rule generalization for web application entry point modeling
US7890996B1 (en) 2004-02-18 2011-02-15 Teros, Inc. Using statistical analysis to generate exception rules that allow legitimate messages to pass through application proxies and gateways
US20060167952A1 (en) * 2004-02-24 2006-07-27 First Data Corporation Communication point bulk mail
US20060184585A1 (en) * 2004-02-24 2006-08-17 First Data Corporation Communication point delivery instructions
US20060184586A1 (en) * 2004-02-24 2006-08-17 First Data Corporation Communication point relationship scheduling
US20050187864A1 (en) * 2004-02-24 2005-08-25 First Data Corporation System for maintaining presentation instrument data
US20070237315A1 (en) * 2004-02-24 2007-10-11 First Data Corporation System for maintaining type and/or status information for a party - communication point relationship
US20070239786A1 (en) * 2004-02-24 2007-10-11 First Data Corporation System for maintaining regulatory compliance of communication point data
US20060031256A1 (en) * 2004-05-20 2006-02-09 Bea Systems, Inc. Template language for mobile client
US7650432B2 (en) * 2004-05-20 2010-01-19 Bea Systems, Inc. Occasionally-connected application server
US7653008B2 (en) * 2004-05-21 2010-01-26 Bea Systems, Inc. Dynamically configurable service oriented architecture
US20060007918A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-01-12 Bea Systems, Inc. Scaleable service oriented architecture
US20060031355A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-02-09 Bea Systems, Inc. Programmable service oriented architecture
US20060031432A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-02-09 Bea Systens, Inc. Service oriented architecture with message processing pipelines
US20050267892A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-12-01 Patrick Paul B Service proxy definition
US7310684B2 (en) * 2004-05-21 2007-12-18 Bea Systems, Inc. Message processing in a service oriented architecture
US20050273847A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-12-08 Bea Systems, Inc. Programmable message processing stage for a service oriented architecture
US20060031353A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-02-09 Bea Systems, Inc. Dynamic publishing in a service oriented architecture
US8615601B2 (en) * 2004-05-21 2013-12-24 Oracle International Corporation Liquid computing
US20050273516A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-12-08 Bea Systems, Inc. Dynamic routing in a service oriented architecture
US20060080419A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-04-13 Bea Systems, Inc. Reliable updating for a service oriented architecture
US20060031481A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-02-09 Bea Systems, Inc. Service oriented architecture with monitoring
US20050278374A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-12-15 Bea Systems, Inc. Dynamic program modification
US20060031930A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-02-09 Bea Systems, Inc. Dynamically configurable service oriented architecture
US20060136555A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-06-22 Bea Systems, Inc. Secure service oriented architecture
US20060031431A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-02-09 Bea Systems, Inc. Reliable updating for a service oriented architecture
US20050270970A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-12-08 Bea Systems, Inc. Failsafe service oriented architecture
US20060005063A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-01-05 Bea Systems, Inc. Error handling for a service oriented architecture
US20050273502A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-12-08 Patrick Paul B Service oriented architecture with message processing stages
US20050267947A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-12-01 Bea Systems, Inc. Service oriented architecture with message processing pipelines
US20060031354A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-02-09 Bea Systems, Inc. Service oriented architecture
US20050273521A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-12-08 Bea Systems, Inc. Dynamically configurable service oriented architecture
US7774485B2 (en) * 2004-05-21 2010-08-10 Bea Systems, Inc. Dynamic service composition and orchestration
US20050278335A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-12-15 Bea Systems, Inc. Service oriented architecture with alerts
US20060031433A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-02-09 Bea Systems, Inc. Batch updating for a service oriented architecture
US20050264581A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-12-01 Bea Systems, Inc. Dynamic program modification
US20060069791A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2006-03-30 Bea Systems, Inc. Service oriented architecture with interchangeable transport protocols
US20050273517A1 (en) * 2004-05-21 2005-12-08 Bea Systems, Inc. Service oriented architecture with credential management
US8090837B2 (en) 2004-05-27 2012-01-03 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Communication in multiprocessor using proxy sockets
AU2005255456B2 (en) 2004-06-09 2007-09-13 Syncada Llc Order-resource fulfillment and management system and approach
US8762238B2 (en) 2004-06-09 2014-06-24 Syncada Llc Recurring transaction processing system and approach
EP1782259A4 (en) 2004-06-09 2009-04-22 Us Bancorp Licensing Inc Distributor-based transaction processing arrangement and approach
US7757074B2 (en) 2004-06-30 2010-07-13 Citrix Application Networking, Llc System and method for establishing a virtual private network
US8739274B2 (en) 2004-06-30 2014-05-27 Citrix Systems, Inc. Method and device for performing integrated caching in a data communication network
US8495305B2 (en) 2004-06-30 2013-07-23 Citrix Systems, Inc. Method and device for performing caching of dynamically generated objects in a data communication network
US7314165B2 (en) * 2004-07-01 2008-01-01 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Method and system for smellprint recognition biometrics on a smartcard
US7325724B2 (en) 2004-07-01 2008-02-05 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Method for registering a biometric for use with a smartcard
US7318550B2 (en) 2004-07-01 2008-01-15 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Biometric safeguard method for use with a smartcard
US7341181B2 (en) * 2004-07-01 2008-03-11 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Method for biometric security using a smartcard
US7363504B2 (en) 2004-07-01 2008-04-22 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Method and system for keystroke scan recognition biometrics on a smartcard
US7314164B2 (en) 2004-07-01 2008-01-01 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System for biometric security using a smartcard
US8442953B2 (en) 2004-07-02 2013-05-14 Goldman, Sachs & Co. Method, system, apparatus, program code and means for determining a redundancy of information
US8762191B2 (en) 2004-07-02 2014-06-24 Goldman, Sachs & Co. Systems, methods, apparatus, and schema for storing, managing and retrieving information
US8510300B2 (en) 2004-07-02 2013-08-13 Goldman, Sachs & Co. Systems and methods for managing information associated with legal, compliance and regulatory risk
US8996481B2 (en) 2004-07-02 2015-03-31 Goldman, Sach & Co. Method, system, apparatus, program code and means for identifying and extracting information
EP1771998B1 (en) 2004-07-23 2015-04-15 Citrix Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for optimizing communications between network nodes
EP1771979B1 (en) 2004-07-23 2011-11-23 Citrix Systems, Inc. A method and systems for securing remote access to private networks
US7657657B2 (en) * 2004-08-13 2010-02-02 Citrix Systems, Inc. Method for maintaining transaction integrity across multiple remote access servers
US7797724B2 (en) 2004-08-31 2010-09-14 Citrix Systems, Inc. Methods and apparatus for secure online access on a client device
US7711835B2 (en) 2004-09-30 2010-05-04 Citrix Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for reducing disclosure of proprietary data in a networked environment
US20060075114A1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-06 Citrix Systems, Inc. In-line modification of protocol handshake by protocol aware proxy
US8099482B2 (en) 2004-10-01 2012-01-17 E-Cast Inc. Prioritized content download for an entertainment device
US7752671B2 (en) * 2004-10-04 2010-07-06 Promisec Ltd. Method and device for questioning a plurality of computerized devices
US8347078B2 (en) 2004-10-18 2013-01-01 Microsoft Corporation Device certificate individualization
US8336085B2 (en) 2004-11-15 2012-12-18 Microsoft Corporation Tuning product policy using observed evidence of customer behavior
US8954595B2 (en) 2004-12-30 2015-02-10 Citrix Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for providing client-side accelerated access to remote applications via TCP buffering
US8549149B2 (en) 2004-12-30 2013-10-01 Citrix Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for providing client-side accelerated access to remote applications via TCP multiplexing
US8706877B2 (en) 2004-12-30 2014-04-22 Citrix Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for providing client-side dynamic redirection to bypass an intermediary
US8700695B2 (en) 2004-12-30 2014-04-15 Citrix Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for providing client-side accelerated access to remote applications via TCP pooling
US7810089B2 (en) 2004-12-30 2010-10-05 Citrix Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for automatic installation and execution of a client-side acceleration program
US8042165B2 (en) * 2005-01-14 2011-10-18 Citrix Systems, Inc. Method and system for requesting and granting membership in a server farm
US20060236385A1 (en) * 2005-01-14 2006-10-19 Citrix Systems, Inc. A method and system for authenticating servers in a server farm
US8255456B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2012-08-28 Citrix Systems, Inc. System and method for performing flash caching of dynamically generated objects in a data communication network
JP5183214B2 (en) 2005-01-24 2013-04-17 サイトリックス システムズ,インコーポレイテッド System and method for performing caching of dynamically generated objects in a network
EP1696648A1 (en) * 2005-02-28 2006-08-30 Eicon Networks Corporation System comprising a voice processing card and a host based protocol stack
US8438645B2 (en) 2005-04-27 2013-05-07 Microsoft Corporation Secure clock with grace periods
US20060265335A1 (en) * 2005-03-29 2006-11-23 Peter Hogan System and method for issuing prepaid debit card at point of sale
US8291224B2 (en) 2005-03-30 2012-10-16 Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. Distributed cryptographic management for computer systems
US8725646B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2014-05-13 Microsoft Corporation Output protection levels
US9363481B2 (en) 2005-04-22 2016-06-07 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Protected media pipeline
US9436804B2 (en) 2005-04-22 2016-09-06 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Establishing a unique session key using a hardware functionality scan
US20060248009A1 (en) * 2005-05-02 2006-11-02 Hicks Sydney S System and method for processing electronic payments
US20060265758A1 (en) 2005-05-20 2006-11-23 Microsoft Corporation Extensible media rights
US7774402B2 (en) 2005-06-29 2010-08-10 Visa U.S.A. Adaptive gateway for switching transactions and data on unreliable networks using context-based rules
US7367168B2 (en) * 2005-08-31 2008-05-06 Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. Skewed girder tie
US8874477B2 (en) 2005-10-04 2014-10-28 Steven Mark Hoffberg Multifactorial optimization system and method
FR2893165B1 (en) * 2005-11-08 2008-01-25 Sagem Defense Securite IDENTIFICATION OF RADIOFREQUENCY LABEL
US20070127484A1 (en) * 2005-12-02 2007-06-07 Dialogic Corporation Data transfer operations and buffer memories
US8301839B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2012-10-30 Citrix Systems, Inc. System and method for performing granular invalidation of cached dynamically generated objects in a data communication network
US7921184B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2011-04-05 Citrix Systems, Inc. System and method for performing flash crowd caching of dynamically generated objects in a data communication network
US8271309B2 (en) 2006-03-16 2012-09-18 The Crawford Group, Inc. Method and system for providing and administering online rental vehicle reservation booking services
US20070240230A1 (en) * 2006-04-10 2007-10-11 O'connell Brian M User-browser interaction analysis authentication system
US8650080B2 (en) * 2006-04-10 2014-02-11 International Business Machines Corporation User-browser interaction-based fraud detection system
US9817963B2 (en) 2006-04-10 2017-11-14 International Business Machines Corporation User-touchscreen interaction analysis authentication system
US8732044B2 (en) 2006-05-23 2014-05-20 Mastercard International Incorporated Electronic transaction apparatus and method
US20080027874A1 (en) * 2006-07-26 2008-01-31 Monseignat Bernard De System and method for facilitating secure transactions over communication networks
US7698220B2 (en) 2006-09-14 2010-04-13 E2Interactive, Inc. Virtual terminal for payment processing
US8645973B2 (en) * 2006-09-22 2014-02-04 Oracle International Corporation Mobile applications
US8712884B2 (en) 2006-10-06 2014-04-29 Syncada Llc Transaction finance processing system and approach
US7451926B2 (en) * 2006-11-03 2008-11-18 Microsoft Corporation Securing payment data
US8606670B2 (en) 2007-01-02 2013-12-10 First Data Corporation Integrated communication solution
US7933835B2 (en) 2007-01-17 2011-04-26 The Western Union Company Secure money transfer systems and methods using biometric keys associated therewith
US8818904B2 (en) 2007-01-17 2014-08-26 The Western Union Company Generation systems and methods for transaction identifiers having biometric keys associated therewith
US8521650B2 (en) 2007-02-26 2013-08-27 Zepfrog Corp. Method and service for providing access to premium content and dispersing payment therefore
US20080235394A1 (en) * 2007-03-20 2008-09-25 Docommand Solution, Inc. Secure Document Management System
US20080235175A1 (en) * 2007-03-20 2008-09-25 Docommand Solution, Inc. Secure Document Management System
US20080235780A1 (en) * 2007-03-20 2008-09-25 Docommand Solution, Inc. Secure Document Management System
US20080235236A1 (en) * 2007-03-20 2008-09-25 Docommand Solution, Inc. Secure Document Management System
US8504473B2 (en) 2007-03-28 2013-08-06 The Western Union Company Money transfer system and messaging system
US8996394B2 (en) * 2007-05-18 2015-03-31 Oracle International Corporation System and method for enabling decision activities in a process management and design environment
US8185916B2 (en) * 2007-06-28 2012-05-22 Oracle International Corporation System and method for integrating a business process management system with an enterprise service bus
US8204825B2 (en) * 2007-07-16 2012-06-19 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System, method and computer program product for processing payments
US7925694B2 (en) 2007-10-19 2011-04-12 Citrix Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for managing cookies via HTTP content layer
SG154345A1 (en) * 2008-01-09 2009-08-28 Banking Comp Services Private Electronic payment method of presentation to an automated clearing house (ach)
US8751337B2 (en) 2008-01-25 2014-06-10 Syncada Llc Inventory-based payment processing system and approach
US8090877B2 (en) 2008-01-26 2012-01-03 Citrix Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for fine grain policy driven cookie proxying
US8249066B2 (en) * 2008-02-19 2012-08-21 Dialogic Corporation Apparatus and method for allocating media resources
US7836120B2 (en) * 2008-06-04 2010-11-16 Dell Products L.P. Methods and media for custom mapping B2B transactions in information handling systems
US10970777B2 (en) 2008-09-15 2021-04-06 Mastercard International Incorporated Apparatus and method for bill payment card enrollment
KR20100045716A (en) * 2008-10-24 2010-05-04 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for communication based on certification using static and dynamic identifier
US7835994B1 (en) 2008-11-18 2010-11-16 United Services Automobile Association (Usaa) Systems and methods for performing flow-through banking
US20100145855A1 (en) * 2008-12-06 2010-06-10 Fordyce Iii Edward W Payment account processing which conveys non purchase related data exchanges
US8027912B1 (en) * 2009-04-30 2011-09-27 Intuit Inc. System and method for merchant risk management
US8725122B2 (en) * 2009-05-13 2014-05-13 First Data Corporation Systems and methods for providing trusted service management services
AU2009354947A1 (en) * 2009-11-06 2012-05-31 Edatanetworks Inc. Method, system, and computer program for attracting localand regional businesses to an automated cause marketing environment
US20110137740A1 (en) 2009-12-04 2011-06-09 Ashmit Bhattacharya Processing value-ascertainable items
US8799674B1 (en) * 2009-12-04 2014-08-05 Akamai Technologies, Inc. Method and system for handling sensitive data in a content delivery network
US8775245B2 (en) 2010-02-11 2014-07-08 News America Marketing Properties, Llc Secure coupon distribution
RU2581784C2 (en) 2010-02-12 2016-04-20 Мастеркард Интернейшнл Инкорпорейтед Apparatus and method for bill presentment and payment
RU2732585C2 (en) 2010-07-09 2020-09-22 Виза Интернэшнл Сервис Ассосиэйшн Gateway level of abstraction
US8782434B1 (en) 2010-07-15 2014-07-15 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York System and method for validating program execution at run-time
US8495243B2 (en) 2010-07-19 2013-07-23 Samuel W. Bellamy, III Dynamic and recursive transaction gateway system and method
US20120036048A1 (en) 2010-08-06 2012-02-09 Diy Media, Inc. System and method for distributing multimedia content
US9129099B1 (en) * 2010-08-17 2015-09-08 Vamsi Krishna Paruchuri Portable health record system and method
WO2012161808A2 (en) 2011-02-25 2012-11-29 Visa International Service Association Direct connection systems and methods
CN102955803B (en) * 2011-08-26 2016-04-20 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 A kind of website display method and browser
US9811827B2 (en) 2012-02-28 2017-11-07 Google Inc. System and method for providing transaction verification
US10354247B2 (en) * 2012-03-20 2019-07-16 First Data Corporation Systems and methods for processing payment transactions
US9183265B2 (en) * 2012-06-12 2015-11-10 International Business Machines Corporation Database query language gateway
US20140025571A1 (en) * 2012-07-23 2014-01-23 Its, Inc. System and method for dual message consumer authentication value-based eft transactions
US10592898B2 (en) 2012-09-12 2020-03-17 Zukunftware, Llc Obtaining a signature from a remote user
US9799029B2 (en) 2012-12-31 2017-10-24 Zukunftware, Llc Securely receiving data input at a computing device without storing the data locally
US10580000B2 (en) 2012-09-12 2020-03-03 Zukunftware, Llc Obtaining user input from a remote user to authorize a transaction
US10235672B2 (en) 2012-09-12 2019-03-19 Zukunftware, Llc Securely receiving from a remote user sensitive information and authorization to perform a transaction using the sensitive information
US10579996B2 (en) 2012-09-12 2020-03-03 Zukunftware, Llc Presenting a document to a remote user to obtain authorization from the user
US9122873B2 (en) 2012-09-14 2015-09-01 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York Continuous run-time validation of program execution: a practical approach
WO2014105702A1 (en) * 2012-12-31 2014-07-03 Neuwirth Volker Securely receiving from a remote user sensitive information and authorization to perform a transaction using the sensitive information
US9954848B1 (en) 2014-04-04 2018-04-24 Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. Central cryptographic management for computer systems
US10395227B2 (en) 2015-01-14 2019-08-27 Tactilis Pte. Limited System and method for reconciling electronic transaction records for enhanced security
US10037528B2 (en) 2015-01-14 2018-07-31 Tactilis Sdn Bhd Biometric device utilizing finger sequence for authentication
US9607189B2 (en) 2015-01-14 2017-03-28 Tactilis Sdn Bhd Smart card system comprising a card and a carrier
CN111612468B (en) * 2017-03-24 2024-03-19 创新先进技术有限公司 Method and device for transmitting transaction information and identifying consensus
US11475446B2 (en) 2018-12-28 2022-10-18 Mastercard International Incorporated System, methods and computer program products for identity authentication for electronic payment transactions
US11494769B2 (en) * 2019-01-10 2022-11-08 Mastercard International Incorporated System, methods and computer program products for identity authentication for electronic payment transactions
US11271933B1 (en) * 2020-01-15 2022-03-08 Worldpay Limited Systems and methods for hosted authentication service
US11853918B2 (en) * 2020-10-06 2023-12-26 Stripe, Inc. Processing transactions involving card reader devices

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0658862A2 (en) * 1993-12-14 1995-06-21 AT&T Corp. Method and system for mediating transactions that use portable smart cards

Family Cites Families (67)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3651511A (en) * 1968-02-05 1972-03-21 Stewart Warner Corp Traveling message display
US3956615A (en) 1974-06-25 1976-05-11 Ibm Corporation Transaction execution system with secure data storage and communications
US4277837A (en) 1977-12-30 1981-07-07 International Business Machines Corporation Personal portable terminal for financial transactions
US4303904A (en) 1979-10-12 1981-12-01 Chasek Norman E Universally applicable, in-motion and automatic toll paying system using microwaves
US4454414A (en) 1982-06-16 1984-06-12 Vericard Corporation Funds transfer system using optically coupled, portable modules
US4877950A (en) 1982-08-23 1989-10-31 Paperless Accounting, Inc. Electronic purse-device
US4906828A (en) 1983-02-28 1990-03-06 Paperless Accounting, Inc. Electronic money purse and fund transfer system
US4630201A (en) 1984-02-14 1986-12-16 International Security Note & Computer Corporation On-line and off-line transaction security system using a code generated from a transaction parameter and a random number
IL75702A0 (en) 1984-07-27 1985-11-29 Technion Res & Dev Foundation Apparatus for effecting and recording monetary transactions
US4614861A (en) 1984-11-15 1986-09-30 Intellicard International, Inc. Unitary, self-contained card verification and validation system and method
US4689478A (en) 1984-12-24 1987-08-25 Ncr Corporation System for handling transactions including a portable personal terminal
US4766293A (en) 1986-06-26 1988-08-23 Visa International Service Association Portable financial transaction card capable of authorizing a transaction in foreign currencies
JPH07104891B2 (en) 1986-08-05 1995-11-13 沖電気工業株式会社 Transaction processor
US4799156A (en) * 1986-10-01 1989-01-17 Strategic Processing Corporation Interactive market management system
US4859837A (en) 1987-03-23 1989-08-22 Halpern John Wolfgang Portable data carrier incorporating manually presettable processing modes
US4968873A (en) 1987-09-08 1990-11-06 Juergen Dethloff Smart card issuing and receiving apparatus
US4885789A (en) * 1988-02-01 1989-12-05 International Business Machines Corporation Remote trusted path mechanism for telnet
US5195130A (en) * 1988-05-05 1993-03-16 Transaction Technology, Inc. Computer and telephone apparatus with user friendly computer interface and enhanced integrity features
CA1321649C (en) 1988-05-19 1993-08-24 Jeffrey R. Austin Method and system for authentication
FR2639742B2 (en) 1988-05-30 1992-03-13 Dassault Electronique TRANSACTION SYSTEM OF THE MIXED ELECTRONIC PURSE TYPE
JPH0622030B2 (en) 1988-10-03 1994-03-23 富士通株式会社 Transaction validity confirmation method
US5016274A (en) 1988-11-08 1991-05-14 Silvio Micali On-line/off-line digital signing
JPH03179863A (en) * 1989-09-04 1991-08-05 Hitachi Ltd Method and equipment for automatic transaction
ZA907106B (en) 1989-10-06 1991-09-25 Net 1 Products Pty Ltd Funds transfer system
US5452352A (en) 1990-03-20 1995-09-19 Talton; David Automatic dialing system
GB9008362D0 (en) 1990-04-12 1990-06-13 Hackremco No 574 Limited Banking computer system
GB2251098B (en) * 1990-12-17 1994-10-05 Allied Irish Banks P L C Apparatus for processing data
US5221838A (en) 1990-12-24 1993-06-22 Motorola, Inc. Electronic wallet
JPH06503218A (en) 1991-04-16 1994-04-07 バラス,ジョン Method and apparatus for placing orders from remote locations
US5283819A (en) * 1991-04-25 1994-02-01 Compuadd Corporation Computing and multimedia entertainment system
CA2054836A1 (en) * 1991-08-14 1993-02-15 William F. Gorog Home financial transaction system
GB9121995D0 (en) 1991-10-16 1991-11-27 Jonhig Ltd Value transfer system
US5453601A (en) 1991-11-15 1995-09-26 Citibank, N.A. Electronic-monetary system
US5557518A (en) * 1994-04-28 1996-09-17 Citibank, N.A. Trusted agents for open electronic commerce
US5448045A (en) 1992-02-26 1995-09-05 Clark; Paul C. System for protecting computers via intelligent tokens or smart cards
AU3944793A (en) * 1992-03-31 1993-11-08 Aggregate Computing, Inc. An integrated remote execution system for a heterogenous computer network environment
US5297030A (en) * 1992-04-08 1994-03-22 Ncr Corporation Method using bill and coin images on a touch screen for processing payment for merchandise items
US5476259A (en) 1992-06-11 1995-12-19 Gamin Weingardt Trust, A Nevada Trust Pari-mutuel electronic and live table gaming
CA2100134C (en) 1992-09-29 1999-06-22 Raymond Otto Colbert Secure credit/debit card authorization
US5611048A (en) * 1992-10-30 1997-03-11 International Business Machines Corporation Remote password administration for a computer network among a plurality of nodes sending a password update message to all nodes and updating on authorized nodes
US5329619A (en) * 1992-10-30 1994-07-12 Software Ag Cooperative processing interface and communication broker for heterogeneous computing environments
CH685891A5 (en) 1993-01-18 1995-10-31 Ascom Autelca Ag A method as security concept to prevent unauthorized use of a payment instrument for cashless settling on imprest
US5420405A (en) 1993-02-26 1995-05-30 Chasek; Norman E. Secure, automated transaction system that supports an electronic currency operating in mixed debit & credit modes
US5475826A (en) * 1993-11-19 1995-12-12 Fischer; Addison M. Method for protecting a volatile file using a single hash
US5524110A (en) * 1993-11-24 1996-06-04 Intel Corporation Conferencing over multiple transports
US5461217A (en) * 1994-02-08 1995-10-24 At&T Ipm Corp. Secure money transfer techniques using smart cards
US5600831A (en) * 1994-02-28 1997-02-04 Lucent Technologies Inc. Apparatus and methods for retrieving information by modifying query plan based on description of information sources
US5590038A (en) * 1994-06-20 1996-12-31 Pitroda; Satyan G. Universal electronic transaction card including receipt storage and system and methods of conducting electronic transactions
US5682325A (en) * 1994-09-12 1997-10-28 Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. Level 1 gateway for video tone networks
US5459304A (en) 1994-09-13 1995-10-17 At&T Ipm Corp. Smart card techniques for motor vehicle record administration
US5715314A (en) * 1994-10-24 1998-02-03 Open Market, Inc. Network sales system
US5793966A (en) * 1995-12-01 1998-08-11 Vermeer Technologies, Inc. Computer system and computer-implemented process for creation and maintenance of online services
US5590197A (en) * 1995-04-04 1996-12-31 V-One Corporation Electronic payment system and method
US5677955A (en) * 1995-04-07 1997-10-14 Financial Services Technology Consortium Electronic funds transfer instruments
US5710918A (en) * 1995-06-07 1998-01-20 International Business Machines Corporation Method for distributed task fulfillment of web browser requests
US5761499A (en) * 1995-12-21 1998-06-02 Novell, Inc. Method for managing globally distributed software components
US5737592A (en) * 1995-06-19 1998-04-07 International Business Machines Corporation Accessing a relational database over the Internet using macro language files
US5742845A (en) * 1995-06-22 1998-04-21 Datascape, Inc. System for extending present open network communication protocols to communicate with non-standard I/O devices directly coupled to an open network
US5710887A (en) * 1995-08-29 1998-01-20 Broadvision Computer system and method for electronic commerce
US5671280A (en) * 1995-08-30 1997-09-23 Citibank, N.A. System and method for commercial payments using trusted agents
US5638445A (en) 1995-09-19 1997-06-10 Microsoft Corporation Blind encryption
US5671279A (en) * 1995-11-13 1997-09-23 Netscape Communications Corporation Electronic commerce using a secure courier system
US5751961A (en) * 1996-01-31 1998-05-12 Bell Communications Research, Inc. Integrated internet system for translating logical addresses of internet documents to physical addresses using integrated service control point
US5754772A (en) * 1996-03-26 1998-05-19 Unisys Corporation Transaction service independent HTTP server-to-transaction gateway
US5715453A (en) * 1996-05-31 1998-02-03 International Business Machines Corporation Web server mechanism for processing function calls for dynamic data queries in a web page
US5729594A (en) * 1996-06-07 1998-03-17 Klingman; Edwin E. On-line secured financial transaction system through electronic media
US5931917A (en) * 1996-09-26 1999-08-03 Verifone, Inc. System, method and article of manufacture for a gateway system architecture with system administration information accessible from a browser

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0658862A2 (en) * 1993-12-14 1995-06-21 AT&T Corp. Method and system for mediating transactions that use portable smart cards

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP0934578A2 *

Cited By (45)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6363363B1 (en) * 1996-06-17 2002-03-26 Verifone, Inc. System, method and article of manufacture for managing transactions in a high availability system
GB2332604B (en) * 1997-12-18 2003-03-19 Ibm A method and apparatus for electronically integrating data captured in heterogeneous information systems
EP1030275A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Terminal configuration methods
EP0961247A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Automated transaction machine which operates responsive to HTML documents accessed with a browser
EP0961249A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated System configuration where certain transaction devices are run through browser interface to HTTP and other devices are run responsive to messages in ATM legacy system
EP0961252A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Automated banking machine with selective accessing of HTML documents and other promotional information during dwell time in the machine transaction sequence
EP0961252A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Automated banking machine with selective accessing of HTML documents and other promotional information during dwell time in the machine transaction sequence
EP0964374A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-15 Diebold, Incorporated Transaction data object features including persistence, passing object and using object data for printing
EP1030276A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 2000-08-23 Diebold, Incorporated Using server ATM to present device status messages and accessing/operating devices for service activity with browser interface
EP1030275A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 2000-08-23 Diebold, Incorporated Terminal configuration methods
EP1030277A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 2000-08-23 Diebold, Incorporated Legacy interface for communication with existing host systems (including passing object features)
EP0961246A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Methods by which an ATM selectively accesses documents based on the transaction function devices present in the machine
EP0961248A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Automated banking terminal with security features such as for example signed applets
EP1030277A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-23 Diebold, Incorporated Legacy interface for communication with existing host systems (including passing object features)
EP1030276A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Using server ATM to present device status messages and accessing/operating devices for service activity with browser interface
EP0961250A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Method of delivering different documents for producing displays at different machines (multilingual, special features, advertising, etc.)
EP0961249A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated System configuration where certain transaction devices are run through browser interface to HTTP and other devices are run responsive to messages in ATM legacy system
EP0961248A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Automated banking terminal with security features such as for example signed applets
EP0961245A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Automated banking machine with a print URL feature
EP0961247A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Automated transaction machine which operates responsive to HTML documents accessed with a browser
EP0961251A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Automated banking machine with accessing data based on customer inputs including biometric customer identification and producing selected displays based on customer identity (profile bean)
EP0961246A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Methods by which an ATM selectively accesses documents based on the transaction function devices present in the machine
EP0961245A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Automated banking machine with a print URL feature
EP0961250A2 (en) * 1998-05-27 1999-12-01 Diebold, Incorporated Method of delivering different documents for producing displays at different machines (multilingual, special features, advertising, etc.)
EP0964374A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Transaction data object features including persistence, passing object and using object data for printing
EP1030495A3 (en) * 1998-05-27 2004-06-30 Diebold, Incorporated Pre-navigate bean (including testing for download speed in determining whether to access HTTP records)
US7937306B2 (en) 2000-06-23 2011-05-03 Ebs Group Limited Architecture for anonymous trading system
US7024386B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2006-04-04 Ebs Group Limited Credit handling in an anonymous trading system
US7184982B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2007-02-27 Ebs Group Limited Architecture for anonymous trading system
US6983259B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2006-01-03 Ebs Group Limited Anonymous trading system
US7366690B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2008-04-29 Ebs Group Limited Architecture for anonymous trading system
US7774260B2 (en) 2000-06-23 2010-08-10 Ebs Group Limited Deal matching in an anonymous trading system
US8639607B2 (en) 2000-06-23 2014-01-28 Ebs Group Limited Conversational dealing in an anonymous trading system
US8027895B2 (en) 2000-06-23 2011-09-27 Ebs Group Limited Architecture for anonymous trading system
US7333952B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2008-02-19 Ebs Group Limited Compound order handling in an anonymous trading system
US7827085B1 (en) 2000-06-23 2010-11-02 Ebs Group Limited Conversational dealing in an anonymous trading system
US7882017B2 (en) 2000-06-23 2011-02-01 Ebs Group Limited Deal matching in an anonymous trading system
US7270267B2 (en) 2001-03-29 2007-09-18 3M Innovative Properties Company System for third party management of product manufacture ordering by a franchisee upon approved products of franchisor
WO2007125412A2 (en) * 2006-05-03 2007-11-08 Skype Limited Secure transmission system and method
AU2007245389B2 (en) * 2006-05-03 2011-09-01 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Secure transmission system and method
US8705565B2 (en) 2006-05-03 2014-04-22 Skype Secure transmission system and method
JP2009535955A (en) * 2006-05-03 2009-10-01 スカイプ・リミテッド Safe transmission system and method
WO2007125412A3 (en) * 2006-05-03 2008-01-17 Skype Ltd Secure transmission system and method
US11276058B2 (en) 2012-01-05 2022-03-15 Visa International Service Association Data protection with translation
US10147089B2 (en) 2012-01-05 2018-12-04 Visa International Service Association Data protection with translation

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US6304915B1 (en) 2001-10-16
US5931917A (en) 1999-08-03
EP0934578A2 (en) 1999-08-11
WO1998013796A3 (en) 1998-09-17
AU4654197A (en) 1998-04-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6304915B1 (en) System, method and article of manufacture for a gateway system architecture with system administration information accessible from a browser
US5978840A (en) System, method and article of manufacture for a payment gateway system architecture for processing encrypted payment transactions utilizing a multichannel, extensible, flexible architecture
US6253027B1 (en) System, method and article of manufacture for exchanging software and configuration data over a multichannel, extensible, flexible architecture
US5983208A (en) System, method and article of manufacture for handling transaction results in a gateway payment architecture utilizing a multichannel, extensible, flexible architecture
US6178409B1 (en) System, method and article of manufacture for multiple-entry point virtual point of sale architecture
US6373950B1 (en) System, method and article of manufacture for transmitting messages within messages utilizing an extensible, flexible architecture
US5850446A (en) System, method and article of manufacture for virtual point of sale processing utilizing an extensible, flexible architecture
US5889863A (en) System, method and article of manufacture for remote virtual point of sale processing utilizing a multichannel, extensible, flexible architecture
US6363363B1 (en) System, method and article of manufacture for managing transactions in a high availability system
US5943424A (en) System, method and article of manufacture for processing a plurality of transactions from a single initiation point on a multichannel, extensible, flexible architecture
US6072870A (en) System, method and article of manufacture for a gateway payment architecture utilizing a multichannel, extensible, flexible architecture
US5987132A (en) System, method and article of manufacture for conditionally accepting a payment method utilizing an extensible, flexible architecture
US5812668A (en) System, method and article of manufacture for verifying the operation of a remote transaction clearance system utilizing a multichannel, extensible, flexible architecture
US6002767A (en) System, method and article of manufacture for a modular gateway server architecture
US6119105A (en) System, method and article of manufacture for initiation of software distribution from a point of certificate creation utilizing an extensible, flexible architecture
US6324525B1 (en) Settlement of aggregated electronic transactions over a network
US5996076A (en) System, method and article of manufacture for secure digital certification of electronic commerce
US20030140007A1 (en) Third party value acquisition for electronic transaction settlement over a network
WO1997049072A9 (en) A system, method and article of manufacture for processing a plurality of transactions from a single initiation point on a multichannel, extensible, flexible architecture
WO1997049070A9 (en) System and method for transmitting messages
WO1997049053A9 (en) A system, method and article of manufacture for conditionally accepting a payment method utilizing an extensible, flexible architecture
WO1998005011A2 (en) A system, method and article of manufacture for secure, stored value transactions over an open communication network utilizing an extensible, flexible architecture
WO1997049050A9 (en) A system, method and article of manufacture for managing transactions in a high availability system
EP0935785A2 (en) A system, method and article of manufacture for managing transactions in a high availability system
WO1997049055A9 (en) A system, method and article of manufacture for a virtual point of sale processing utilizing a multichannel, extensible, flexible architecture

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GE GH HU IL IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG US UZ VN YU ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH KE LS MW SD SZ UG ZW AT BE CH DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GE GH HU IL IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG US UZ VN YU ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): GH KE LS MW SD SZ UG ZW AT BE CH DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1997945312

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

Ref document number: 1998515967

Format of ref document f/p: F

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1997945312

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: CA

WWR Wipo information: refused in national office

Ref document number: 1997945312

Country of ref document: EP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1997945312

Country of ref document: EP